JP2022171850A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's motivation to play a game by increasing a degree of attention to the game and interest in the game.

SOLUTION: A game machine 10 includes: a first start pocket 314R that game balls 99 can enter; a second start pocket 315 that game balls 99 can enter and has a different function from that of a first start pocket 314; and an electric support member 36 operable between a standby position for permitting entry of the game balls 99 into the first start pocket 314 and limiting entry of game balls into the second start pocket 315, and an operation position for limiting entry of game balls into the first start pocket 314 and permitting entry of game balls into the second start pocket 315.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 5

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

Generally, a pachinko game machine called a digipachi has a first starting port for performing a jackpot lottery when a game ball wins a prize. In addition, some game machines are provided with a second starting port that enables the winning of game balls by the operation of electric accessories in order to allow a large number of jackpot lotteries to be won with a small number of game balls. In addition, some game machines are provided with a distribution device that alternately distributes game balls to the first start port and the second start port (see Patent Document 1, for example).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-231902

By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to increase the degree of interest in the game and the interest in the game, thereby increasing the willingness of the player to play the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the level of interest in a game and the interest in the game, thereby increasing the willingness of the player to play the game.

The game machine according to the present invention is
A first winning port (314, 314R, 313′) into which a game ball can enter;
A second winning hole (315) that allows entry of a game ball and has a function different from that of the first winning holes (314, 314R, 313');
Restrict entry of game balls into one of the first winning opening (314, 314R, 313') and the second winning opening (314, 314R, 313'), and A first position (standby position) that allows the game ball to enter the other winning opening (315) different from the one winning opening (314, 314R), and the one winning opening (314, 314R, 313' ), and a second position (operating position) that restricts the entry of game balls into the other winning opening (315). 36, 36R, 36S) and
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the degree of attention to the game and the interest of the game, thereby increasing the player's desire to play the big win game.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine based on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; The front view which shows an example of the game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 5A is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the sorting device of the game machine shown in FIG. 1, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a sorting member of the sorting device. Sectional drawing for demonstrating the effect|action of a distribution member. Sectional drawing for demonstrating the effect|action of a sorting apparatus. Sectional drawing for demonstrating the effect|action of a sorting apparatus. 5(A) and 5(B) are cross-sectional views for explaining the operation of the sorting device, and FIG. 5(C) is a perspective view of the electric support member. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main controller of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of main timer interrupt processing executed by a main controller; FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of starting winning processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 14; FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of a through gate process procedure executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 14; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main controller; 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a normal symbol control process executed in the main process of FIG. 17; 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of normal electric accessory control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 17; Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 17; FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 17; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the sound lamp control device; The figure which shows an example of the table used with the main control apparatus of the game machine based on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 17; FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used with the main control apparatus of the game machine based on the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 17; FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used with the main control apparatus of the game machine based on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 17; FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 17; FIG. The front view showing an example of the game board of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows the principal part of the special variable prize-winning apparatus of the game machine shown in FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 34; Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the opening/closing execution mode control process executed in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37 . A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the opening/closing execution mode control process executed in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37 . FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 17; FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 17; FIG. The front view showing an example of the game board of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. Sectional drawing which shows the principal part of the feather accessory apparatus of the game machine shown in FIG. Sectional drawing which shows the principal part of the feather accessory apparatus of the game machine shown in FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device of the game machine shown in FIG. 42; 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main controller; 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the feather accessory device control process executed in the main process of FIG. 46; Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 46; 47 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 46; Sectional drawing which shows an example of the distribution apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 7th Embodiment of this invention. Sectional drawing which shows an example of the distribution apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 8th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 53(A) is a sectional view showing an example of a sorting device for a gaming machine according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 53(B) is a sorting device for a gaming machine according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. Sectional drawing which shows an example of an apparatus. FIG. 54(A) is a sectional view showing an example of a sorting device for a gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 54(B) is a sorting device for a gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Sectional drawing which shows an example of an apparatus. FIG. 55(A) is a plan view of the electric support member of the game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 55(B) is a plan view of the electric support member of the game machine according to the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 55(C) is a plan view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 56(A) is a perspective view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a sixteenth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 56(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A1-A1 of FIG. 56(A). FIG. 57(A) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. FIG. 57(C) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the support member, and FIG. 57C is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the electric support member of the game machine according to the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 58(A) is a perspective view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a twentieth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 58(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A2-A2 of FIG. 58(A). FIG. 59(A) is a perspective view of an electric support member for a game machine according to a twenty-first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 59(B) is a perspective view of an electric support member for a game machine according to a twenty-second embodiment of the present invention. figure. FIG. 60(A) is a perspective view showing a main part of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. The perspective view which shows the principal part of a support member. FIG. 61(A) is a perspective view showing a main part of an electric support member of a game machine according to the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 61(B) is an electric support member of the game machine according to the twenty-sixth embodiment of the present invention. The perspective view which shows the principal part of a support member. FIG. 62(A) is a perspective view of an electric support member for a game machine according to a twenty-seventh embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 62(B) is a perspective view of an electric support member for a game machine according to a twenty-eighth embodiment of the present invention. figure. FIG. 63(A) is a perspective view of an electric support member of a game machine according to the twenty-ninth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 63(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A3-A3 of FIG. 63(A). FIG. 64(A) is a view showing the essential parts of a game board including a sorting device and an electric support member of a game machine according to a thirtieth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 64(B) is a perspective view of the electric support member. FIG. 65(A) is a view of FIG. 64(A) when the electric support member is in a standby state, and FIG. 65(B) is a sectional view taken along line A3-A3 of FIG. 65(A). FIG. 66(A) is a view of FIG. 64(A) when the electric support member is in the operating position, and FIG. 66(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A4-A4 of FIG. 66(A). FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a main part of a game board including a sorting device and an electric tulip accessory device of a game machine according to a thirty-first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 68(A) is a view showing the essential parts of a game board including a sorting device and an electric support member for a game machine according to the thirty-second embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 68(B) is the thirty-third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a main part of a game board including a sorting device and an electric support member of the game machine according to the embodiment; FIG. 69(A) is a view showing the essential parts of a game board including a sorting device for a game machine and an electric support member in a standby state according to the thirty-fourth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. The perspective view of the principal part of A). Fig. 70(A) is a view showing the main part when the electric support member is at the operating position in Fig. 69(A); Fig. 70(B) is a perspective view showing the main part of Fig. 70(A); FIG. 71(A) is a view showing the essential parts of a game board including a sorting device and an electric support member of a game machine according to the thirty-fifth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 71(B) is a main part of FIG. The figure which shows a part. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a main part of a game board including a sorting device and an electric support member of a game machine according to a thirty-sixth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 73(A) is a view showing the essential parts of a game board including a sorting device for a game machine according to the thirty-seventh embodiment of the present invention and an electric support member in the standby position, and FIG. The perspective view of the principal part of A). FIG. 74(A) is a diagram showing the case where the electric support member is in the operating position in FIG. 73(B), and FIG. 74(B) is a plan view showing a modification of the electric support member according to the thirty-seventh embodiment of the present invention. . FIG. 75(A) is a view showing the essential parts of a game board including a sorting device and an electric support member for a game machine according to a thirty-eighth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 75(B) is a perspective view of the electric support member. 76(A) is a sectional view along the A5-A5 section line of FIG. 75(B), and FIG. 76(B) is a sectional view along the A6-A6 section line of FIG. 75(B). FIG. 77(A) is a diagram showing a main part including the electric support member when the electric support member is at the standby position, and FIG. 77(B) is a main part including the electric support member when the electric support member is at the operating position. illustration. FIG. 78 is a perspective view showing a modification of the electric support member according to the thirty-eighth embodiment of the present invention;

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION First to thirty-eighth embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings for better understanding of the present invention. Moreover, each of the following embodiments is an example that embodies the present invention, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 25. FIG.

[Schematic Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are developed views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. Hereinafter, the expressions of front, back, left, right, and up and down used in this embodiment shall be defined by the front and back direction D1, the up and down direction D2, and the left and right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine comprising a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14. It is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 14.例文帳に追加In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine will be described as an example of a game machine. The present invention can also be applied to game machines.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by being rotatably supported at its left end by the outer frame 14 . Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by being rotatably supported by the front frame 11 at its left end. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by being rotatably supported by the inner frame 12 at its left end.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an electric decoration part 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23 . The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 10) for switching an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, depending on whether or not the operation button 20 is pressed. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operating state (operated or not operated) of the operation button 20 . This operation button 20 is operated to execute an operation button effect or the like which is triggered by the operation of the operation button 20 by the player during a predetermined specific period in the special game effect.

Note that the installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it is a position where the player can operate. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one and may be two or more. Further, the operation switch 20a is not limited to a contact type switch, and may be a piezoelectric element or the like, as long as it can be used to detect the presence or absence of an operation by a player.

Also, instead of the operation buttons 20, a touch panel that displays touch keys and accepts operations of the touch keys by the player may be provided. Further, instead of the operation buttons 20, a panel 25 and a touch sensor for detecting a player's touch operation on the panel 25 may be provided. Also, the operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the operation of the player with respect to the touch panel or panel 25 is reflected in the operation button presentation or the like in the special game presentation.

The shooting handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to shoot the game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is played by shooting a game ball from a game ball shooting mechanism 32 described later with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, when the player operates the shooting handle 22, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

The upper tray 23 is arranged below the panel 25, stores game balls paid out from a payout device 132 of a payout mechanism 130 described later, and aligns the stored game balls in a row. It is used to lead to the game ball launching mechanism 32 . Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23 and is used to store surplus game balls on the upper plate 23 .

The panel 25 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10 . The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end portion of the front frame 11, and perform sound output in game effects and the like. In addition, the installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end portion of the front frame 11 . In addition, the electric decoration section 27 incorporates a light source such as an indicator lamp and an LED, and executes a lamp presentation by lighting mode such as lighting or blinking.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 2, the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

The control unit 33 has a main control unit 331 and a sub-control unit 332 . In the game machine 10 , a command (control signal) for instructing control contents is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub-control unit 332 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first left starting opening 314L, a first right starting opening 314R, a second starting opening 315, and a variable winning opening 316b. variable winning device 316, out port 317 (ejection port), first thru gate 318, second thru gate 319, variable display unit 34, main display unit 37, distribution device 35 and electric support which is an ordinary electric accessory A member 36 (movable accessory member) is provided. Hereinafter, the left first starting hole 314L and the right first starting hole 314R correspond to winning holes having the same function, and are collectively referred to as "first starting hole 314". The first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 may be collectively referred to as "starting ports 314, 315". Also, the first through gate 318 and the second through gate 319 may be collectively referred to as "through gates 318 and 319". The general winning opening 313, the first starting opening 314, the second starting opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316b correspond to winning openings having different functions.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out game balls shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 toward a game area on the board surface of the game board 31 . After being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that do not enter the various winning openings (general winning opening 313, first starting opening 314, second starting opening 315 or variable winning opening 316b) It is discharged from the out port 317 .

Here, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 includes a shooting rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The launching rail 321 is formed from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 is directed to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It guides. The ball feeding device 322 has driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the launch rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is driving means for shooting game balls supplied onto the shooting rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 . In the gaming machine 10 , the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled according to the operation of the shooting handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 to the game board 31 . The game ball shooting mechanism 32 may be a mechanism for shooting game balls using other drive means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323 .

Returning to the description of FIG. 4 , the general prize winning port 313, the first starting port 314, the second starting port 315, the variable winning port 316b, and the out port 317 are formed with openings penetrating the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. ing. Each of the general winning opening 313, the first left starting opening 314L, the first right starting opening 314R, the second starting opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316b has a ball entry sensor 313a, which can individually detect the passage of a game ball. 314La, 314Ra, 315a and 316a (see FIG. 10). The incoming ball sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, and 316a are proximity sensors having through holes, for example.

Through gates 318 and 319 are gates through which game balls can pass. The through gates 318 and 319 have incoming ball sensors 318a and 319a (see FIG. 10) capable of individually detecting game balls passing through the through gates 318 and 319, respectively. The incoming ball sensors 318a and 319a are, for example, proximity sensors having through holes. When the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319, a normal pattern winning lottery (normal determination ) is performed. However, the normal symbol winning lottery is not executed in the big winning game state. It should be noted that the lottery result of the normal symbol per lottery is indicated by the normal symbol which is a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the LED lamp pair in the normal symbol display 373 which will be described later. Hereinafter, "normal pattern" may be abbreviated as "normal pattern", for example, "normal pattern random number storage area" is an abbreviation for "normal pattern reservation area".

Here, the first through gate 318 is provided in the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 arranged in the lower center of the game board 31, and the passage of the game ball in the second passage 352 is detected by the entering ball sensor 318a. do. On the game board 31, there is a possibility that the game ball will pass through the first through gate 318 when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes the left side of the game board 31, that is, when the game ball is left-handed. The first through gate 318 may be located upstream of the electric support member 36 in the route leading to the right first starting port 314R in the sorting device 35, for example near the introduction port 350 above the sorting member 38. may be placed. In addition, the first through gate 318 may be arranged outside the sorting device 35 in the vicinity of the dead nail (navel nail) 31H. ) 31H may be arranged in the portion where 31H was provided. Furthermore, it is sufficient that the entrance ball sensor 318a can detect the passage of the game ball in the specific area (in this embodiment, the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35), and it is not necessary to configure it as a through gate. In this case, it is conceivable to attach a mark to the sorting device 35 at the position of the entering ball sensor 318a to indicate that it is a specific area.

On the other hand, the second through gate 319 is provided above the right portion of the variable winning device 316 on the right side of the game board 31 . In the game board 31, there is a possibility that the game ball passes through the second through gate 319 when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes the right side of the game board 31, that is, when the game ball hits to the right.

The entering ball sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a (see FIG. 10) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the entering ball sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, The detection result of 319 a is input to the main control unit 331 . In the following description, detection of a game ball entering by the entering ball sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, and 319a may be referred to as winning. The ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, and 319a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but it is possible to individually detect the entry of game balls by other detection methods. Any sensor may be used.

The variable winning device 316 has, in addition to the variable winning opening 316b, an opening/closing door 316c for switching presence/absence of restriction on entry of game balls into the variable winning opening 316b. The opening/closing door 316c is opened and closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31 . In the variable prize winning device 316, opening the opening/closing door 316c enables game balls to enter the variable winning opening 316b, and closing the opening/closing door 316c restricts entry of game balls to the variable winning opening 316b. be done. The variable winning device 316 is arranged on the right side of the game board 31, and the opening/closing door 316c is opened in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. Therefore, when the player shifts to the jackpot game state triggered by the fact that the lottery result in the jackpot game is a jackpot, the player moves to the variable winning port 316b by hitting right in the round game in which the open/close door 316c is opened. You can win the ball. As a result, the player can obtain more prize balls in the jackpot game than in the special game.

In the gaming machine 10, when the entry of a game ball into the first left starting hole 314L, the first right starting hole 314R or the second starting hole 315 is detected by the entering ball sensors 314La, 314Ra or the entering ball sensor 315a, the main A jackpot lottery (special determination) is performed by the control unit 331 . Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display section 37 according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Also, the lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, and the sub-control unit 332 controls the display etc. of the variable display unit 34 according to the lottery result.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, winning of a game ball to the general winning port 313, the first left starting port 314L, the first right starting port 314R, the second starting port 315, and the variable winning port 316b is detected by the entering ball sensor 313a, When detected by 314La, 314Ra, 315a and 316a, a preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, the number of winning balls when entering the first starting opening 314 or the second starting opening 315 is 3, and the ball enters the variable winning opening 316b. The number of prize balls in this case is 13. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the state shifts to a jackpot game state (special game state), and a round game (unit game, which will be described later) in which the variable winning opening 316b is opened. ) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times, 5 times, 16 times), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Also, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, the jackpot lottery is executed as described above. Then, when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot (first judgment result and second judgment result), the state shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state more advantageous to the player than the special figure game state. In this embodiment, the jackpot game state includes a 2R normal jackpot game state, a 2R probability variable jackpot game state, a 5R normal jackpot game state, a 5R probability variable jackpot game state, and a 16R probability variable jackpot game state. In the 2R normal jackpot game state and the 2R probability variable jackpot game state, the variable winning opening 316b is opened twice until a predetermined time elapses or until a predetermined number or more of game balls enter the variable winning opening 316b. It is a game state including the opening and closing execution mode that is performed. The 5R normal jackpot game state and the 5R probability variable jackpot game state are game states in which the round game is performed 5 times in the opening/closing execution mode, and the 16R probability variable jackpot game state is the game state in which the round game is performed 16 times in the opening/closing execution mode. In this embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same amount of game balls in any game state in the round game, and in terms of the game balls that can be obtained, the larger the number of round games in the opening and closing execution mode, the more the player It is an advantageous playing state. Therefore, in this embodiment, in terms of the number of game balls that can be acquired, the 16R variable jackpot is most advantageous for the player, followed by the 5R normal jackpot game state and the 5R variable jackpot game state. Yes, the 2R normal jackpot game state and the 2R probability variable jackpot game state are the most disadvantageous to the player.

The variable display unit 34 has a pattern display section 341 such as a liquid crystal display arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed substantially in the center of the game board 31 . The pattern display section 341 displays still images or moving images, and the display contents of the pattern display section 341 are controlled by the sub-control unit 332 . Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the symbol variation display and the special figure according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the ball entering the first start port 314 or the second start port 315 are displayed. Various displays such as game effect displays are performed. Also, the pattern display section 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or plasma display and an organic EL display. Furthermore, it is conceivable to provide one or a plurality of sub-display sections separately from the pattern display section 341 . The sub-display section is arranged, for example, in the upper portion, the lower portion, the left portion, or the right portion of the pattern display portion 341 . The sub display portion may be movable between a position covering the pattern display portion 341 and a position not covering the pattern display portion 341 . Also, the sub-display section may be arranged on the upper plate 23 .

For example, the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341 is performed by sequentially scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, and the like. In addition, sub-designs such as other characters or designs may be displayed between the main designs. Also, in this embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and there are 9 types of main symbols "1" to "9".

In the gaming machine 10, in the special symbol game, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols is stopped after the preset variation display time elapses from the start of the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341. be. More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the main symbols are varied along a preset variation direction (for example, the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, etc.), and the variation of the plurality of main symbols is stopped in order. Then, when the variation of the main symbols on all the lines stops and a predetermined time elapses, the symbol variation display ends.

The main display portion 37 is arranged in the upper right portion of the game board 31, and includes a first special symbol display device 371 (first special symbol display portion), a second special symbol display device 372 (second special symbol display portion), and normal symbols. A display 373 and a pending number display 374 are provided. Note that the main display section 37 may be arranged in the lower left or lower right part of the game board 31 .

The first special symbol display 371 is a 7-segment display that displays the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for winning the first starting port 314 . A symbol displayed on the 7-segment display as the first special symbol display 371 is called a first special symbol. In addition, in order to display the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the winning of the first start port 314, the first special symbol display device 371 stops displaying after the first special symbol is variably displayed. It's called pattern games.

The second special symbol display 372 is a 7-segment display that displays the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for winning the prize to the second starting port 315 . The symbol displayed on the 7-segment display as the second special symbol display 372 is called a second special symbol. In addition, display by stopping after changing the second special symbol for displaying the result of the lottery in the jackpot lottery is called a second special symbol game.

In addition, the first special design and the second special design may be collectively referred to simply as a special design. In addition, "special design" may be abbreviated as "special design". For example, "first special symbol" and "second special symbol" are abbreviations of "first special symbol" and "second special symbol" respectively, and "first special symbol game" and "second special symbol game ” are abbreviations of “first special symbol game” and “second special symbol game” respectively. Furthermore, the first special symbol display device 371 and the second special symbol display device 372 are not limited to 7-segment display devices. may be

The normal symbol display 373 determines whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 (normal electric accessory) in the main control unit 331 (whether to be in a support state) in response to the winning of the through gates 318 and 319. The lottery result in the lottery per normal pattern is clearly indicated. The normal symbol display 373 includes an LED lamp pair, and indicates the lottery result by a normal symbol that is a combination of lighting and extinguishing of these LED lamps. It should be noted that the normal symbol display 373 may be configured by another display including a 7-segment LED or the like instead of the pair of LED lamps.

In the holding number indicator 374, the holding number N of the variable display of the special symbol caused by the winning of the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 is a plurality of LED lamps in a row (8 pieces in this embodiment) is displayed by the number of lit lights. The display processing for such a pending number N is executed based on the pending number N stored in the special figure pending number storage area NA in the special figure pending storage area 412b of the RAM 412, which will be described later with reference to FIG.

The sorting device 35 is provided in the central lower portion of the game board 31 . As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5A, the sorting device 35 includes an introduction port 350, a sorting member 38, a first passage 351 and a second passage 352. As shown in FIG. In this sorting device 35, game balls 99 entered through the introduction port 350 move leftward (counterclockwise direction in FIGS. 4 and 5A) and rightward (FIGS. 4 and 5A) of the sorting member 38. 5(A) in the clockwise direction), the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 are alternately distributed.

The introduction port 350 is a portion that allows game balls to enter the sorting device 35 . The introduction port 350 is arranged directly below the life nail (navel nail) 31H of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the life nail 31H is introduced into the introduction port 350. - 特許庁A game ball is led to the life nail 31H mainly from the windmill 31F by the road nail 31M. Further, above the life nail 31H, there is provided a guiding part 31E for guiding a game ball dropped onto the stage 31S to the life nail 31H through a warp port 31W provided on the left side of the game board 31. Therefore, the game ball dropped to the stage 31S is also guided to the life nail 31H. Here, the windmill 31F and the warp port 31W are provided on the left side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. Therefore, in the game machine 10, the shooting handle 22 is operated so that the game balls sent to the game board 31 pass through the left side of the game board 31, that is, the game balls are collected in the life nail 31H by the so-called left-hand hitting, and the game balls are collected at the inlet. A game ball can be introduced into the sorting device 35 via 350 . In addition, in the game machine 10, when the shooting handle 22 is operated so that the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes through the right side of the game board 31, that is, when the game ball is hit to the right, the game ball enters the variable winning opening 316b. A nail is arranged in the life nail 31H so that the game balls do not gather, and the introduction of the game ball from the introduction port 350 of the sorting device 35 cannot be expected in the case of right-handed hitting. Therefore, it is easier for the player to receive a jackpot lottery using the sorting device 35 rather than right-handed, and left-handed is more advantageous to the player than right-handed. (See FIG. 13(B))), it is recommended to play the game left-handed.

The distribution member 38 distributes game balls introduced from the introduction port 350 to the first passage 351 or the second passage 352 . The first passage 351 is open downward, and the game balls distributed to the first passage 351 are released in the direction toward the left first starting port 314L provided directly below the first passage 351. The second passage 352 is open downward, and the game balls distributed to the second passage 352 are released in the direction toward the right first starting port 314R provided directly below the second passage 352.

As shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, the distribution member 38 has a rotating shaft 381, a partition piece 382, a ball receiving guide piece 383, and an eccentric portion 384. As shown in FIGS. In the distribution member 38 , the partition piece 382 , the ball receiving guide piece 383 and the eccentric portion 384 are integrally rotated about the rotating shaft 381 . The partition piece 382 extends perpendicularly to the ball receiving and guiding piece 383 from the center of the ball receiving and guiding piece 383 . The ball receiving guide piece 383 has a left ball receiving guide piece 385 on the left side of the partition piece 382 and a right ball receiving guide piece 386 on the right side of the partition piece 382 .

Also, the eccentric portion 384 changes the center of gravity of the distribution member 38 and has a moving member 387 and an accommodating portion 388 that accommodates the moving member 387 . The moving member 387 is, for example, a spherical body, a cylindrical body, or the like, and moves left and right in the housing portion 388 according to the posture of the distribution member 38 . When the distribution member 38 is in a right-tilted posture in which the partition piece 382 is tilted rightward with respect to the vertical direction (solid lines in FIGS. 5A and 5B), the moving member 387 , and the moving member 387 shifts the center of gravity of the distribution member 38 to the right side of the center. Thereby, the distribution member 38 can maintain the right tilting posture. On the other hand, when the distribution member 38 is in a left-tilted posture in which the partition piece 382 is tilted to the left with respect to the vertical direction (state of phantom lines in FIGS. 5A and 5B), the moving member 387 is It is positioned on the left side of the housing portion 388, and the center of gravity of the distribution member 38 is eccentric to the left side of the center. Thereby, the distribution member 38 can maintain the left-tilted posture.

In such a distribution member 38, a game ball 99 that has entered the distribution device 35 is placed between the partition piece 382 and the left ball receiving guide piece 385, and between the partition piece 382 and the right ball receiving guide piece 386. accepted anywhere in between. For example, as shown in FIGS. 6(A) and 6(B), when the distribution member 38 is tilted to the right, the game ball 99 is received between the partition piece 382 and the left ball receiving/inducing piece 385 . 6(C) and 6(D), when the distribution member 38 receives the game ball 99 between the partition piece 382 and the left ball reception/induction piece 385, the load of the game ball , it rotates to the left (counterclockwise direction) and changes to the left tilted posture. Thereby, the game ball 99 received by the partition piece 382 and the left ball receiving guide piece 385 is guided to the left side (first passage 351 side) along the left ball receiving guide piece 385 .

As shown in FIGS. 7(A) and 7(B), the game ball 99 guided to the left along the left ball receiving guide piece 385 falls along the first passage 351, and the first passage 351 It is possible to easily win a prize at the left first starting port 314L arranged directly below. In addition, although the first passage 351 is linear in FIG. 4 and the like, the first passage 351 may have a non-linear shape such as a bent shape, a curved shape, an inclined shape, or a combination of two or more of these shapes. may be In the case of such a non-linear first passage 351, the left first starting port 314L is positioned at a position where the game ball that has passed through the first passage 351 can easily win, depending on the position and shape of the exit of the first passage 351. placed in

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8(A), when the distribution member 38 is in the left tilting posture, the game ball 99 is received between the partition piece 382 and the right ball receiving/inducing piece 386 . Further, as shown in FIG. 8(B), when the distribution member 38 receives the game ball 99, it rotates to the right (clockwise direction) due to the load of the game ball, and changes to a right tilting posture. As a result, the game ball 99 received by the partition piece 382 and the right ball receiving/inducing piece 386 is guided to the right along the right ball receiving/inducing piece 386 and falls along the second passage 352 . At this time, the game ball 99 passes through the first through gate 318 . The passing of the game ball 99 through the first through gate 318 is detected by the ball entering sensor 318a (see FIG. 10). As a result, an opportunity is given to perform a normal symbol winning lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 (ordinary electric accessory), and when the result of the normal symbol winning lottery is a win, the electric support member 36. is activated. The probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery wins and the operation time of the electric support member 36 when the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery wins depend on the game state (mode) as described later. (See FIGS. 13B to 13D).

As shown in FIGS. 8(B) and 8(C), the game ball 99 guided to the right side along the right ball receiving guide piece 386 falls along the second passage 352, and the second passage 352 It moves toward the right first starting port 314R arranged directly below.

Here, the second starting port 315 is arranged between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. This second starting port 315 is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 formed between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. enters the second starting port 315 . Between the second passage 352 and the right first starting port 314R, a plate-like electric support member 36 as a normal electric accessory is provided. This electric support member 36 restricts the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R and to the second starting port 315 by driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. A working position (first position) that supports the winning of game balls, and a standby position ( 2nd position), it is moved in the front-rear direction at the opening 360 provided in the game board 31 .

As shown in FIG. 8(C), when the electric support member 36 is in the standby position, the electric support member 36 does not protrude from the game board 31, so that the winning of the game ball to the right first start hole 314R is electrically operated. Since it is not restricted by the support member 36, the game ball falling along the second path 352 can easily enter the right first starting port 314R. The design of the second passage 352 can be changed in the same manner as the first passage 351, and the arrangement of the right first starting port 314R can be changed as appropriate according to the shape of the second passage 352 and the like.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, the electric support member 36 protrudes from the game board 31 and the right first start port 314R is blocked by the opening/closing portion 362 of the electric support member 36, thereby restricting the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R. Further, when the electric support member 36 is at the operating position, the game ball 99 dropped along the second passage 352 is guided above the ball receiving portion 391 by the guide portion 363 of the electric support member 36, and then It falls to part 391 . The game ball 99 that has fallen into the ball receiving portion 391 enters the second starting port 315 . In addition, game balls that flow down from the stage 310 provided below the variable prize winning device 316 or from above the electric support member 36 and received by the electric support member 36 can also win prizes in the second starting port 315 . That is, in this embodiment, both the game ball 99 passing through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and the game ball 99 hit to the right side area of the game board 31 are moved by the single electric support member 36 to the second path. A ball can be entered into the starting port 315 .

Here, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 9C, the electric support member 36 is positioned between the left side of the stage 310 provided below the variable prize winning device 316 and the upper side of the right first starting port 314R. It is a plate-like member arranged downward. Further, as shown in FIG. 9C, a pair of wall portions 361 are provided that protrude upward from the edges in the width direction. These wall portions 361 function as guides that guide the game ball 99 from the right (upstream) upstream end to the left (downstream) downstream end. A plurality of delay guides 364 (four in this embodiment) are provided in a region on the left side (downstream side) of the central portion of the electric support member 36 . The plurality of delay guides 364 extend from the wall portion 361 in a staggered manner, and are formed in an inclined shape such that the distal end portion is located on the left side (downstream side) of the proximal end portion. Therefore, a plurality of delay guides 364 (delay section) move the game ball 99 from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) along a path meandering back and forth. Here, when the delay guide 364 is provided on the electric support member 36, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine 10 from obtaining more profits than expected, but this point will be described later.

Note that the configuration of the electric support member 36 can be changed in various ways. For example, the delay portion of the electric support member 36 is not limited to a configuration in which a plurality of inclined delay guides 364 are arranged in a zigzag pattern, and the electric support member 36 does not necessarily have to be a plate-like member. Representative modifications of the electric support member 36 will be described later as thirteenth to twenty-ninth embodiments with reference to FIGS. 55 to 63. FIG.

By the way, as described above, the electric support member 36 is, in the special game state in which the special game is executed, the normal symbol hit triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball through the through gates 318 and 319. It is activated by winning the lottery result in the lottery. In addition, the operation time of the electric support member 36 (the time when the electric support member 36 is not in the standby position, or the time from the start of operation of the electric support member 36 to the start of return) is when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319. is determined according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state (mode A to mode E (see FIG. 13 (B))), and the operation time of the electric support member 36 in mode A to mode C is short (for example, 0 .6 seconds), and in Modes D and E, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is longer (eg, 6 seconds). The operation time of the electric support member 36 in modes A to C is such that the game ball passing through the second passage 352 can be guided to the second start port 315 by the electric support member 36, while the electric support member 36 is electrically operated from the stage 310 when hitting to the right. A game ball that has moved to the support member 36 or a game ball that is received by the electric support member 36 after being guided by a first retraction guide nail 393 and a second retraction guide nail 394 described later cannot enter the second start port 315 (for example, 0 .6 seconds). For one or both of the first thru gate 318 and the second thru gate 319, the electric support member 36 may be operated without performing the normal symbol winning lottery when the passage of the game ball is detected.

Here, the game ball introduced into the distribution device 35 by hitting left is distributed to the first passage 351 or the second passage 352, and the game ball of the first passage 351 wins the left first start port 314L, The game ball in the second path 352 falls toward the right first starting port 314R. A game ball falling from the second passage 352 enters the right first starting port 314R if the electric support member 36 is not operating, and is supported by the electric support member 36 if the electric support member 36 is operating. It is guided to mouth 315 . On the other hand, a game ball that flows down the right side of the sorting device 35 as in the case of hitting to the right is not introduced into the sorting device 35, so it does not enter the first start port 314, and the electric support member 36, if the operation time of the electric support member 36 is short (mode A to mode C), the electric support member 36 returns to the standby position before the game ball reaches the second start port 315. , and does not win the second starting port 315 . Specifically, since the electric support member 36 has a plate shape extending between the stage 310 and the right first start port 314R and has a delay guide 364, the electric support member 36 is moved from the stage 310 to the electric support member 36. The time required for the game ball at the right end of the support member 36 to reach the left end of the support member 36 is longer than the operating time of the electric support member 36 in modes A-C. Therefore, in modes A to C in which the operation time of the electric support member 36 is short, the player collects game balls in the life nail 31H and uses the sorting device 35 to use the first start port 314 or the second start port 315. Left-handed hitting is encouraged in order to win the game ball in the first round. On the other hand, in modes D and E, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is longer than the time required for the game ball at the right end of the support member 36 that has moved from the stage 310 to the electric support member 36 to reach the left end of the support member 36. Therefore, it is better to pass the game ball through the second through gate 319 and enter the game ball in the second start port 315 by the electric support member 36, so that the game ball may enter the first start port 314. Distributing device It is more advantageous to the player than using 35. Therefore, in mode D and mode E in which the electric support member 36 operates for a long time, right-handed hitting is encouraged.

By the way, some conventional game machines have a sorting device that alternately sorts game balls between a first starter and a second starter whose function is different from that of the first starter. However, when the game balls are alternately distributed to the first starting section and the second starting section by the distribution device, there is concern that the game will become monotonous and the interest in the game will decrease.

On the other hand, the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes the distribution device 35 that alternately distributes the game balls to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352, and unlike the conventional game machine, the first A first starting port 314 having the same function is provided below each outlet of the passage 351 and the second passage 352 . Moreover, in the sorting device 35 , the first through gate 318 is provided only in the second passage 352 of the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 . Then, when the passage of the game ball to the second passage 352 is detected by the through gate 318, the MPU 41 normally determines whether or not the electric support member 36 is to be operated. Therefore, when left-handed hitting is performed to use the sorting device 35, the game ball is guided to the left first starting port 314L by the first passage 351, and the game ball wins the left first starting port 314L. The second path 352 can cause the game ball to enter the right first starting hole 314R, and the second path 352 and the electric support member 36 can guide the game ball to the second starting hole 315. In addition, when hitting to the right, the game ball does not enter the sorting device 35, and the passage of the game ball to the second through gate 319 triggers the operation of the electric support member 36, thereby causing the second game ball to enter the game ball. A game ball can be guided to the starting port 315 . As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is different from the monotonous one in which game balls are assigned to two types of starting units (first starting unit and second starting unit) having different functions as in conventional gaming machines. Differently, by cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36, it is possible to achieve a plurality of states in which the game ball can enter the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, and the game becomes monotonous. It is difficult and can improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a conventional game machine, the first starter is arranged at a position where a prize can be won when hitting to the left, while the second starter is placed on the right side of the game board together with ordinary electric accessories such as a through gate and an electric support member. Many can be seen placed in In such a game machine, while a game ball can win in the first starting portion when hitting to the left, no game ball can win in the second starting portion arranged on the right side of the game board. When the game ball is hit to the right, the game ball can win in the second starting part arranged on the right side of the game board, but the game ball does not win in the first starting part. In general, a big win in a big win lottery triggered by the winning of a game ball into the second starting part is more advantageous than the winning of a game ball into the first starting part. For example, in the jackpot in the jackpot lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting part, the ratio of jackpot types advantageous to the player, such as jackpots with a large number of rounds in the jackpot game, is high. Then, in a gaming machine in which the function of the starting part that can win a prize is different between the case of left-handed and the right-handed, the game state is such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the probability of winning per normal symbol are low, and the special pattern fluctuation time and normal pattern fluctuation are low. It has a normal mode with a long time and a short-time variable mode with a high jackpot winning probability and normal pattern winning probability and a short special figure variation time and normal figure variation time. In addition, in the normal mode, not only is the winning probability per normal symbol low and the normal symbol fluctuation time is long, but the support time of the normal electric accessory in the case of normal symbol per is short. Therefore, in the normal mode, the support time of the normal electric role for the winning of the game ball to the second starting part triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate is short, and the support of the normal electric role is low frequency. can only be received by That is, in the normal mode, even if the player hits to the right, not only can he/she hardly receive the benefit of the support of the normal electric accessory, but also the winning of the game ball to the first start section cannot be expected, so the player must hit the game to the left. It is a good idea to do so. On the other hand, in the time probability variable mode, not only is the probability of winning per normal symbol high and the normal symbol fluctuation time is short, but the support time of the normal electric accessory in the case of normal symbol per is long. Therefore, in the time-saving variable mode, the support time of the normal electric accessory for the winning of the game ball to the second starting part triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate is long, and the support of the normal electric accessory is high. can be received frequently. That is, in the time-saving probability variable mode, it is better to win the game ball to the second starting part by hitting to the right than to win the game ball to the first starting part by hitting to the left. In other words, by hitting the left in the normal mode, the game ball is won in the first starting unit to perform the first special symbol game, while the second special symbol game is performed by performing the right stroke in the time-saving probability variable mode. The profit for the player is maximized. In addition, as the probability variable mode, in addition to the time-saving probability variable mode, there is also a game machine having a so-called latent probability variable mode in which the probability variable mode is not specified. The latent probability variable mode has a high probability of winning a jackpot like the time-saving probability variable mode, but generally the support for normal electric accessories is the same as the normal mode. That is, in the latent probability variable mode, the variation time of the normal symbols for the normal symbol lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate is long, and the probability of winning the normal electric accessory operation in the normal symbol lottery is low. It is possible to receive the support of the ordinary electric accessory for the prize winning of the game ball to the starting part only for a short time and at a low frequency. Therefore, in the latent probability variable mode, since it is almost impossible to expect the winning of the second starting part when hitting to the right, it is possible to win the game ball to the first starting part by hitting to the left in the same way as in the normal mode. It is encouraged to play special game. Not only in the normal mode and the latent probability variable mode, but in game states where left-handed hitting is encouraged, it is preferable to eliminate the advantages of right-handed hitting, such as making it difficult to receive support from normal electric accessories.

On the other hand, although the gaming machine 10 is provided with the sorting device 35, it is not specified that the special figure gaming state is a probability variable mode (high probability mode) as in the conventional gaming machine, and left-handed hitting is encouraged. In the mode C, the electric support member 36 operates for a short time when the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is winning. Therefore, in the game machine 10 as well, it is preferable to prevent the game ball from entering the second start hole 315 even when the electric support member 36 is activated by hitting to the right in the mode C. In the gaming machine 10, the electric support member 36 as the normal electric accessory is provided with a plurality of delay guides 364 as delay units. Here, if the electric support member 36 is not provided with a plurality of delay guides 364 as a delay portion, the game ball 99 of the electric support member 36 moves from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) along a linear path. move in the direction of On the other hand, when the delay guide 364 is provided on the electric support member 36 as in the present embodiment, the game ball 99 of the electric support member 36 meanders in the electric support member 36 from the right side (upstream side) to the left side ( downstream). Therefore, by providing the delay guide 364 in the electric support member 36, the movement distance of the electric support member 36 is increased, and the residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36 can be increased. The time until the game ball reaches the second starting port 315 can be made longer than the operation time of the electric support member 36 in mode C. As a result, when the special game state is the above-described mode C, and when it is mode A and mode B in which left-handed hitting is encouraged similarly to mode C, that is, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is short. In this case, even if the game ball is received by the electric support member 36 as the player hits to the right, the electric support member 36 is pulled before the game ball is guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36. Since it returns to a standby state, it becomes difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting port 315.例文帳に追加As a result, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 315 when a hitting method (right hitting) other than the recommended hitting method (left hitting) is performed. That is, in the gaming machine 10, by eliminating the advantage of playing right-handed in a game state in which left-handed is encouraged, the player can be encouraged to actively play left-handed.

Moreover, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5A, above the electric support member 36, a plurality of nails are provided between the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 and the sorting device 35. A first retraction guide nail 393 and a second retraction guide nail 394 (retraction guide portion) are provided. These retraction guide nails 393 and 394 guide the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36 which is the right area of the sorting device 35 in the direction of retreating from the sorting device 35 . That is, the retraction guide nails 393 and 394 guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right area of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the second starting port 315 . Therefore, when the first retraction guide nail 393 and the second retraction guide nail 394 are provided, the game ball flowing down from above can be received at a position away from the second starting port 315 in the electric support member 36, and the game ball can be received. A long time can be secured until reaching the second starting port 315 . As a result, similarly to the case where the electric support member 36 is provided with the delay guide 364, the game ball received by the electric support member 36 returns to the standby position from the start of operation of the electric support member 36 in modes A to C. Since it is possible to prevent the ball from reaching the second movement starting port 315 in a short period of time, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the electric support member 36 in the case of performing an unrecommended striking style. In the game machine 10, since a large number of nails are driven into the game board 31, it is possible to provide the first retraction guide nail 393 and the second retraction guide nail 394 when driving these nails. Become. Therefore, when the electric support member 36 operates for a short period of time, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the provision of the retraction guide portions (the first retraction guide nail 393 and the second retraction guide nail 394). It is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the electric support member 36 .

Instead of the retraction guide nails 393 and 394, a block-shaped member or the like formed by resin molding, metal processing, or a combination thereof may be used as the retraction guide portion.

On the other hand, when the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery triggered by the game ball passing through the through gates 318 and 319 in mode D and mode E is a win, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is long (for example, 6 seconds). For example, when a game ball that has passed through the first through gate 318 has a short distance from the first through gate 318 to the most downstream end of the electric support member 36 and the electric support member 36 is operated for a short period of time as in mode C However, since it is possible to win the second start port 315, the second start port 315 is also won in mode D and mode E in which the electric support member 36 is operated for a long time. On the other hand, a game ball that has passed through the second through gate 319 or a game ball that has been launched before or after the game ball has a long distance from the second through gate 319 to the most downstream end of the electric support member 36, but the electric support Due to the long actuation time of the member 36, the second start port 315 is awarded even if the electric support member 36 is provided with the delay portion 364. FIG. When the electric support member 36 is operated for a long time in this way, not only the game balls that pass through the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and fall, but also the game balls that flow down the right side area of the distribution device 35 A game ball dropped onto the stage 310 below the variable winning opening 316b can be guided to the second starting opening 315 by the electric support member 36. However, since the game balls introduced into the distribution device 35 are alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 as described above, the electric support member 36 is in a game state in which it operates for a long time. Left-handed hitting in Modes D and E cannot fully benefit from the support of the electric support member 36 . Therefore, in mode D and mode E, which are game states in which the electric support member 36 is operated for a long period of time, the player passes the game ball through the second through gate 319 arranged on the game board 31 so that the electric support member To activate 36, it is recommended that the firing handle 22 be manipulated to play right-handed.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140. As shown in FIG.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23 . Incidentally, when the game balls on the upper tray 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower tray 24.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 10 , the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7 , a launch control device 8 and a power control device 9 . The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132 and the like. The shooting control device 8 controls the game ball shooting mechanism 32 according to the operation of the shooting handle 22 . The power control device 9 converts power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the voltage to a control device and driving means provided in the gaming machine 10 .

[System Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
The main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of games in the gaming machine 10 . The main controller 4 executes a big win lottery as a lottery for shifting to a preset big win gaming state. The main controller 4 is equipped with an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42, and the like. The MPU 41 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and is an example of main control means of the present invention. Moreover, ROM411 and RAM412 are incorporated in MPU41. MPU41 performs a process according to the control program memorize|stored in ROM411 grade|etc.,. Also, part or all of the processing executed by main controller 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the main controller 4 and outputs control signals from the main controller 4 . Also, the input/output I/F 42 is connected to the incoming ball sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a, the main display section 37, and the like. Then, based on the detection signals from the ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, and 319a, the MPU 41 selects the general winning opening 313, the first left starting opening 314L, the first right starting opening 314R, the second starting opening, and the second starting opening. It is determined whether or not a ball enters the opening 315, the variable winning opening 316b, and the through gates 318 and 319. Moreover, the input/output I/F 42 is connected with the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, the power control device 9, and the like.

Then, the MPU 41 outputs commands such as a variation pattern command and a shift command to the sound ramp control device 5 .

The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation display time and the lottery result of the big win lottery to the voice lamp control device 5, and includes information on the type of big win when the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big win. The variation pattern command is the special figure variation start processing of FIG. is set in step S1808. Note that the variation pattern command may be a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time. In this case, the command for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type to the sound lamp control device 5 is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

When the number of reservations N decreases, the shift command is voice lamp control that the special figure success/failure information indicating the lottery results in the jackpot lottery in the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 has shifted. This is a command to notify the device 5 . The shift command is set in step S1704 in the data setting process of FIG.

Commands other than the commands described above may be output from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, but the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control unit 4 also includes an oscillator circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operating clock to the MPU 41 . The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41 . Specifically, the execution cycle of main timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at preset intervals (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 performs a main timer interrupt (to be described later) each time the clock signal rises (or falls). It is assumed that the loading process is activated and executed. The oscillator circuit and the frequency divider circuit are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply the operating clocks of the main control units in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 . Also, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 .

A ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41 . For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting commands to be sent to the audio lamp control device 5 and the like. Note that the RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 11, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery or the like will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the lottery counter 412a of the RAM 412 and the counter information stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b to set the big hit lottery and the variable display time.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used when judging the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used when judging the losing type. included. In addition, the lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 that determines the variation display time in the main display section 37 and the pattern display section 341. included. Further, the lottery counter 412a is used to set the initial value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 used for the lottery of whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 as the normal electric accessory, and the normal symbol random number counter C4. An initial value counter CIN2 per normal symbol is included. Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they are simply referred to as counters.

The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2 and CS1 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at short time intervals and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. Updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 when setting the jackpot lottery and variable display time.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 738, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the counter value of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Incidentally, the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the counter value (random number) at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 is stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b. On the other hand, when the counter value (random number) is obtained, the counter value of the big hit random number initial value counter CIN1 is set as the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1.

The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is determined by the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area in the ROM 411, and the low probability mode (mode A, mode B, and mode D described later) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot is low. (see FIG. 13(B))), and two types are set corresponding to a high probability mode (mode C and mode E (see FIG. 13(B)) which will be described later). Here, FIG. 12A is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability mode validity table corresponding to the low-probability mode, and FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability mode validity table corresponding to the high-probability mode. In the examples shown in FIGS. 12(A) and 12(B), in the low probability modes (mode A, mode B, and mode D), the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is three (0 to 2), and the jackpot probability is 3/739 (=about 1/246.3). On the other hand, in the high-probability modes (mode C and mode E), the number of counter values (random numbers) that result in a big win in the jackpot lottery is 30 (0 to 29), and the jackpot probability is 10 in the low-probability mode. It is 30/739 (=about 1/24.6) which is double. Here, the low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table share three random numbers (0 to 3) with which the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win, but they may not be common. Also, the random numbers for winning the jackpot do not have to be continuous values, and may be partially or wholly discrete values. If the counter value (random value) of the big win random number counter C1 is other than the counter value (random value) at which the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win, the lottery result in the big win lottery is lost.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the counter value of the jackpot type counter C2 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 314 or the second start port 315 is stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b. In the game machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is set individually for each jackpot of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game by the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area in the ROM 411. ing. That is, in the gaming machine 10, a jackpot (first special figure jackpot) when a game ball enters the first start port 314 and a jackpot (second special figure jackpot) when a game ball enters the second start port 315 (second special figure jackpot) ) and the distribution of jackpot types are different. Here, FIGS. 12(C) and 12(D) are diagrams showing an example of a jackpot classification table. In the example shown in FIG. 12 (C), in the case of a jackpot in the first special symbol game triggered by winning the first start port 314, 2R probability variable jackpot (first judgment result) and 2R normal jackpot ( second judgment result). The number of random numbers for the 2R variable jackpot is 15 from 0 to 14, the number of random numbers for the 2R normal jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19, and the random numbers for the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R variable jackpot, and the 16R variable jackpot. does not exist. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 12 (D), in the case of a jackpot in the second special symbol game triggered by winning the second start port 315, 5R probability variation jackpot (first determination result), 16R probability variation jackpot (first 1 judgment result) and 5R normal jackpot (second judgment result). And the number of random numbers for the 5R probability variable jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4, the number of random numbers for the 16R probability variable jackpot is 10 from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers for the 5R normal jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19. There is no random number that becomes a 2R normal jackpot and a 2R probability variable jackpot. In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability of the definite variable jackpot (2R definite variable jackpot) in the first special symbol game is 75% (15/20), and the definite variable jackpot in the second special symbol game (5R definite variable jackpot and 16R definite variable jackpot). is 75% (15/20). That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop variable machine in which the probability of the variable variable jackpot is the same between the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, although the jackpot types are distributed differently between the first special jackpot and the second special jackpot, the number of round games in the jackpot game is greater for the second special jackpot than the first special jackpot. In terms of the number of round games played, the second special figure jackpot is more advantageous for the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the winning of the game ball to the first start port 314 which is the trigger to execute the first special symbol game, the game ball to the second start port 315 which is the trigger to execute the second special symbol game A separate jackpot type distribution table is set for each of the winnings, and the jackpot type distribution probability differs depending on whether the game ball wins in the first start port 314 or the second start port 315 However, it is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same between the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop variable rate machine, but may be configured as a gaming machine with specs different from loop variable rate machines such as so-called limit machines, ST machines, V-ST machines, and one-two type mixture machines. . Examples in which the game machine 10 is applied to a limit machine, an ST machine, a V-ST machine, and a one-two-kind mixed machine will be described later as third to sixth embodiments with reference to FIGS. 28 to 50. .

Then, the MPU 41 is based on the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the special figure execution area AE, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 2R normal jackpot (second determination result), 2R probability variable Jackpot (first judgment result), 5R variable probability jackpot (first judgment result), 5R normal jackpot (second judgment result), 16R probability variable jackpot (first judgment result), and out. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 2R normal jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, or a loss for the winning of the first start port 314 , and the second start port 315 . , it is determined whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R variable variable jackpot, a 16R variable variable jackpot, or a loss.

Here, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is the 2R probability variable jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable prize winning opening 316b is opened is repeated twice. When the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 5R normal jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable prize winning opening 316b is opened is repeated five times. When the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an open/close execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times is executed.

Then, when the jackpot game ends, the mode (game state) corresponding to the jackpot type is shifted from the jackpot game state. Here, FIG. 13(A) is a mode transition table that defines the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In the example shown in FIG. 13(A), when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 2R normal jackpot, the mode shifts to mode B after the jackpot game ends. When the lottery result is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the game shifts to mode C after the jackpot game ends. When the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the game shifts to mode D after the jackpot game ends. When the result of the lottery is 5R probability variable big win and 16R probability variable big win, mode E is shifted to after the big win game is finished. That is, since the jackpot type in the case of winning a prize for the first starting ports 314L, 314R is the 2R normal jackpot or the 2R probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 12(C)), the winning for the first starting ports 314L, 314R In the case of a big win, the mode shifts to mode B or mode C after the end of the big win game. On the other hand, since the jackpot type in the case of winning a prize for the second start port 315 is a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 12 (D)), the winning for the second start port 315 In the case of a big win, the mode shifts to mode D or mode E after the end of the big win game.

Here, FIG. 13(B) shows the mode types (mode A to mode E) in the special symbol gaming state in which the special symbol fluctuates due to the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 314L, 314R, and 315 in the gaming machine 10. It is a mode data table that defines the contents.

Mode A is a mode that shifts when the upper limit number of special game games ends in mode B or mode D, which is a limited time saving mode described later, that is, when the time saving ends, and it is clear from the description below. However, among modes A to E, this is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. Also, in the game machine 10, the game state becomes mode A when the contents of the RAM 412 are cleared when the main power is turned on. The game state in the case where the contents of the RAM 412 are not cleared when the main power is turned on is the game state stored in the RAM 412 when the main power is turned off.

Mode A (first gaming state) is a jackpot low-probability mode in which the probability that the jackpot lottery result will be a jackpot is low, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 12(A)). will be Mode A is a non-time-saving mode in which the variable display time of normal symbols is not shortened (time saving), and the variable display time of normal symbols is the normal variable display time (for example, 30 seconds). Therefore, in mode A, when the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 318 passes the position of the electric support member 36, the normal pattern is being changed and displayed, and the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery becomes a win. Even if the electric support member 36 operates, it cannot be expected that the second starting port 315 will be won by the support of the electric support member 36 . Furthermore, the mode A is a normal pattern winning low probability mode in which a normal symbol winning lottery is performed based on a normal symbol low probability success/failure table in which the probability of winning the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is low. Therefore, in mode A, the first special game is executed except for irregular cases such as the game ball accidentally passing through the second passage 352 at the operation timing of the electric support member 36, and the second special game is executed. is effectively not executed.

Here, FIG. 13(C) shows an example of a normal symbol low-probability table. In the normal symbol low probability propriety table shown in FIG. 13 (C), one counter value ( 199) corresponds to the win of the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery, and the remaining 199 counter values (0 to 198) correspond to the loss of the lottery result. That is, in the normal symbol low probability success/failure table, the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery will win is set to 0.5% (1/200). Therefore, in the mode A, the probability that the lottery result in the normal pattern winning lottery wins is low, and the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery wins the second start port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36. low expectations for the winning of game balls. In addition, the probability that the lottery result in the normal winning lottery based on the normal design low probability success or failure table is a probability that the lottery result based on the normal design high probability success or failure table described later is a probability and a clear probability, especially if there is a difference. There is no limit, and the probability of winning the lottery result may be 0%. In mode A, when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the normal symbol lottery is performed, while when the game ball passes through the second through gate 319, the normal symbol lottery is not performed. It is also conceivable to make

Further, as shown in FIG. 13B, in mode A, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short (for example, 0.6 seconds) when the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is winning. As described above, above the electric support member 36, there is a retraction guide nail 393 for guiding the game balls flowing down from above the electric support member 36 in the direction of retracting from the distribution device 35 (second starting port 315). 394 (see FIGS. 4 and 5A) is provided. Therefore, in mode A, even if the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is a win as described above, the operation time of the electric support member 36 for the game ball flowing down the right side of the game board 31 by hitting to the right is is short, it is difficult for the electric support member 36 to support the winning of the second starting hole 315 in the case of right-handed hitting. In addition to this, the probability that the lottery results in the above-mentioned normal symbol winning lottery will win is low, so in mode A, the game ball is awarded to the second start port 315 that is distributed to the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. can hardly be expected. Further, in a right-handed player, not only the support of the electric support member 36 cannot be expected, but also the introduction of game balls to the sorting device 35 cannot be expected. Therefore, in mode A, a game ball is caused to flow down on the left side of the game board 31 by hitting to the left, the game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35, and the game ball enters the first start ports 314L, 314R to receive a jackpot lottery. is encouraged.

In this way, in the mode A, left-handed hitting is encouraged, the probability of winning the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is low, and the operation timing of the electric support member 36 is deviated from the passage timing of the game ball. Therefore, winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36 can hardly be expected. Therefore, in mode A, most of the jackpot lottery is performed for the winning of game balls into the first start ports 314L and 314R, and most of the jackpot types in mode A are 2R normal jackpots or 2R variable variable jackpots. As a result, it is very easy to shift from mode A to mode B or mode C after the end of the jackpot game, and to mode D and mode E is not substantially shifted.

Mode B (fourth game state) is a mode that shifts after the end of the 2R normal jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13A), and is a mode (game state) that is more advantageous to the player than mode A. be.

Mode B is a jackpot low-probability mode in which the probability that the jackpot lottery will result in a jackpot is low as in mode A, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 12(A)). . In addition, unlike mode A, mode B is a time-saving mode that is a shortened variable display time in which the variable display time of normal symbols is shorter than the normal variable display time (for example, 30 seconds) of the non-time-saving mode. The mode is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 50 times). In other words, mode B is a limited time reduction mode in which an upper limit is set for the number of times of time reduction, but is more advantageous than mode A because it is a time reduction mode. Here, the shortened variable display time is set to a time during which the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 318 can enter the second start opening 315 with the support of the electric support member 36, and the first through gate 318 and the electric support member 36 and the operating time of the electric support member 36, for example, about 0.004 to 0.2 seconds. In addition, in the present embodiment, an effect that clearly indicates that it is mode B (time saving mode) may be executed in the effect means such as the symbol display unit 341 . In this case, an effect may be performed by the effect means as a chance zone that suggests the possibility of being a definite variable. In mode B, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot and the upper limit number of special figure games are performed, the mode is shifted to mode A.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, in mode B, a normal symbol winning lottery is performed based on a normal symbol high probability success/failure table with a high probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery will win, and in this point as well, the mode is more advantageous than mode A. be. Here, FIG. 13D shows an example of a normal symbol high probability right/wrong table. In the normal symbol high probability success/failure table shown in FIG. 13(D), 199 (0 to 198) of the counter values (random numbers) of the normal symbol per random number counter C4 (see FIG. 11) are normally per symbol lottery. The remaining one (199) corresponds to the loss of the lottery result. In other words, in the normal symbol high probability success/failure table, the counter value (random number) of winning and losing is opposite to the normal symbol low probability success/failure table, and the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery will win is 99.5. % (199/200). Therefore, in mode B, it can be expected that the game ball will enter the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36 due to the winning result of the normal symbol winning lottery. In addition, the probability that the lottery result in the normal winning lottery based on the normal symbol low probability success/failure table does not need to be 99.5%, and may be another percentage. In addition, in mode B, when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the normal symbol lottery is performed, while when the game ball passes through the second through gate 319, the normal symbol lottery is not performed. It is also conceivable to make In addition, in mode B, the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318 may be set to 100%, and when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the normal symbol may be selected. The electric support member 36 may operate for a short period of time without performing the winning lottery. In this case, in mode B, game balls are alternately distributed to the first path 351 and the second path 352, so that the ball entry ratio between the left first start port 314L and the second start port 315 is 50%:50. %become.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13(B), in mode B, similarly to mode A, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short (for example, 0.6 seconds) when winning the lottery for the normal symbol, and it is right-handed. Winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36 cannot be expected. Therefore, in mode B, as in mode A, left-handed hitting is encouraged.

In this way, in mode B, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is short, so left-handed hitting is encouraged instead of right-handed hitting. Therefore, the game ball passing through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 can be expected to enter the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36 to win a prize. Specifically, when game balls are introduced into the sorting device 35 as described above, the game balls are alternately sorted to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 . The game ball distributed to the first passage 351 wins the left first starting port 314L. On the other hand, game balls distributed to the second passage 352 pass through the first through gate 318 . At this time, in mode B, with the passage of the game ball through the first through gate 318 as a trigger, the normal symbol winning lottery is performed based on the normal symbol high probability success/failure table per normal symbol. Therefore, the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 and passed through the first through gate 318 is supported by the electric support member 36 with a high probability (99.5% in the present embodiment) to the second start port 315. Win a prize. In addition, when the lottery result in the lottery per normal symbol is lost, the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 wins the right first start port 314R.

In mode B, the jackpot lottery has a 50% probability of winning a game ball into the first left starting port 314L, and a 49.75% probability of winning a game ball into the second starting port 315. On the other hand, it is performed with respect to the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R with a probability of 0.25%. As a result, about half (50.25%) of the jackpots in mode B become 2R normal jackpots or 2R variable variable jackpots, and after the jackpot games for these jackpots are completed, the mode shifts to mode B or mode C. In addition, about half (49.75%) of the jackpot in mode B becomes the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R variable variable jackpot or the 16R variable variable jackpot, and after the jackpot game for the 5R normal jackpot is completed, the mode is shifted to D, and the 5R variable jackpot and After the jackpot game for the 16R probability variable jackpot ends, the mode is shifted to mode E (see FIG. 13(A)). That is, in mode B, since the jackpot lottery for winning the game ball to the second starting port 315 can be received in about half of the special game with the support of the electric support member 36, the 5R normal jackpot with a large number of expected wins, Winning the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot can be expected, and after the jackpot game for these jackpots is completed, the mode shifts to mode D and mode E in which the electric support member 36 operates for a long time, as will be described later. Therefore, in mode B, unlike mode A, there is a possibility of winning an advantageous jackpot for the player, and after the jackpot game for the advantageous jackpot ends, the mode shifts to a mode more advantageous than mode B. This mode (game state) is more advantageous to the player than Mode A in terms of points.

Mode C (second game state) is a mode that shifts after the end of the 2R probability variable jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13 (A)), and is more advantageous to the player than mode A and mode B (game state). Mode C is a jackpot high probability mode (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability that the jackpot lottery result will be a jackpot is high, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the high probability mode success or failure table (see FIG. 12 (B)). , is a mode (game state) that is more advantageous to the player than modes A and B in this respect. Further, mode C is a time saving mode like mode B, but unlike mode B, the time saving mode continues until the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot. In other words, the mode C is a jackpot guaranteed time-saving mode in which the next jackpot is guaranteed, and is a mode (game state) more advantageous than the mode B in this respect as well. In addition, in the present embodiment, the mode C (high probability mode) is not clearly indicated in the effect of the effect means such as the symbol display unit 341 for the special symbol game or the big hit game. That is, mode C is a so-called latent probability variable mode. Of course, in mode C, it may be specified in the production means that it is a high probability mode, and in the same way as in mode B, it is specified in the production means that it is a time saving mode, suggesting the possibility of being a probability change. An effect may be performed in the effect means as a chance zone.

Further, in mode C, as in mode B, a normal symbol lottery is performed based on the normal symbol high probability success/failure table. Since the operation time of the member 36 is short (for example, 0.6 seconds), winning of the game ball to the second starting hole 315 by the support of the electric support member 36 in right-handed hitting cannot be expected. Therefore, even in mode C, left-handed hitting is encouraged. In mode C, when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the normal symbol lottery is performed, while when the game ball passes through the second through gate 319, the normal symbol lottery is not performed. It is also conceivable to make In addition, in mode C, the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318 may be set to 100%, and when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the normal symbol is selected. The electric support member 36 may operate for a short period of time without performing the winning lottery. In this case, in mode C, game balls are alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352, so that the ball entry ratio between the left first starting port 314L and the second starting port 315 is 50%:50. %become.

Thus, in mode C, as in mode A and mode B, left-handed hitting is encouraged because the operation time of the electric support member 36 is short. Since it is high, game balls passing through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 can be expected to enter the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36. This is an advantageous mode (game state). Then, in mode C, as in mode B, the jackpot lottery goes to the second start port 315 with a probability of 49.75% with respect to the winning of the game ball to the left first start port 314L with a probability of 50%. , with a probability of 0.25% for winning a game ball into the right first start port 314R. Therefore, the type of jackpot expected in the jackpot in mode C and the mode to be shifted to after the jackpot game is finished are the same as those in mode B. That is, in mode C, as in mode B, in about half of the special game, a jackpot lottery for the winning of the game ball to the second start port 315 can be received, so 5R normal jackpot, 5R with a large number of acquisition expectations Winning a variable probability jackpot and a 16R variable probability jackpot can be expected, and after the jackpot game for these jackpots is completed, the mode shifts to mode D and mode E in which the operation time of the electric support member 36 is long, as will be described later. Therefore, in mode C, unlike mode A and similar to mode B, there is a possibility that the player wins an advantageous jackpot.

Mode D (fourth game state) is a mode that shifts after the end of the 5R normal jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13 (A)), and is a mode that is more advantageous for the player than mode A and mode B (game state). Mode D is a jackpot low probability mode with a low probability that the jackpot lottery result will be a jackpot like mode A and mode B, and the jackpot lottery is based on the low probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. is done. Also, mode D is a time-saving mode with a limited number of times like mode B, and shifts to mode A when the upper limit number of special figure games are performed. Furthermore, the mode D is performed based on a high-probability success/failure table in which the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol winning lottery is a win is high, and is similar to the mode C in this respect. In addition, in mode D, it is specified that it is a time saving mode in the production by the production means such as the pattern display unit 341 . In this case, an effect may be performed by the effect means as a chance zone that suggests the possibility of being a definite variable.

However, unlike mode A to mode C, mode D has a longer operation time of the electric support member 36 (for example, 6 seconds) when winning a lottery with normal symbols, and is more advantageous than mode A to mode C in this respect. It is a mode (game state). In mode D, since the operation time of the electric support member 36 is long, the game balls flowing down the right side area of the sorting device 35 and the game balls falling on the stage 310 below the variable winning opening 316b as described above are electrically operated. It can be guided to the second starting port 315 by the support member 36 . Therefore, right-handed hitting is encouraged in order to operate the electric support member 36 by allowing the game ball to pass through the second through gate 319 arranged on the right side of the game board 31 . In addition, in mode D, since it is difficult for the game ball to be introduced into the sorting device 35 when hitting to the right, the game ball hardly enters the first start ports 314L and 314R, and the probability is high (approximately 100%). , a game ball enters the second starting port 315 and a jackpot lottery is performed. Therefore, the jackpot in mode D is a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R variable variable jackpot, or a 16R variable variable jackpot with a high probability (approximately 100%). Then, when the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game for this jackpot is completed, the mode is shifted to mode D, and when the jackpot type is the 5R variable variable jackpot or the 16R variable variable jackpot, the mode is performed after the jackpot game for these jackpots is completed. E (see FIG. 13A). That is, in mode D, unlike modes A to C, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is longer in mode D, and a jackpot lottery can be received exclusively for the winning of a game ball into the second start port 315. can. Therefore, in mode D, the type of jackpot when the lottery results in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is any of the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 16R probability variable jackpot with a large number of expected game balls to be acquired, and these After the end of the jackpot game for the jackpot, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is longer, and the mode shifts to mode D or mode E. In these respects, this mode (game state) is more advantageous than modes A to C.

Mode E (third game state) is a mode that shifts after the end of the 5R probability variable jackpot game or the 16R probability variable jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13 (A)), and the most game among mode A to mode E This mode is advantageous for those who Mode E, like mode C, is a jackpot high probability mode (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability that the jackpot lottery result will be a jackpot is high, and the jackpot lottery is a high probability mode success or failure table (see FIG. 12 (B) ), and it is also a jackpot guaranteed time-saving mode in which the next jackpot is guaranteed. In addition, in mode E, it is clearly shown that the game is in the variable probability game state (high probability mode) in the performance of the performance means such as the symbol display unit 341 .

However, in mode E, unlike mode C, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long (for example, 6 seconds) when winning the normal symbol lottery as in mode D. Therefore, in Mode E, as in Mode D, right-handed hitting is encouraged. In mode E, since it is difficult for the game ball to be introduced into the sorting device 35 when hitting to the right, the game ball hardly enters the first start openings 314L and 314R, with a high probability (approximately 100%). , a game ball enters the second start port 315 and a jackpot lottery is performed. Therefore, the type of jackpot expected in the jackpot in mode E and the mode to be shifted to after the jackpot game is finished are the same as those in mode D. That is, in mode E, since the jackpot lottery can be received exclusively for the winning of the game ball to the second start port 315, there is a high probability of winning any of the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 16R probability variable jackpot with a large number of expected acquisitions. (approximately 100%) will be elected.

It is also conceivable that the electric support member 36 operates a plurality of times with respect to one win in the normal symbol win lottery. For example, in mode D and mode E, it is conceivable to operate the electric support member 36 for 1.2 seconds five times, thereby making the total operating time of the electric support member 36 6 seconds. However, the one-time operation time and the number of times of operation of the electric accessory 36 described above are examples, and can be changed as appropriate. Of course, the operation time of the electric support member 36 in mode D and mode E is not limited to 6 seconds, and can be changed as appropriate. In addition, when a normal jackpot such as a 5R normal jackpot is won in mode E, instead of mode D, the mode is shifted to mode A, which is a non-time-saving mode, or mode B, in which the operation time of the electric accessory 36 is short. may In these cases mode D is omitted.

By the way, as a conventional game machine, there is a short-time mode in which normal electric accessories such as electric support members operate frequently and for a long time, so that it is easy to win the second start opening, and normal electric accessories operate in a low frequency and short time. Some have a non-time-saving mode. In this type of game machine, a non-time-saving mode is set in a normal game state with a low jackpot lottery probability, and a time-saving mode is set in a probability variable game state with a high jackpot lottery probability.

However, conventional gaming machines have a constant theoretical probability of being able to receive support from ordinary electric accessories in the time-saving mode. .

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10, mode A, mode C and mode E are included as special figure gaming states. These modes A, C, and E have different expected values of the ball entry ratio between the first starting portion and the second starting portion. Specifically, in mode A, the ball entry ratio with respect to the first starting port 314 is approximately 100%, and in mode C, the ball entry ratio between the first starting portion and the second starting portion is approximately 50%:50%. , and in mode E, the ball entry ratio with respect to the second starting port 315 is approximately 100%. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 10, based on the three modes A, C, and E in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first starting portion and the second starting portion is different, a novel game with improved game playability is provided. It becomes possible to create playability.

For example, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a loop variable machine, but in the conventional loop variable machine, the ball entry ratio for the first start port 314 is about 100%, and the ball for the second start port 315 However, the ratio between the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 is approximately 50%:50 as in mode C of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment. % mode. On the other hand, in mode E, which is most advantageous to the player who wins a jackpot with a large amount of game value, the mode is typically shifted to mode C, which is a high-probability mode, based on the first win in mode A. It is necessary to obtain a big win by a big win lottery triggered by winning the second starting port 315 with a probability of approximately 50%. That is, in the game machine 10, it is necessary to go through a step of obtaining a big win at the second starting port 315 in mode C before shifting to mode E, and there are obstacles to overcome in order to shift to mode E, which is the most advantageous. A new game property of having is given to the loop probability variable machine. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to improve the playability and interest.

In addition, since the game machine 10 further includes mode B and mode D, which are time-saving modes limited in number of times, as special game states, it becomes easier to create new game features with improved game features. Specifically, mode E is typically shifted from mode C, which is the high-probability mode, as described above, but is also shifted from mode B and mode D, which are low-probability modes. That is, there is a possibility that mode E is shifted from mode B and mode D, which are shifted when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot. Since mode B and mode D are low-probability modes, the probability that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot is lower than mode C, so mode B and mode D are shifted to mode E. has to overcome a higher barrier than when transitioning from mode C to mode E. In addition, in mode D, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long, while in mode B, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short. Therefore, the height of the barrier to be overcome to shift to mode E differs between mode B and mode. Thus, by having the mode B and the mode D as the special game state, the game property having a plurality of barriers (three types of barriers in this embodiment) with different difficulties to be overcome in order to shift to the mode E is enhanced. It is given to the loop variable machine. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous, and to further improve the playability and interest.

Returning to the description of FIG. 11, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 314 or the second start port 315.

In the gaming machine 10, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the stop result type of the variable display on the symbol display section 341 is selected by the reach random number counter C3. Specifically, according to the loss type table stored in the loss type table storage area in the ROM 411, after the occurrence of the reach, the final stop symbol shifts to the front and back of the reach symbol by one and stops. The value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 is set for each of three kinds of loss types, namely, the ready-to-win except before and after the final stop pattern stops before and after the ready-to-win pattern, and the complete loss in which the ready-to-win does not occur. Here, "ready-to-win" refers to a state in which the symbol combination of the main symbols indicating that the jackpot has been won is likely to occur during the period from the start of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display section 341 to the stop display of the symbols. It is a variable state that In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display section 341, and the displayed symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position fluctuates. In addition, during the change state of the reach in the symbol display section 341, a story production process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, or a game in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the production. A person-participation type operation presentation process and the like are executed. It is conceivable that the variable display in the symbol display section 341 may be hidden, or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged size during execution of these rendering processes.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 199, for example, and reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines a rough variation type such as so-called normal reach, super reach, special reach, etc. as a special game effect. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the MPU 41 executes the main process, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 17, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. In addition, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 314 or the second start port 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 refers to the low-probability mode jackpot fluctuation table, the high-probability mode jackpot fluctuation table, or the outlier fluctuation table pre-stored in the fluctuation table storage area of the ROM 411 according to the lottery result, while referring to the fluctuation pattern. Identify the type. These variation tables may be provided depending on whether the current game state is the low probability mode or the high probability mode, or may be provided individually for each mode A to E.

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the first special symbol display device 371, the second special symbol display device 372 and the symbol display unit 341 of the main display unit 37, the variation pattern and the jackpot lottery A variation pattern command indicating the result of the lottery is input to the sound lamp control device 5 . Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the variation pattern command. Determine the details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in . Then, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the pattern display unit 341 to perform a variable display based on the details of the determined variable mode, reproduces the sound from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variable display, and lights and blinks the illumination unit 27. , turn off the light.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 executes a simple process of determining a variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table for the variation display on the symbol display section 341. It will be. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the big winning lottery. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the pattern display section 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute various variation modes as the variation mode.

The normal symbol random number counter C4 is used for a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 for a predetermined period of time. A loop counter that is reset to 0 after The random number counter C4 per normal symbol is periodically updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. Then, based on this counter value (random value), a lottery per normal symbol is performed. In the normal symbol winning lottery, at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gates 318, 319, the normal symbol is not variably displayed (the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373 is not blinking), and the jackpot game is performed. It is performed each time a game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319 on condition that it is not executed and the electric support member 36 is not operated. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the normal symbol winning lottery is not suspended like the big winning lottery. On the other hand, when the count value (random value) of the normal per-symbol random number counter C4 is obtained for the normal winning lottery, the counter value of the normal per-symbol random number initial value counter CIN2 is set as the initial value of the normal per-symbol random number counter C4. .

The special figure reservation storage area 412b includes a first special figure reservation area RE1, a second special figure reservation area RE2, a third special figure reservation area RE3, a fourth special figure reservation area RE4, a fifth special figure reservation area RE5, and a sixth special figure reservation area RE5. Includes a special figure reservation area RE6, a seventh special figure reservation area RE7, an eighth special figure reservation area RE8, a special figure reservation number storage area NA, and a special figure execution area AE.

Then, when the game ball enters the first start port 314 or the second start port 315, the special figure propriety information is either the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8, the second Winning of the game ball to the first starting port 314 and winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315 are stored in the winning order without discrimination. The special figure success/failure information is numerical information that is the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 that are acquired when the game ball wins to the start ports 314 and 315, It is for the winning of the first starting port 314, the starting port information (special figure information) that can distinguish whether it is for the winning of the second starting port 315, and the mode when acquiring the special figure success or failure information and mode information for each type (mode A to mode E).

In addition, corresponding to the winning of the first starting port 314 and the winning of the second starting port 315, the lottery counter 412a (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 etc.) may be provided separately.

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 is any of the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 stored in In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game executed based on the special figure success/failure information stored in the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8, the pattern display unit 341 is displayed. It is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display.

Specifically, when the game ball enters the starting ports 314 and 315, the special figure success/failure information includes the first special figure reservation area RE1, the second special figure reservation area RE2, the third special figure reservation area RE3, the fourth It is stored in a vacant area in order of priority of the special figure reservation area RE4, the 5th special figure reservation area RE5, the 6th special figure reservation area RE6, the 7th special figure reservation area RE7, and the 8th special figure reservation area RE8. In the special figure reservation number storage area NA, the number in which the special figure propriety information is stored among the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 is stored as the number N of reservations. That is, in the gaming machine 10, a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations in the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 are used as the winning history of the game balls to the start ports 314 and 315. It is possible to reserve up to eight special figure right or wrong information in the winning order.

The special figure execution area AE is a memory used for moving the special figure validity information stored in the first special figure reservation area RE1 when the symbol variation display in the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341 is started. area. Then, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery on the basis of numerical information and mode information stored as special symbol win/loss information in the special symbol execution area AE at the start of one first special symbol game or second special symbol game. , When the lottery result is a jackpot, a distribution lottery for the jackpot type is performed based on the starting opening information (special figure information) stored as the special figure win/loss information. Also, when the special figure validity information of the first special figure reservation area RE1 is moved to the special figure execution area AE, the special figure validity information of the second special figure reservation area RE2 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 is prioritized respectively. Shift to the 1st special figure reservation area RE1 to the 7th special figure reservation area RE7, which is higher by one. That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special figure win/loss information is stored in the first special figure reservation area RE1 in order of winning without distinction between the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 314 and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315. ~ While being stored in the eighth special figure reservation area RE8, the special figure success/failure information in the order of winning without distinction between the winning of the game ball to the first start port 314 and the winning of the game ball to the second start port 315 is the special figure execution area By being shifted to AE, the special figure game for the special figure propriety information is executed. As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is so-called MAX8 with respect to the holding of the special-figure information and the cancellation of the holding (execution of the special-figure game).

Normal pattern random number storage area 412c, when the game ball passes through the through gates 318, 319, normal pattern per random number counter C4 obtained by MPU41 at the timing when the passage of the game ball is detected by the entrance ball sensor 318a, 319a. is a storage area in which the counter value (random value) of is stored. The normal pattern random number storage area 412c does not store the counter value (random value) of the random number counter C4 per normal pattern, and the normal pattern changes at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319. The through gate 318 is not displayed (the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373 is not blinking), the jackpot game is not being executed, and the electric support member 36 is not operating. , 319, the counter value (random number) of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol is stored. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the normal symbol winning lottery is not suspended like the big winning lottery. Further, when the count value (random value) of the normal per-symbol random number counter C4 is acquired, the counter value of the normal per-symbol random number initial value counter CIN2 is set as the initial value of the normal per-symbol random number counter C4.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 10, the sub-control unit 332 includes a sound lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and based on the control signal input from the main control unit 331, the symbol display section 341 displays and Execute the presentation display.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The audio lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input/output I/F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Moreover, ROM511 and RAM512 are incorporated in MPU51.

A ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. In addition, the ROM 511 also stores information such as sounds and lamp flashing patterns used in special game effects, jackpot game effects, and the like. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51 . Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The audio lamp control device 5 executes the processing according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, thereby issuing a command to the display control device 6 based on the command (control signal) input from the main control device 4. (control signal) to control the display of the symbol display section 341 . In addition, the sound lamp control device 5 also controls the sound output from the speaker 26 and the flashing mode of the illumination part 27 in accordance with the display of the pattern display part 341 . For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the pattern display section 341, the sound output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination section 27 when executing the game effect.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the sound lamp control device 5 and outputs control signals from the sound lamp control device 5 . Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52 . Commands such as a variation pattern command, a hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5 . Also, the audio lamp control device 5 outputs a display variation pattern command and the like to the display control device 6 . A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the audio lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. Also, a configuration in which the sub-control unit 332 includes a single control device having the functions of both the sound lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

Also, the input/output I/F 52 is connected to the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, and the motor driver 39c. In the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the audio output from the speaker 26, the flickering mode of the illumination part 27, etc. based on commands input from the main control device 4. FIG. Further, the input/output I/F 52 is connected with the operation switch 20a. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated, and based on the detection result, the game effect executed by the symbol display unit 341, the sound output from the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27 can be controlled.

The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands input from the main controller 4, such as variation pattern commands, hold commands, and shift commands.

Specifically, when a variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 determines, for example, a variation pattern and effect type based on the variation pattern command, and transmits a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern to the display control device 6. Then, the variable display of the main symbol in the symbol display section 341 is started. At this time, when the variation pattern command indicates that the lottery result indicates a loss in a jackpot lottery, the symbol display section 341 displays a combination of main symbols corresponding to the loss. On the other hand, when the variation pattern command is a jackpot lottery and the lottery result indicates a jackpot, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. In addition, when the variation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 stores the information on the jackpot type in the RAM 512, and stores the information on the jackpot type in the RAM 512 when determining the jackpot game effect when the jackpot game start command is received. Refer to the information about the stored jackpot type.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display section 341 based on commands (control signals) input from the sound lamp control device 5 . Specifically, the display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display section 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the sound lamp control device 5, thereby executing the variable display of the main symbols and the effect display. .

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61 and an input/output I/F 62 and the like, and the input/output I/F 62 is connected to the sound lamp control device 5 and the pattern display section 341 . Two-way communication may be possible between the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 .

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and has a built-in ROM 611 and RAM 612 . The display control device 6 also incorporates other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. MPU61 performs a process according to the control program memorize|stored in ROM611 grade|etc.,. Also, part or all of the processing performed by the display control device 6 may be performed by an electronic circuit.

In the ROM 611, in addition to the control program, the main symbols used in the symbol variation display of the symbol display unit 341, the notice effect image, the reach effect image, the big hit effect image, the off effect image, the opening used in the big hit game effect A plurality of types of images such as effect images, opening/closing execution effect images, and ending effect images are stored. The images displayed on the pattern display section 341 include still images and moving images. The ROM 611 also stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the types of images to be used and the display timing, as well as the variable display time of the variable symbols. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display section 341 to display an image according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing variable display and effect display of the main symbol.

A RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit from which various types of information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61 . Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input/output I/F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 also incorporates a ROM 711 and a RAM 712 .

A ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71 . Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7 . Specifically, the input/output I/F 72 is connected to the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 .

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stop member for switching whether or not game balls are to be paid out, A payout sensor 132b for individually detecting a game ball to be put out is provided. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result of the payout sensor 132b.

The ball lending device 100 is installed in an island facility together with the gaming machine 10.例文帳に追加The ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 according to the operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to put out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the amount set and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal to the effect that a predetermined number of game balls are to be paid out is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 to release a predetermined number of game balls. be paid out. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium containing an IC chip. Also, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending out a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the amount of cash inserted.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32 . Specifically, the shooting control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball shooting mechanism 32 while the shooting handle 22 is being rotated, thereby moving the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 to the shooting rail 321. feed above. The shooting control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the shooting handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball shooting mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation, thereby directing the game ball on the shooting rail 321 toward the game board 31. to fire. At this time, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a driving signal. As a result, the game machine 10 shoots one game ball toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

Also, the shooting handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation by the player, and voltage is input to the shooting control IC 81 according to the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 22 . As a result, the shooting control IC 81, based on the voltage value input according to the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 22, increases the shooting intensity of the game ball from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 as the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 22 increases. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so that it becomes stronger.

Further, the shooting handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the shooting handle 22, and a ball stopping switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily stop shooting the game ball. is provided. The shooting control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b, and when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the shooting handle 22, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism 32 is stopped. As a result, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a state of being rotated, preventing the game from being played in a situation where the player is not touching the firing handle 22 . Further, the player can stop the shooting of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b with a thumb or the like at an arbitrary timing while rotating the shooting handle 22.例文帳に追加

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply controller 9 generates a +12V voltage for driving various sensors, driving units, etc., a +5V voltage for logic used in the controller, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of +12V or +5V to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8 and the like.

The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on/off the power of the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when the gaming machine 10 is returned to its initial state. The game machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated with the RAM erase switch 91 turned on to turn on the power.

In addition, the power control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means charged with power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the game machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the control device can be driven by the power discharged from the secondary battery for a predetermined period of time.

Furthermore, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc., when it is determined that the power supply has been cut off. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power failure state occurs when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. I judge. In addition, when the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc. receive a power failure signal from the power control device 9, they interrupt the control being executed and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 24. FIG. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 includes a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is started periodically, and a main timer interrupt process that is executed when a power failure occurs. Execute NMI interrupt processing and the like. Note that in the present embodiment, description of start-up processing, NMI interrupt processing, etc. will be omitted, and main timer interrupt processing and main processing will be described.

[Main Timer Interrupt Processing of Main Controller 4]
Here, FIG. 14 is a flow chart for explaining an example of the main timer interrupt processing procedure executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 . The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec.

<Step S1001>
First, in step S<b>1001 , the MPU 41 executes sensor detection processing for determining the detection state of sensors or switches connected to the main controller 4 . For example, the detection states of the entering ball sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a, etc. are determined. At this time, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information when the passage of the game ball is detected by any of the entering ball sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, and 319a.

<Step S1002>
In step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal symbol random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal per symbol random number initial value counter CIN2, and sets the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. do.

<Step S1003>
In step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number counter C4 per normal symbol. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number counter C4 per normal symbol, and the counter values reach the maximum value. If so, set the counter value to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
The MPU 41 executes start winning processing associated with winning to the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 (step S1004), and executes launch control processing (step S1005). Details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the shooting control process, the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the shooting handle 22, and the game ball is shot on condition that the ball stop switch 21b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process to enable On the other hand, in the shooting control process, when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the shooting handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated, shooting of the game ball is disabled. It is a process to The MPU 41 instructs the shooting control device 8 to shoot the game ball when the shooting of the game ball is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 executes through gate processing. In the through gate process, the MPU 41 monitors whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319, and when the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319, it stores the Update stored information. Details of the through gate processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Start winning process]
Here, the starting winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
First, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the starting ports 314, 315 based on the detection results of the entering ball sensors 314La, 314Ra, 315a. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has entered the start ports 314 and 315 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102 and determines that the game ball has not entered the start ports 314 and 315. Then (step S1101: No), the start winning process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, MPU41 determines whether or not the number of reservations N stored in the special figure reservation number storage area NA of RAM412 is the maximum number of reservations (8 in this embodiment). Here, if the number N of reservations is the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process, and shifts the process to step S1005 in FIG. On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 stores the special figure propriety information in a high-priority empty reservation area among the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 of the special figure reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 14, and a variation type counter updated in step S1302 in the main process of FIG. Acquire the counter value with CS1, and transfer those counter values (numerical information) to the vacant reservation area with the highest priority among the 1st special figure reservation area RE1 to the 8th special figure reservation area RE8 in RAM 412 Special figure right or wrong information store as Also, the MPU 41 determines which of the left first start opening 314L, the right first start opening 314R and the second start opening 315 the current starting prize is for, based on the detection results of the ball entering sensors 314La, 314Ra, and 315a. Along with identifying whether there is, the starting opening information for the identified starting openings 314, 315 is stored in the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 as special figure propriety information. Further, the MPU 41 turns on the game state (mode A to mode E) in the pending game for which the numerical information is acquired in steps S1912, S1919, S1923, S1928 and S1931 of the game state transition processing in FIGS. 23 and 24 described later. The mode is specified based on the set mode type flag (mode A flag to mode E flag), and the mode information for the specified mode is used as special figure propriety information in the 1st special figure reservation area RE1 to the 8th special figure Store in the reserved area RE8.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, MPU41, before the special figure validity information acquired in step S1104 becomes a target for judging the validity of the jackpot in S1802 or S1803 of the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. 22 described later, the contents of the special figure validity information After confirmation, a pending command setting process is executed to set a pending command based on the result of this confirmation. It should be noted that, when the processing in step S1105 is completed, the start winning processing is terminated, and the processing proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

[Through gate processing]
Here, the through gate processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1006 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG. In the through gate process, it is monitored whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319, and when the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319, a normal pattern hit is stored in the normal pattern random number storage area 412c of the RAM 412. The counter value (random value) of the random number counter C4 is stored.

<Step S1201>
First, in step S1201, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gates 318, 319 based on the detection results of the entering ball sensors 317a, 318a. If the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319 (S1201: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1202, and if it determines that the game ball has not passed through the through gates 318 and 319 ( S1201: No), the through gate process ends.

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41, based on the normal pattern fluctuation display flag that is set to ON in step S1412 of the normal pattern control processing of FIG. pair is blinking). When the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner (S1202: Yes), the through gate process is terminated. That is, the MPU 41 does not execute the normal symbol winning lottery during the variable display of the normal symbols, and does not start the operation of the electric support member 36 . On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (S1202: No), the process proceeds to step S1203.

<Step S1203>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the electric support member 36 is in operation based on the electric role product operating flag set to ON in step S1508 of the normal electric role product control process in FIG. 19 to be described later. to decide. When the MPU 41 determines that the electric support member 36 is in operation (S1203: Yes), the through gate process ends. That is, the MPU 41 does not execute the normal symbol winning lottery while the electric support member 36 is in operation. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the electric support member 36 is not in operation (S1203: No), the process proceeds to step S1204.

<Step S1204>
In step S1204, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game is in progress. Whether or not the game is in the jackpot game is determined, for example, based on whether or not the jackpot game state flag, which is set to ON in step S1907 of the game state transition processing in FIG. 23, is set to ON. When the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game is in progress (S1204: Yes), it ends the through gate process. That is, the MPU 41 does not execute the normal symbol winning lottery during the jackpot game, and does not start the operation of the electric support member 36.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1204: No), the process proceeds to step S1205.

In this embodiment, the normal symbol winning lottery and the operation of the electric support member 36 are stopped during the big winning game, but the normal symbol winning lottery and the electric support member 36 are activated only in the open/close execution mode of the big winning game. The operation may be stopped, and the normal symbol winning lottery and the operation of the electric support member 36 may be stopped in the opening and opening/closing execution modes. That is, in the ending, the normal symbol winning lottery and the operation of the electric support member 36 may be performed.

<Steps S1205 and S1206>
When the normal symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (S1202: No), the electric support member 36 is not in operation (S1203: No), and the jackpot game is not in progress (S1204: No), the MPU 41 controls the normal symbol per random number counter C4. counter value (random number) is obtained (step S1205), this counter value (random number) is stored in the general pattern random number storage area 412c (step S1206), and the through gate process ends. In other words, on the condition that the normal symbols are not displayed in a variable manner, the electric support member 36 is not in operation, and the jackpot game is not in progress, the normal symbol winning lottery for determining whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 is performed. , and store the random value.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 17 . In the main process, main control processes for progress of the variation game and the jackpot game are executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1301 to S1308 are executed as regular processes, for example, at a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update process of steps S1309 to S1311 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processes of steps S1301 to S1308 to the next cycle. be.

<Step S1301>
First, in step S1301, the MPU 41 sends output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. Execute the process. For example, when a command such as a variation pattern command, a hold command, a shift command, etc. is set in the RAM 412 , the command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 . Also, when a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 to be described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7 .

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and sets the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets the prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332 in the RAM412. Specifically, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a winning has occurred in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316b, or the like. Then, when a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set in the RAM 412. - 特許庁Further, the MPU 41 sets a variable winning opening winning command in the RAM 412 when determining that the variable winning opening 316b has won a prize based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 . This variable winning opening winning command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the main process. As a result, the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5 can cause the symbol display section 341 to display the number of game balls to be paid out (distributed ball display) in the jackpot game.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 normally executes symbol control processing. In the normal symbol control process, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 based on the counter value (random value) of the normal symbol random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol random number storage area 412c. A lottery will be held. Details of the normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes normal electric accessory control processing. In the normal electric accessory control process, the MPU 41 executes the process of operating the electric support member 36 only for the operating time corresponding to the mode type (mode A to mode E) of the special figure gaming state. Details of the normal electric accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, MPU41 executes special figure game control processing for controlling the game in the variation game. Although the details of the special figure game control process will be described later, in the special figure game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and the variation pattern command required for the symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, MPU41, the big hit random number counter C1 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. Based on each value, while setting the variation pattern command indicating the variation display time and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the RAM 412, the variation display of the first special symbol display device 371 and the second special symbol display device 372 of the main display section 37. and control the stop display.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, an opening/closing execution mode for controlling opening/closing of the opening/closing door 316c is executed. In this open/close execution mode, a round game in which a game ball can be entered into the variable winning opening 316b is executed a plurality of times according to the jackpot type. As a result, the player can acquire many game balls in the jackpot game. In addition, in the jackpot game control process, at the start of the jackpot game (at the start of the opening), at the start of the opening/closing execution mode, at the end of the opening/closing execution mode (at the start of the ending), at the end of the jackpot game (at the end of the ending) ), etc., to set various flags and commands. For example, the MPU 41 sets commands such as a jackpot game start command, a jackpot game end command, an opening/closing execution mode start command, and an opening/closing execution mode end command in the RAM 412 according to the progress of the jackpot game. It controls ON/OFF of flags such as an end flag, an opening/closing execution mode start flag, and an opening/closing execution mode end flag.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes game state transition processing for shifting the game state based on the determination result of the jackpot lottery in step S1804 in the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. 22 described later. In the game state transition process, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to the jackpot game state and mode A to mode E when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. FIG.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that it is time to execute the next main process (step S1309: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1301, and the processes after S1301 described above are executed. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that it is not the execution timing of the next main process (step S1309: No), the MPU 41 waits until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process. During the remaining time, steps S1309 to S1311 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that it is time to execute the next main process (step S1309: Yes).

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal symbol random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal per symbol random number initial value counter CIN2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is set to 0. to

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the counter value is set to 0 when those counter values reach the maximum value. After updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1309.

[Normal symbol control process]
Here, FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of normal symbol control processing executed in step S1304 in the main processing of FIG. In the normal symbol control process, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to operate the electric accessory 36 based on the counter value (random value) of the normal random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol random number storage area 412c. To perform a lottery and control variable display of normal symbols.

<Steps S1401 and S1402>
First, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value (random value) of the normal per random number counter C4 is stored in the general pattern random number storage area 412c. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to perform a normal symbol winning lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 . When the MPU 41 stores the counter value (random value) of the normal per random number counter C4 in the general pattern random number storage area 412c (step S1401: Yes), the counter value (random value) stored in the general pattern random number storage area 412c ) is erased (step S1402), and the process proceeds to step S1403. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S1413, when the counter value (random number value) of the random number counter C4 hits normally is not memorize|stored in the normal figure random number storage area 412c (step S1401: No).

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode type is mode A, that is, whether or not the normal symbol winning lottery is performed based on the normal symbol low probability success/failure table (see FIG. 13(C)). When the MPU 41 determines that the mode type is mode A (step S1403: Yes), that is, when it determines that the normal symbol winning lottery is performed based on the normal symbol low probability success/failure table (see FIG. 13(C)), The process proceeds to step S1404. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the mode type is not mode A (step S1403: No), that is, it is one of mode B to mode E, the normal symbol winning lottery is normal symbol high probability success or failure table (Fig. 13 (D )), the process proceeds to step S1407.

<Steps S1404 to S1406>
When it is determined that the mode type is mode A (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 normally sets the counter value of the non-time saving mode to the symbol variation display counter (step S1404). This counter value defines the variable display time of normal symbols in the non-time saving mode, and is set as a value corresponding to, for example, 30 seconds. Then, the MPU 41 performs a normal symbol winning lottery based on the normal symbol low probability propriety table (see FIG. 13C) (step S1405), and determines whether or not the lottery result is winning (step S1406). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result is a hit depending on whether or not the counter value (random number) stored in the general/universal pattern random number storage area 412c is 199.

Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is a hit (step S1406: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1410, and when it is determined that the lottery result is out (step S1406 : No), the process proceeds to step S1411.

<Steps S1407 to S1409>
When it is determined that the mode type is not mode A (step S1403: No), that is, when it is determined that the game state is one of mode B to mode E, the MPU 41 puts the counter value of the time saving mode in the normal symbol variation display counter. is set (step S1407). This counter value defines the variable display time of normal symbols in the time saving mode, and the time during which the game ball passing through the first through gate 318 can enter the second start port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36, For example, it is set to about 0.004 to 0.2 seconds. Then, the MPU 41 performs a normal symbol winning lottery based on the normal symbol high probability success/failure table (see FIG. 13(D)) (step S1408), and determines whether or not the lottery result is winning (step S1409). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result is a win depending on whether the counter value (random number) stored in the general/universal pattern random number storage area 412c is 0-198.

Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is a hit (step S1409: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1410, and when it is determined that the lottery result is out (step S1409 : No), the process proceeds to step S1411.

<Step S1410>
When it is determined that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is a win (Yes in step S1406 or step S1409), the MPU 41 sets on the normal pattern hit flag indicating that the lottery result is a win (step S1410 ). The normal figure hit flag is referenced in order to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 in step S1503 of the normal electric accessory control process in FIG. 19 described later.

<Steps S1411 and S1412>
In step S1411, the MPU 41 starts variable display of the normal design (flashing of the pair of LED lamps of the normal design display 373), further sets the flag during normal design fluctuation display to ON (step S1412), and controls the normal design. End the process. The normal design variation display started here is when the counter value of the normal design variation display time counter set in step S1404 or step S1407 becomes 0, that is, the normal design variation set according to the mode type. After the display time has passed, it is stopped and displayed in step S1415, which will be described later.

<Step S1413>
When the counter value (random value) of the normal per random number counter C4 is not stored in the normal pattern random number storage area 412c (step S1401: No), the MPU 41 is normally set in step S1404 or step S1407 during the fluctuation display time of the design. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter is 0 (step S1413). If the value of the variable display time counter is 0 (step S1413: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1414, and if the value of the variable display time counter is not 0 (step S1413: No), the process proceeds to step S1418. .

<Step S1414>
When it is determined that the counter value of the variation display time counter for normal symbols is 0 (step S1413: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation display flag is set to ON (step S1414). . The normal pattern fluctuation displaying flag indicates whether or not the normal pattern is fluctuating, and is set to ON in step S1412. In other words, the MPU 41, when the counter value of the fluctuation display time counter of the normal symbol is 0 (step S1414: Yes), determines whether the flag during the normal pattern fluctuation display is set to ON. , It is determined whether or not it is time to stop and display the normal symbols. MPU41, when the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is set to on (step S1414: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1415, when the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is set to off (step S1414: No), the normal diagram control process ends.

<Steps S1415 to S1417>
When the counter value of the normal symbol variation counter is 0 (step S1413: Yes) and the normal symbol variation display flag is set to ON (step S1414: Yes), it is normal symbol stop display timing, so the MPU 41 , the normal symbol is stopped and displayed by lighting or extinguishing the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373 (step S1415). That is, the MPU 41 indicates the lottery result of the normal symbol winning lottery in step S1405 or S1408 by means of the stop display symbol of the normal symbol. In addition, the MPU 41 sets the normal pattern fluctuation display flag indicating that the normal pattern is fluctuating to OFF (step S1416), and sets the normal pattern fluctuation stop flag to ON (step S1417). The normal pattern fluctuation stop flag is a flag indicating that the fluctuation display of the normal pattern has been stopped, and in step S1501 of the normal electric accessory control process described later, it is determined whether or not it is time to operate the electric support member 36. Referred to for decision making.

<Step S1418>
When the counter value of the variation counter of the normal design is not 0 (step S1413: No), it is not the stop display timing of the normal design, so the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the variation display time counter of the normal design, and the normal design. End the control process.

[Normal electric accessory control process]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of normal electric accessary product control processing executed in step S1305 in the main processing of FIG. In the normal electric accessory control process, the MPU 41 executes the process of operating the electric support member 36 as the normal electric accessory for the operating time corresponding to the mode type (modes A to E).

<Step S1501>
First, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation stop flag, which is set to ON in step S1417 of the normal symbol control process of FIG. determine whether there is When the normal pattern fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal fluctuation stop flag to OFF (step S1502), and shifts the processing to step S1503. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S1509, when the normal figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S1501: No).

<Steps S1502 and S1503>
When the normal pattern fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal pattern fluctuation stop flag to OFF (step S1502), and whether the normal pattern per flag is set to ON is determined (step S1503). The normal pattern hit flag indicates that the lottery result in the normal pattern per lottery is a hit, and is set to ON in step S1410 of the normal pattern control process in FIG. MPU41, when the normal pattern per flag is set to ON (step S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1504, when the normal pattern per flag is set to off (step S1503: Yes), the End the normal electric accessory control process.

<Steps S1504 to S1506>
When the normal figure hit flag is set to ON (step S1503: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the mode type is one of mode A to mode C. When the MPU 41 determines that the mode type is one of the modes A to C (step S1504: Yes), the initial value of the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter is set to the electric support member 36 for short operation. A value is set (step S1505), and the process proceeds to step S1507. The initial value for short operation is, for example, a value corresponding to 0.6 seconds. On the other hand, if it is determined that the mode type is neither mode A to mode C (step S1504: No), that is, if it is mode D or mode E, as the initial value of the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter, the electric support A value for long operation of the member 36 is set (step S1506), and the process proceeds to step S1507. The initial value for long operation is, for example, a value corresponding to 6 seconds.

<Steps S1507 and S1508>
In step S1507, the MPU 41 starts the operation of the electric support member 36, and further sets the electric accessory operating flag to ON (step S1508). The electric accessory in operation flag indicates that the electric support member 36 is in operation. Referenced.

Here, when the operation of the electric support member 36 is started, the electric support member 36 moves to the operating position protruding from the game board 31, and the electric support member 36 covers the right first start opening 314R (see FIG. 9 ( B)). In this state, game balls released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 are restricted from entering the right first starting port 314R. On the other hand, game balls released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 can be received by the electric support member 36 . When the game ball released from the second passage 352 is received by the electric support member 36 , the game ball is guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36 . Also, game balls flowing down the right side of the sorting device 35 can be received by the electric support member 36 .

<Steps S1509 and S1510>
MPU41, when the normal figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S1501: No), whether the counter value of the electric accessary product operation counter whose initial value is set in step S1505 or S1506 is 0 It judges (step S1509). The electric accessory actuation counter indicates the remaining time for the electric support member 36 to operate. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the electric support member 36 is not operating and is in the standby position. When the counter value of the electric accessary product operation counter is 0 (step S1509: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1511. On the other hand, when the counter value of the electric auditors product operation counter is not 0 (step S1509: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the electric auditors product operation counter (step S1510), and ends the normal electric auditors product control process. do.

<Step S1511>
When the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter is 0 (step S1509: Yes), that is, when the electric support member 36 which is a normal electric accessory is not operating, the MPU 41 turns on the electric accessory operating flag. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S1511). The electric accessary product in operation flag indicates that the electric support member 36 is in operation, and is set to ON in step S1508. In other words, when the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter is 0 (step S1509: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the electric accessory operating flag is set to ON. It is determined whether or not it is time to end the operation of the support member 36, that is, whether or not it is time to return the electric support member 36 from the operating position to the standby position. MPU41, if the electric auditors product in operation flag is set to ON (step S1511: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1512, if the electric auditors product in operation flag is set to OFF (step S1511: No), the normal electric accessary product control process ends.

<Steps S1512 and S1513>
When the electric accessary product in operation flag is set to ON (step S1511: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the electric support member 36 from the operating position to the standby position (step S1512). That is, the MPU 41 restricts the game ball from entering the second starting port 315 . Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the electric accessory operating flag indicating that the electric support member 36 is operating to OFF (step S1513), and terminates the normal symbol control process.

Here, the electric support member 36 is returned to the standby position, so that the electric support member 36 opens the right first starting port 314R (see FIG. 8(C)). In this state, the game ball released from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is permitted to enter the right first start port 314R, but cannot be received by the electric support member 36. Therefore, the game ball released from the second passage 352 is restricted from entering the second starting port 315 . Also, game balls flowing down the right side of the sorting device 35 cannot be received by the electric support member 36, and entry into the second start port 315 is restricted.

By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, a first starting section capable of entering a game ball without receiving the support of an ordinary electric accessory, as a starting section that triggers a jackpot lottery for shifting to a jackpot game; There is also a second starting section that allows a game ball to be entered with the support of an ordinary electric accessory. In some game machines, a sorting device alternately sorts game balls between the first starting section and the second starting section.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game balls are distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the distribution device 35, and the game balls are distributed to the second passage 352 by the distribution device 35. If it is, depending on whether the electric support member 36 is operated or not, the entrance of the game ball to the right first start port 314R and the second start port 315 is permitted or restricted. Specifically, when the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 is in the standby position without the electric support member 36 operating (see FIG. 8(C)), the game ball to the right first start port 314R is permitted, the entry of game balls into the second starting port 315 is restricted. In addition, when the electric support member 36 operates and is in the operating position (see FIG. 9B), the entry of the game ball to the right first start port 314R is restricted, while the second start port 315 Entry of game balls is permitted. Further, when the electric support member 36 is at the operating position, the electric support member 36 guides the game balls released from the sorting device 35 to the second starting port 315 in addition to the game balls hit to the right side area of the game board 31. be able to. In this way, the game machine 10 is different from the one in which game balls are distributed to the first start opening and the second start opening by a conventional distribution device. In addition, the electric support member 36 of the game machine 10 not only permits or restricts the entry of game balls into the second starting port 315 but also distributes them to the second passage 352, unlike conventional ordinary electric accessories. Entry of the game ball into the right first starting hole 314R is permitted or restricted at the same time. Also, the game ball in the second passage 352 and the game ball hit to the right can be guided to the second starting port 315 by one electric support member 36 . The game machine 10 can vary the ball entry ratio between the right first start hole 314R and the second start hole 315 by the cooperation of the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36. FIG. As a result, the game machine 10 can reduce the monotony of the game, and provide a game machine with new playability and improved interest according to the control mode of the operation of the electric support member 36 . For example, while the electric support member 36 is operated short in modes A to C, it is operated long in modes D and E (see FIG. 13(B)). , the game machine 10 can be provided with a plurality of barriers with different difficulties. Further, the electric support member 36 is a plate-like member and can be easily formed by resin molding or the like. Therefore, in this embodiment, the above effects can be achieved at low cost with a simple configuration.

[Special game control process]
Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the special figure game control processing executed by the MPU 41 at step S1306 in the main processing of FIG. 17 will be described. In the special figure game control process, the control of the variable display and stop display of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 371 or the second special symbol display device 372, the setting of the data of the special figure reservation storage area 412b, the management of the number of time reduction etc. is executed.

<Step S1601>
In step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in the middle of the big hit game, and if it is in the middle of the big hit game (step S1601: Yes), ends the variation game control process, and is not in the middle of the big hit game. If so (step S1601: No), the process proceeds to step S1602. For example, whether or not the big win game is executed is determined based on the big win game execution flag which the MPU 41 sets to ON at the start of the big win game and turns OFF at the end of the big win game.

<Step S1602>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and if the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S1602: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1603. If the symbol variation display is not being performed (step S1602: No), the process proceeds to step S1607. For example, whether or not the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner is set to ON in step S1810 in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. It is determined based on whether or not the special figure fluctuation display flag set to off in step S1605 is set to on.

<Step S1603>
In step S1603, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbols has passed the variable display time determined according to the lottery result of the special symbol jackpot lottery, and displays the variable display. If it is determined that the time has elapsed (step S1603: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1604, and if it is determined that the fluctuation display time has not elapsed (step S1603: No), the special figure game control process exit.

<Steps S1604 to S1606>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1603: Yes), the MPU 41 is the special symbol display device 371, 372 that is in the process of variable display of the first special symbol display device 371 and the second special symbol display device 372. Symbols according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special game are stopped and displayed (step S1604). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the special figure fluctuation displaying flag to OFF (step S1605), and sets the special figure fluctuation stop flag to ON indicating that the special symbol fluctuation has been stopped (step S1606).

<Step S1607>
If the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (step S1602: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number N of reservations stored in the special figure reservation number storage area NA of the special figure reservation storage area 412b is 0. (Step S1607). Here, when the number N of reservations is 0 (step S1607: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the special game control process. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S1608, when the number N of reservations is not 0 (step S1607: No).

<Step S1608>
In step S1608, MPU41 performs a data setting process about the special figure propriety information memorize|stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b. When the process of step S1608 is finished, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1609. Details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1609>
In step S1609, the MPU 41 causes the special symbol display devices 371 and 372 to execute the variation display based on the special figure validity information stored in the special figure execution area AE, and the variation display based on the special figure validity information to the symbol display unit 341. A variation start process for setting a variation pattern command is executed for execution, and the special figure game control process is terminated. The details of the special figure fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, an example of data setting processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1608 of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG. In the data setting process, the process is executed by updating the data in the special figure reservation storage area 412b of the RAM412.

<Steps S1701 and S1702>
First, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number N of reservations stored in the special figure reservation number storage area NA of the special figure reservation storage area 412b (step S1701), and further the first special figure reservation area of the special figure reservation storage area 412b. The special figure propriety information is moved from RE1 to the special figure execution area AE (step S1702).

<Step S1703>
In step S1703, the MPU 41 shifts the special figure propriety information of the second special figure reservation area RE2 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 one by one. Specifically, in step S1703, the special figure validity information in the second special figure reservation area RE2 is moved to the first special figure reservation area RE1, and the special figure validity information in the third special figure reservation area RE3 is moved to the second special figure reservation. Move to the area RE2, move the special figure validity information in the fourth special figure reservation area RE4 to the third special figure reservation area RE3, move the special figure validity information in the fifth special figure reservation area RE5 to the fourth special figure reservation area RE4 , move the special figure validity information in the 6th special figure reservation area RE6 to the 5th special figure reservation area RE5, and move the special figure validity information in the 7th special figure reservation area RE7 to the 6th special figure reservation area RE6 and move the special figure propriety information in the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 to the seventh special figure reservation area RE7.

<Step S1704>
In step S1704, the MPU 41 sets a shift command in the RAM 412 indicating that the special figure propriety information of the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 has been shifted. The shift command set in step S1704 is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 17) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. As a result, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display section 341 is changed. When the process of step S1704 ends, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process and shifts the process to the special figure fluctuation start process of step S1609 in FIG.

[Special figure fluctuation start process]
Here, an example of the special figure fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1609 of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
First, the MPU 41 is based on the mode information in the special figure validity information stored in the special figure execution area AE of the special figure reservation storage area 412b of the RAM 412, and the game state at the time of acquisition of the validity information is mode C or mode E (step S1801). Here, in mode C and mode E, based on the high probability mode success/failure table, the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the special figure success/failure information stored in the special figure execution area AE is the jackpot winning. This is a mode for judging whether or not there are corresponding values (see FIGS. 12(B) and 13(B)). That is, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the mode is a mode in which the success/failure determination is performed based on the high-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 12B). MPU41, when the special figure gaming state is mode C or mode E (step S1801: Yes), based on the high probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 12 (B)), performs the propriety determination (step S1802). On the other hand, if the game state is not mode C or mode E (step S1801: No), that is, if the game state is mode A, mode B or mode D, based on the low probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 12(A)) Then, a decision is made as to whether or not it is appropriate (step S1803).

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
In step S1804, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the win/loss determination in step S1802 or S1803 is a big hit. MPU41, when the result of the success/failure determination is a jackpot (step S1804: Yes), the counter value of the jackpot type counter C2 included as numerical information in the special figure success/failure information stored in the special figure execution area AE, and the special figure Based on the starting opening information (special figure information) included in the success or failure information, the big hit type is distributed, and the process proceeds to step S1806. For example, if the starting opening information (special figure information) indicates the first starting opening (first special figure), depending on the counter value of the jackpot type counter C2, either the 2R normal jackpot or the 2R probability variable jackpot Distribute jackpot types. In addition, when the starting opening information (special figure information) indicates the second starting opening (second special figure), according to the counter value of the jackpot type counter C2, 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot and 16R probability variable jackpot Distribute the jackpot type to any one of. On the other hand, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1806 without distributing the jackpot type (step S1805) when the result of the success/failure determination is not a big hit (step S1804: No), that is, when the lottery result is out.

<Step S1806>
In step S1806, the MPU 41 performs a lottery result flag setting process for setting a lottery result flag according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, that is, the success/failure determination in step S1802 or S1803, and the jackpot type distribution result in step S1805. Run. In this lottery result flag setting process, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 2R normal jackpot, the 2R normal jackpot flag is set, when the 2R probability variable jackpot is set, the 2R probability variable jackpot flag is set, and when the 5R normal jackpot is a 5R jackpot. When the normal jackpot flag is the 5R probability variable jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot flag is set, when the 16R probability variable jackpot is set, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set, and when the jackpot is off, the loss flag is set. Here, the 2R normal jackpot flag, the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, the 5R normal jackpot flag, the 5R probability variable jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variable jackpot flag are flags indicating that the lottery result is a jackpot and the jackpot type, and are shown in FIGS. In the game state transition processing, it is referred to when the game state is shifted from the jackpot game state to mode B to mode E after the jackpot game is finished, and is set to OFF when the game state is shifted to the target mode after the jackpot game is finished. be. Also, the loss flag indicates that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, and is set to OFF in step S1813, which will be described later. Then, in this step S1806, when the lottery result flag is set, the stop display patterns of the special figure indicators 371 and 372 of the main display section 37 are also set according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
In step S1807, the MPU 41, according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game, sets the variation pattern indicating the variation display time of the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 371 and 372 to the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter. Determined based on the counter value of CS1. And MPU41 sets a variation pattern command to RAM412 based on the variation pattern determined by step S1807 (step S1808). This variation pattern command may include the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special game. Of course, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery may be set as a command separate from the variation pattern command without being included in the variation pattern command. The variation pattern command set in step S1808 is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 5 in step S1301 (see FIG. 17) of the next main process executed by the MPU 41. FIG. On the other hand, the sound lamp control device 5 executes the symbol variation display by the symbol display section 341 based on the variation pattern command.

<Steps S1809 and S1810>
When the variation pattern is set, the MPU 41 starts the variation display of the special symbols on the special symbol indicators 371 and 372 (step S1809), and sets the special symbol variation display flag to ON (step S1810). Here, the special symbol whose variable display is started is stopped after the variable display time (variation pattern) set in step S1807 in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 20 (step S1603 of FIG. 20: Yes and S1604). At this time, the special symbol is stopped at the stop display symbol set in step S1806 according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery.

<Step S1811>
In step S1811, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time saving flag set to on at S1917 or S1926 in the game state transition processing of FIGS. When set (step S1811: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1812, and when the time saving flag is set to off (step S1811: No), the special figure fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Step S1812>
When the time saving flag is set to ON (step S1811: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the out flag is set to ON (step S1812: Yes). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1813 when the out flag is set to ON (step S1812: Yes), that is, when the result of the right/wrong determination in step S1802 or S1803 is out. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1817 when the off flag is set to off (step S1812: No), that is, when the result of the win/loss determination in step S1802 or S1803 is a big hit.

<Steps S1813 to S1816>
When the out flag is set to ON (step S1812: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the out flag to OFF (step S1813), and S1917 or S1926 in the game state transition process of FIGS. 23 and 24 described later. 1 is subtracted from the counter value of the time saving counter that is set when the time saving flag is set to ON (step S1814), and it is determined whether the counter value of the time saving counter after the subtraction is 0. (Step S1815). In addition, the counter value of the time-saving counter indicates the number of remaining time-savings. MPU41, when the counter value of the time saving counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, when the remaining time saving number of times is 0 and it is necessary to end the time saving mode, the time saving end flag is set to ON. (Step S1816), the process proceeds to step S1817. The time saving end flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1909 of the game state transition processing in FIG. 23 in order to determine whether the time saving mode is ended. On the other hand, when the counter value of the time saving counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1815: No), the MPU 41 ends the special figure fluctuation start processing.

<Step S1817>
MPU41, when the off flag is set to off (step S1812: No), that is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, or when the time saving end flag is set to on (step S1816), the time saving flag is set to off (step S1817), and the special figure fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, the game state transition processing executed by the MPU 41 at step S1308 in the main processing of FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. FIG. In the game state transition processing, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the game state is shifted from a special game state consisting of modes A to E to a jackpot game state including an opening/closing execution mode, and the game state is changed to a jackpot game state. After the end of the jackpot game, according to the type of jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state, execute processing to shift from the jackpot game state to any of the special game state modes B to E ( See FIG. 13(A)). In addition, in the game state transition processing, in the mode B or mode D of the special figure game state, after executing the special figure game of the upper limit number of times, the process of shifting to the mode A is executed (see FIG. 13 (A)). Since the details of Modes A to E have already been explained, the explanation of Modes A to E will be omitted here.

<Steps S1901 and S1902>
First, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop flag, which is set to on in step S1606 of the special figure game control process in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is time to shift the game state to another game state. MPU41, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), sets the special figure fluctuation stop flag to OFF (step S1902), and shifts the process to step S1903. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S1901: No), the process proceeds to step S1914.

<Step S1903>
In step S1903, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result of the big win lottery that triggered the variable display of the special symbols whose variable display has been stopped is a big win. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift the game state to the jackpot game state. Whether or not the lottery result is a big hit, 2R normal jackpot flag, 2R probability variable jackpot flag, 5R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag and 16R probability variable set to ON in step S1806 of special figure fluctuation start processing in FIG. It is determined by whether or not any one of the jackpot flags is set to ON.

When the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result is a big hit (step S1903: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1904, and when it determines that the lottery result is not a big hit (step S1903: No), The process moves to step S1909.

<Steps S1904 and S1905>
In step S1904, MPU41 judges whether the time saving flag set to ON by below-mentioned step S1917 or S1926 is set to ON. The time-saving flag indicates that the time-saving mode is limited to the number of times. If the MPU 41 determines that the time saving flag is set to ON (step S1904: Yes), that is, if it is a jackpot in mode B or mode D, the time saving flag is turned off to end the limited time saving mode (step S1905), and the process proceeds to step S1906. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the time saving flag is set to off (step S1904: No), that is, when the jackpot in mode A, mode C or mode E, the process proceeds to step S1906.

<Steps S1906 and S1907>
In step S1906, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to the jackpot game state, and further sets the jackpot game state flag to ON (step S1907). The jackpot game state flag indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, and is referred to, for example, in step S1204 in the through gate process of FIG. 16 to determine whether a jackpot game is in progress.

<Step S1908>
In step S1908, the MPU 41 sets the mode type flag to OFF (step S1908), and sets the mode type flag to OFF (step S1908). The mode type flag indicates which mode the mode type in the special game state is mode A to mode E, and in this step S1908, it is set to ON when shifting to the jackpot game state. set the mode type flag to off.

The mode type flag is a mode A flag that is set to ON in step S1912 to indicate mode A, a mode B flag that is set to ON in step S1919 to indicate mode B, and a mode B flag that is set to ON in step S1923. A mode C flag that is set to ON and indicates that the mode is C, a mode D flag that is set to ON in step S1928 and indicates that the mode is D (see FIG. 24), and a flag that is set to ON in step S1931. and includes a mode E flag (see FIG. 24) indicating that it is mode E.

<Step S1909>
If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out (step S1903: No), the MPU41 is set to ON in step S1816 of the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. 22 Whether the time saving end flag is set to ON is determined (step S1909). The time-saving end flag indicates that the upper limit number of special symbol games has been executed in the time-saving mode with a limited number of times (the number of remaining time-savings is 0), and is a flag for ending the time-saving mode.

MPU41 transfers a process to step S1910, when it is judged that the time saving end flag is set to ON (step S1909: Yes). On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the time saving end flag is set to off (step S1909: No), it ends the game state transition processing without shifting to the mode A.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
When it is determined that the time saving end flag is set to ON (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time saving end flag to OFF (step S1910). And MPU41 changes mode classification from mode B or mode D which is time saving mode to mode A (Step S1911). At this time, the MPU 41 sets the mode A flag to ON (step S1912), sets the mode B flag or mode D flag indicating the mode before shifting to mode A to OFF (step S1913), and sets the game state End the migration process.

<Steps S1914 and S1915>
In step S1914, when the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), it is set to ON in the jackpot game control process of step S1307 in the main process of FIG. It is determined whether or not the jackpot game end flag is set to ON, that is, whether or not it is time to shift to any one of modes B to E upon completion of the jackpot game.

When the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S1914: Yes), it sets the jackpot game end flag to OFF (step S1915), and shifts the process to step S1916. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game end flag is set to OFF (step S1914: No), it ends the game state transition process without performing the transition from mode B to mode E.

<Step S1916>
In step S1916, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag, which is set to ON in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start processing in FIG. 22, is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the type of the finished jackpot game is the 2R normal jackpot. When the 2R normal jackpot flag is set to ON (step S1916: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1917, and when the 2R normal jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S1916: No), the process to step S1921.

<Steps S1917 to S1920>
In step S1917, the MPU 41 turns on a time saving flag indicating that it is a time saving mode limited to the number of times. At this time, MPU41 sets the upper limit of the number of times of time saving as a time saving counter. The number of times of time saving is, for example, 50 times, and in this case, "50" is set as a time saving counter. Then, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to mode B (step S1918) and sets the mode B flag to ON (step S1919). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the 2R normal jackpot flag to OFF (step S1920), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S1921>
In step S1921, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, which is set to ON in step S1806 of the special figure variation start processing in FIG. 22, is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the type of the finished jackpot game is the 2R probability variable jackpot. When the 2R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON (step S1921: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1922, and when the 2R probability variable jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S1921: No), the process to step S1925 in FIG.

<Steps S1922 to S1924>
At step S1922, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to mode C, and further sets the mode C flag to ON (step S1923). Then, the MPU 41 sets the 2R probability variable jackpot flag to OFF (step S1924), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S1925>
In step S1925 shown in FIG. 24, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the 5R normal jackpot flag, which is set to ON in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start processing in FIG. 22, is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the type of the finished jackpot game is the 5R normal jackpot. When the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to ON (step S1925: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1926, and when the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S1925: No), the process to step S1930.

<Steps S1926 to S1929>
In step S1926, the MPU 41 turns on a time saving flag indicating that it is a limited time saving mode. At this time, MPU41 sets the upper limit of the number of times of time saving as a time saving counter. The number of times of time saving is, for example, 50 times, and in this case, "50" is set as a time saving counter. Then, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to mode D (step S1927) and sets the mode D flag to ON (step S1928). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to OFF (step S1929), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S1930 to S1932>
At step S1930, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to mode E and sets the mode E flag to ON. That is, when the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S1914: Yes) and all of the 2R normal jackpot flag, 2R probability variable jackpot flag and 5R normal jackpot flag are set to OFF (steps S1916, S1921 and S1925 No), it can be determined that either the 5R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON. Therefore, in step S1930, the MPU 41 shifts to mode E, which is the destination mode after the end of the 5R probability variable jackpot game and the 16R probability variable jackpot game, and sets the mode E flag to ON. Then, the MPU 41 sets the 5R probability variable big hit flag or the 16R probability variable big hit flag set to ON to OFF (step S1932), and ends the game state transition processing.

[Secondary Timer Interrupt Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Here, FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of sub timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 51. As shown in FIG. The MPU 51 executes, for example, sub timer interrupt processing as regular processing with a period of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the secondary timer interrupt processing, the MPU 51 performs operation button operation detection processing (step S2001), operation detection pattern determination processing (step S2002), counter update processing (step S2003), command determination processing (step S2004), a special game effect process (step S2005), and a jackpot game effect process (step S2006) are executed.

[Operation detection processing]
In the operation detection process of step S2001, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the operation button 20, and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times, for example. In the gaming machine 10, the MPU 51 executes the operation button operation detection process, so that the operation button 20 is operated at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub timer interrupt process. The presence or absence of is determined.

[Operation Detection Pattern Judgment Processing]
In the operation detection pattern determination process in step S2002, the MPU 51 sets an operation pattern flag corresponding to the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the past three times, for example. The operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined from this operation pattern flag. The operation state includes a start state of operation on the operation button 20, a continuation state of operation on the operation button 20, an end state of operation on the operation button 20, and a non-operation state in which the operation button 20 is not operated.

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process of step S2003, the MPU 51 updates the effect type counter, the variation display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the effect type counter, and sets the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The effect type counter updated here is used to determine the variation type and effect type based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 4 . On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the variation display counter. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the decorative pattern in the pattern display section 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter becomes 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. set. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variable display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining variable display time, the fact that the decoration pattern is being changed, the completion of the variable display of the decoration pattern in the pattern display section 341, and the like.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of step S2004, the MPU 51 determines the command received from the main controller 4 and executes the process corresponding to the command. For example, commands received from the main controller 4 include a variation pattern command, a hold command, a shift command, and the like. Commands other than these commands may be output from the main controller 4 to the sound lamp controller 5, but the description of those commands will be omitted.

The variation pattern command is a command indicating the variation display time and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command, when starting the variation display of the special symbols on the special symbol display devices 371 and 372, based on the information stored in the special symbol reservation storage area 412b, in the special symbol variation start processing of FIG. It is set in step S1808. When receiving the variation pattern command, the MPU 51 determines the special figure game effect and the jackpot game effect to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 and the like according to the contents specified by the variation pattern command.

The pending command is a command that indicates the lottery result, variation pattern, and pending number N in the jackpot lottery for the increased pending when the pending number N stored in the special figure pending storage area 412b increases. Suspension command is set in step S1105 in the starting winning process of FIG.

The shift command is a command indicating that when the number of reservations N decreases, the special figure success or failure information indicating the lottery results in the jackpot lottery in the 1st special figure reservation area RE1 to the 8th special figure reservation area RE8 has been shifted. be. The shift command is set in step S1704 in the data setting process of FIG.

[Special game effect processing]
In the special figure game production process of step S2005, in the special figure game, for example, the special figure game production determined when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process is displayed in the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, etc. let it run.

[Jackpot game effect processing]
In the jackpot game effect processing of step S2006, the pattern display unit 341 displays the jackpot game effect (opening effect, opening/closing execution mode effect and ending effect) determined when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process, for example, in the jackpot game. The speaker 26, the electric decoration part 27, etc. are made to perform.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a conventional game equipped with a distribution device that distributes game balls to the first starter and the second starter having a different function from the first starter. Unlike the machine, the first starting port 314 having the same function is arranged below the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 . In addition, although the game machine 10 is provided with a normal electric accessory (electric support member 36) as in the conventional game machine, the electric support member 36 is located downstream of the stage 310 where game balls are collected when hit right. It extends continuously between the side and the bottom of the game ball exit of the second passage 352 (above the right first starting port 314R), and is formed in a plate shape having a delay portion 364. As shown in FIG. As a result, the electric support member 36 enables the game balls introduced into the distribution device 35 and distributed to the second passage 352 to enter the second starting port 315 when hitting the left side, and the stage when hitting the right side. The game balls collected in 310 can be made to enter the second start port 315.例文帳に追加In other words, the electric support member 36 allows or restricts the winning of game balls to the second starting port 315, and at the same time restricts or restricts the winning of game balls to the right first starting port 314R, depending on whether or not it is operated. allow. In other words, the electric support member 36 restricts the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315, unlike the ordinary electric accessory of the conventional game machine, thereby preventing the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R. While permitting, by permitting the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315, the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R is restricted. In addition, the game machine 10 includes a normal mode (mode A), a latent probability variable mode (mode C) and a time reduction probability variable mode (mode E) that are employed in conventional gaming machines as special game states. By cooperating with the device 35 and the electric support member 36, the playability in the latent probability variable mode (mode C) is improved.

Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, left-handed hitting is encouraged in mode A and mode C, and when left-handed hitting is performed, game balls enter the distribution device 35, and those game balls enter the first passage 351. and the second passage 352 alternately. On the other hand, in mode E, right-handed hitting is encouraged, and by performing right-handed hitting, it is possible to receive support from the electric support member 36 for a long time and at a high frequency, and the second special game until the transition to the jackpot game state is performed. Only special figure games are executed. In other words, in mode E, the rate of ball entry into the second start port 315 is 100%, similar to the time-saving variable probability mode of a conventional game machine in which the high probability mode is executed by hitting to the right without using the sorting device 35. is.

Then, in mode A, the game ball distributed to the first passage 351 wins the left first starting port 314L. In addition, since the mode A is not the time saving mode, the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 wins the right first start port 314R before the electric support member 36 operates. In other words, in mode A, game balls are alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the distribution device 35, but the game balls introduced to the distribution device 35 are first start port 314 (left First starting port 314L or right first starting port 314R). Therefore, in mode A, substantially the same as the normal mode of the conventional gaming machine, the percentage of balls entering the first starting port 314 is 100%.

On the other hand, in mode C, similarly to mode A, left-handed hitting is encouraged, and game balls enter the sorting device 35 when left-handed hitting is performed, and those game balls enter the first passage 351. The game balls are alternately distributed to the second passages 352, and when the game balls are distributed to the first passage 351, the game balls win the left first start port 314L. In addition, since mode C is a time-saving mode unlike mode A, the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 is restricted from entering the right first start port 314R by the operation of the electric support member 36. Thus, the second starting port 315 is won. That is, in mode C, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first starting port 314 (left first starting port 314L) and the second starting port 315 by the distribution device 35 by hitting left. Therefore, in mode C, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first starting port 314 (left first starting port 314L) and the second starting port 315, while the latency probability variable mode is the first starting port (left first starting port 314L). The ball entry ratio between the starting port 314L) and the second starting port 315 is 50%:50% as long as the result of the lottery per normal pattern is not lost.

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 is different in mode A (expected value is 0%), mode C (expected value is 50%), and mode C (expected value is 50%). It has three game states of mode E (expected value is 100%). Therefore, based on the three game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first start hole 314 and the second start hole 315 are different, it is possible to create new game properties with improved game properties. In particular, since the game machine 10 is configured as MAX8, the hold is digested in the order of winning, so in mode C, the jackpot lottery at the first start port 314 and the jackpot lottery at the second start port 315 are alternately performed. , and with a probability of 1/2, it is possible to receive the distribution of the jackpot type by winning to the second start port 315, and the distribution of the jackpot type by winning to the first start port 314 with a probability of 1/2. can receive

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 enters the right first start hole 314R in mode A, and enters the second start hole 315 in mode C. to ball This is because game balls distributed to the second passage 352 are allowed to enter the right first start port 314R when the electric support member 36 is in the standby position where the electric support member 36 is not operated, Entry of a game ball into the second start port 315 is restricted, and when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position where the electric support member 36 operates, entry of a game ball into the right first start port 314R is restricted, while the second start is performed. This is realized by arranging the electric support member 36 so that the game ball can enter the mouth 315 and by differentiating the operation time of the electric support member 36 between the mode A and the mode C. . In this way, the electric support member 36 not only allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the second starting hole 315, but also allows the game balls distributed to the second passage 352 to enter the right first starting hole 314R. Entry of game balls is allowed or restricted at the same time. In other words, the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36 work together to vary the ball entry ratio between the right first start hole 314R and the second start hole 315 in modes A and C. be able to. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game, and to provide a highly interesting game machine with new game features depending on the control mode of the operation of the electric support member 36 .

In the gaming machine 10, the delay guide 364 is provided on the electric support member 36 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 315, so that the player can Even if the game ball is received by the electric support member 36 by hitting to the right, the delay guide 364 can secure a long time until the game ball reaches the second start port 315.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the electric support member 36 from reaching the second start port 315 from the start of the operation of the electric support member 36 to the return to the standby position, so that the left-handed hitting is encouraged. By eliminating the advantage of hitting to the right in the state, it is possible to make the player positively hit to the left.

[Other embodiments]
Another embodiment of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described below. Further, in the following other embodiments, the same reference numerals and the same step numbers are assigned to the same configurations and processing steps as those of the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment. The description below is omitted. It should be noted that it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing procedure of the first embodiment described above and other embodiments described below.

[Second to Sixth Embodiments]
In the first embodiment described above, the game machine 10 is configured as a loop variable machine, and the case where the special symbol game is executed in any of the five game states of mode A to mode E has been described. On the other hand, in the second to sixth embodiments, the specifications of the gaming machine 10 are different from those in the first embodiment. The second to sixth embodiments will be individually described below.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the special symbol game is executed in any of the five game states of mode A to mode E has been described. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a special symbol game is executed in one of the three game states of mode A, mode C and mode E. That is, the game machine 10 of this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that mode B and mode D, which are time-saving modes with a limited number of times, are not included as special game states. In addition, since the special figure gaming state is composed of three modes A to C, mode transition is also different from the above-described first embodiment.

The game machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, focusing on differences from the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 26(A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot classification table, FIG. 26(B) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, FIG. 26(C) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table, FIG. 26D is a diagram showing an example of mode transition, and FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG.

The jackpot type distribution table shown in FIG. 26(A) is the same as that of the above-described first embodiment. That is, also in this embodiment, the jackpot in the first special game by winning the first starting port 314 is distributed to either the 2R variable jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot, and the winning to the second starting port 315 The jackpot in the 2 special game is distributed to one of the 5R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot, and the 5R normal jackpot. Of course, the allocation of the jackpot types may be different from that in the above-described first embodiment, and for example, the number of jackpot types and the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 26(B), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure gaming state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C and mode E, but the contents of these modes A, mode C and mode E are the same as those of the first embodiment. Mode E, Mode C and Mode A are advantageous game states for the player in that order.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 26(C) prescribes the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. When the lottery results of the jackpot lottery are 2R normal jackpot and 5R normal jackpot, mode A is shifted to after the jackpot game executed triggered by the jackpot is finished. When the lottery result is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode C after the jackpot game executed triggered by the jackpot is finished. When the lottery result is a 5R probability variable jackpot and a 16R probability variable jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode E after the jackpot game executed triggered by the jackpot is finished. That is, after the end of the jackpot game executed when the result of the lottery is a jackpot, in the case of the normal jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode A, and in the case of the probability variable jackpot by winning the first start ports 314L, 314R. The mode is shifted to the mode C, and in the case of winning a prize for the second starting port 315, the mode is shifted to the mode E. - 特許庁

FIG. 26D shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special game is executed by hitting left, and the distribution of the jackpot types in the first special game is 25% for 2R normal jackpots, and 2R probability variable jackpots. 75%. Therefore, after the jackpot game is over, the game is basically shifted from mode A to mode A or mode C, and the probability of shifting to mode A is 25%, and the probability of shifting to mode C is 75%.

In mode C, the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game are alternately executed by hitting left. In addition, as described above, the distribution of the jackpot type in the first special game is 25% for the 2R normal jackpot and 75% for the 2R probability variable jackpot. On the other hand, the distribution of the jackpot types in the second special game is 25% for the 5R probability variable jackpot, 50% for the 16R probability variable jackpot, and 25% for the 5R normal jackpot. Therefore, from mode C, it is possible to shift to any of mode A, mode C, and mode E after the end of the jackpot game, and the probability of shifting to mode A is 25%, and the probability of shifting to mode C is 37.5%. , the probability of transition to mode E is 37.5%.

In mode E, the second special game is executed by hitting right, and the distribution of the jackpot types in the second special game is 25% for 5R variable variable jackpot, 50% for 16R variable jackpot, and 25% for 5R normal jackpot. %. Therefore, after the jackpot game is finished, mode C is basically shifted to mode A or mode E, and the probability of shifting to mode A is 25%, and the probability of shifting to mode E is 75%.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, since the game machine 10 does not execute the mode B and the mode D, which are time-saving modes limited to the number of times, in the game state transition processing of the present embodiment shown in FIG. If the special figure fluctuation stop flag that is set to ON is set to ON (step S1900: Yes), steps S1903 and S1904 (see FIG. 23) regarding the time saving flag in the game state transition processing of the first embodiment described above ) is omitted, and if the lottery result is a loss, the game state transition processing is terminated without mode transition.

On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S1900: No), when the jackpot game end flag set to on in step S1307 of the main processing of FIG. 17 is set to on ( Step S1914: Yes), the jackpot game end flag is set to OFF (step S1915), and according to the jackpot type, the process of shifting from the jackpot game state to mode A, mode C or mode E is executed (step S2001 to S2009). Steps S2001 to S2009 will be described below.

<Steps S2001 to S2003>
When the MPU 41 turns off the jackpot game flag when the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S1914: Yes, step S1915), the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state It is determined whether or not the lottery result is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot or 5R normal jackpot) (step S2001). Whether or not the lottery result is a normal jackpot is determined by whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag or the 5R normal jackpot set to ON in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start processing in FIG. 22 is set to ON. .

When the lottery result is a normal jackpot (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts from the jackpot game state to the mode A of the special game state (step S2002), and sets the mode A flag to ON (step S2003 ), and the process proceeds to step S2009. On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a normal jackpot (step S2001: No), the process proceeds to step S2004.

<Steps S2004 to S2006>
When the lottery result is not a normal jackpot (step S2001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state is a 2R probability variable jackpot (step S2004). ). Whether or not the lottery result is the 2R probability variable jackpot is determined by whether or not the 5R probability variable jackpot flag, which is set to ON in step S1806 of the special figure variation start processing in FIG. 22, is set to ON.

MPU41, when the lottery result is a 2R probability variable jackpot (step S2004: Yes), shifts from the jackpot game state to the mode C of the special figure game state (step S2005), and sets the mode C flag to ON (step S2006), and the process proceeds to step S2009. On the other hand, if the lottery result is not the 2R probability variable jackpot (step S2004: No), the process proceeds to step S2007.

<Steps S2007 and S2008>
When the lottery result is neither a normal jackpot (step S2001: No) nor a 2R probability variable jackpot (step S2004: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the lottery result is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot. Therefore, the MPU 41 shifts from the jackpot game state to the mode E of the special game state (step S2007), sets the mode E flag to ON (step S2008), and shifts the process to step S2009.

<Step S2009>
When the MPU 41 sets the mode type flag to ON (steps S2003, S2006 and S2008), it sets the jackpot type flag to OFF (step S2009). That is, the MPU 41 sets off the jackpot type flags set to ON among the 2R normal jackpot flag, the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, the 5R normal jackpot flag, the 5R probability variable jackpot flag and the 16R probability variable jackpot flag. When the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type flag to OFF, the game state transition processing is terminated.

Thus, in this embodiment, the special game state consists of three modes of mode A, mode B and mode E, and there is no time saving mode limited to the number of times (mode B, mode D) as the time saving mode. In addition, when the lottery result is a normal jackpot, the game shifts to mode A, which is a non-time-saving mode, after the jackpot game for the jackpot ends. Therefore, in this embodiment, compared with the above-mentioned 1st Embodiment, the staying ratio of time saving mode becomes low. On the other hand, the time-saving mode is a mode in which it is possible to expect the winning of game balls to the second starting port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36, so the 5R probability variable jackpot or 16R probability variable jackpot that triggers the shift to mode E is expected. can. As a result, the rate of staying in the time saving mode is low, so that it is difficult to shift to the mode E, which is the time saving mode, and the game has a game property that makes it easy to fall to the mode A. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a variety of mode transitions and a variety of prize balls that the player can obtain.

In this embodiment, three modes of mode A, mode C and mode E are described. Three modes of mode E, or three modes of mode A, mode C and mode D may be used. Also, the special game state may be 4 modes or 6 or more modes. As an example of the special game state having 4 modes, 4 modes of mode A, mode B, mode C and mode D, 4 modes of mode A, mode B, mode C and mode E, mode A, mode B, mode There are four modes, D and E.

Also, the special figure gaming state may include modes other than mode A to mode E. For example, the special game state, in addition to mode A and mode E, the number of times of time saving is limited to a small number, for example, the number of times of time saving is about 1/40 to 1/10 of the jackpot probability. good too. The slight time reduction mode may include a difficult support slight time reduction mode in which the support of the electric support member 36 is difficult to receive and an easy support slight time reduction mode in which the support of the electric support member 36 is easily received. It shifts to the difficult support slight time reduction mode after the big win game for the big win in the mode A, and shifts to the easy support slight time reduction mode after the big win game for the big win in the difficult support slight time reduction mode. In addition, it shifts to mode A after a predetermined number of special games are consumed in the short time mode, and mode E is a big win lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second start port 315, and the lottery result is a big win. In that case, it shifts after the jackpot game for the jackpot ends. The game machine 10 with 4 modes of special game states including such a difficult support slight time saving mode and an easy support slight time saving mode can fall from mode E to mode A, for example. It is preferable to constitute ST or V-ST having an upper limit on the number of times the big winning lottery is performed based on the table.

<Third Embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, the special figure gaming state consists of 5 modes of mode A to mode E, and the case where the number of continuations of the probability variable jackpot has no upper limit has been described. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the special game state is mode A, mode C and mode E, and the low probability mode success or failure table (see FIG. 12 (A)) It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the number of jackpots from the first hit, which is a jackpot, continues up to a predetermined upper limit number. That is, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a limit machine in which the special figure gaming state is configured as three modes of mode A, mode C and mode E.

The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 28(A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot classification table, FIG. 28(B) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, FIG. 28(C) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table, Figure 28 (D) is a diagram showing an example of mode transition, FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start process executed in step S1609 of the special figure game control process of FIG. 20, FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transition process performed by step S1308 of main processing.

The jackpot classification table shown in FIG. 28A defines the jackpot classification when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Unlike the above-described first embodiment, the jackpot types of this embodiment are three types of 2R probability variable jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot and 16R probability variable jackpot, and all jackpots are probability variable jackpots. However, when the number of jackpot hits from the first win reaches the upper limit, the jackpot is treated as a normal jackpot, and after the jackpot game ends, a jackpot lottery based on the low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 12(A)). is forced to mode A in which

In addition, the jackpot in the first special game by winning the first start port 314 is distributed to either the 2R probability variable jackpot or the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the distribution ratio between the 2R probability variable jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot is 75:25. be. That is, in the jackpot in the first special game, there is no distribution of the 16R probability variable jackpot where acquisition of a large amount of game balls can be expected, and the distribution of the 2R probability variable jackpot where the expected value of the game balls to be acquired is small is large. Acquisition of a large number of game balls cannot be expected. On the other hand, the jackpot in the second special game by winning the prize to the second start port 315 is distributed to either the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot, and the distribution ratio between the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot is 50:50. be. That is, in the jackpot in the second special game, there is no sorting of the 2R probability variable jackpot, and acquisition of a large amount of game balls can be expected.

As shown in FIG. 28(B), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure gaming state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C and mode E, but the contents of these modes A, mode C and mode E are the same as those of the first embodiment. Mode E, Mode C and Mode A are advantageous game states for the player in that order.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 28(C) prescribes the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the player wins a jackpot equal to the number of jackpots set at the time of the first win, and shifts to mode A after the final jackpot game ends. Until the jackpot equal to the number of jackpots set at the time of the first win is won, the game does not fall to mode A unless the remaining number of jackpots stored in the RAM 412 is erased. In addition, except after the end of the final jackpot game, after the jackpot game for the jackpot in the first special game by winning the first start port 314 is completed, the mode is shifted to mode C, and the winning to the second start port 315 is performed. After the jackpot game for the jackpot in the second special game is completed, the mode is shifted to E.

FIG. 28D shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, the winning to the second starting port 315 can not be expected as described above, and the first special figure game is executed by winning to the first starting port 314, so from mode A, an irregular case 100% mode C except for . In addition, since the mode A is shifted to after the final jackpot game is finished, the mode is not shifted to the mode A after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot in the mode A is finished.

In mode C, the first special symbol game by winning the first starting port 314 and the second special symbol game by winning the second starting port 315 are alternately executed by hitting to the left. Therefore, except after the end of the last jackpot game, in the case of a jackpot in the first special game, it shifts to mode C after the jackpot game is finished, and in the second special game by winning to the second start port 315 In the case of a jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode E after the jackpot game ends. In addition, in mode C, since the first special game and the second special game are alternately executed, except for irregular cases, the probability of shifting to mode C is 50%, and the probability of shifting to mode E becomes 50%.

In mode E, since the second special game is executed by hitting to the right, mode E shifts to mode E after the jackpot game ends.

[Special figure fluctuation start process]
Since the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured as a limit machine, the special figure variation start processing differs from the special figure variation start processing (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above. As shown in FIG. 29, the special figure fluctuation start process of the present embodiment is the special figure fluctuation start process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above. Then, when the special figure fluctuation display flag is set to ON (step S1810), the game state transition processing is terminated. In addition, the special figure fluctuation start processing of the present embodiment is the step S1805 for distributing the jackpot type in the special figure fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above, and the fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S1807). Between, instead of the lottery result flag setting process (step S1807), if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot type flag and the special type that is the target of the jackpot lottery are set. It differs in that the flag is set (steps S2101 and S2102) and the step of monitoring the probability variable jackpot frequency (steps S2103 to S2107) is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, since mode B and mode D which is a time saving mode limited to the number of times as a special figure gaming state are not included, in the special figure fluctuation start process of this embodiment, the special figure of the above-mentioned first embodiment Steps S2101 to S2107 in the fluctuation start process will be described below.

<Step S2101>
When the MPU 41 sorts the jackpot types (step S1805), it sets a jackpot type flag (step S2101). Specifically, the MPU 41 sets any one of the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, the 5R probability variable jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variable jackpot flag to ON according to the jackpot type distributed in step S1805. In addition, in this step S2101, unlike the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. not.

<Step S2102>
MPU41 sets the special figure classification flag which specifies the special figure classification which is the object of big hit pulling out selection (step S2102). Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the first special jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot jackpot lottery result is a jackpot in the first special game, and the jackpot jackpot lottery result in the second special game. is a jackpot, the second special figure jackpot flag is set to ON.

<Steps S2103 to S2107>
In step S2103, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the remaining set number M is 0 with respect to the jackpot upper limit number (initial set number Mmax) set in the next step S2104. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current big win is the first win. When the remaining set number M is 0 (step S2103: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the initial set number Mmax as the remaining set number M (step S2104), and shifts the process to step S1807. The initial number of sets Mmax is a predetermined number of sets, for example, in the range of 3 to 10 times.

On the other hand, when the remaining set number M is not 0 (step S2103: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the remaining set number M (step S2105), and determines whether the remaining set number M after subtraction is 0. (step S2106). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current jackpot is the final jackpot among the initially set jackpots. The MPU 41 sets the jackpot limit flag to ON when the remaining set number M after subtraction is 0 (step S2106: Yes), that is, when this jackpot is the final jackpot of the initially set jackpots. (Step S2107), the process proceeds to step S1807. The jackpot limit flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot has been won a number of times corresponding to the initial set number Mmax set in step S2104, that is, this jackpot is the final jackpot among the jackpots initially set. This jackpot limit flag is referred to in order to determine whether or not to shift to mode A at step S2202 in the game state shift processing of FIG. Also, when the remaining set number M after subtraction is not 0 (step S2106: No), that is, when the current jackpot is not the final jackpot in the initially set jackpot, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot limit flag to ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S1807.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, since mode B and mode D, which are time-saving modes limited to the number of special game states, are not included, in the game state transition processing of the present embodiment shown in FIG. In the game state transition process (see FIG. 23) of the first embodiment, the step relating to the time saving mode is omitted, and the step of transitioning to mode B and mode D is omitted. In addition, in the game state transition processing of the present embodiment, when it is the final jackpot in the initially set jackpot, it shifts to mode A, and a special figure type that performs a jackpot lottery that triggers the transition to the jackpot game state. It is different from the above-described first embodiment in that it shifts to mode C or mode E according to (steps S2201 to S2212). Steps S2201 to S2212 will be described below.

<Step S2201>
MPU41, when the jackpot game end flag is turned off when the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S1914: Yes, step S1915), it is set to ON in step S2101 of the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. The jackpot type flag is set to OFF (step S2001). That is, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type flag set to ON among the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, the 5R probability variable jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variable jackpot flag to OFF at the end of the jackpot game.

<Steps S2202 to S2205>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot limit flag, which is set to ON in step S2105 of the special figure fluctuation start processing in FIG. 29, is set to ON (step S2202). That is, the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game is the final jackpot with respect to the initial set number Mmax set in step S2104 of the special figure fluctuation start processing in FIG. It is determined whether or not the jackpot limit flag for shifting to is set to ON. When the jackpot limit flag is set to ON (step S2202: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot limit flag to OFF (step S2203), shifts from the jackpot game state to mode A (step S2204), and mode The A flag is set to ON (step S2205), and the game state transition processing ends.

<Steps S2206 to S2009>
MPU41, the jackpot limit flag is set to OFF (step S2202: No), the first special figure jackpot flag set to ON in step S2102 in the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. It is determined whether or not there is (step S2206). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game is for the first special figure game.

MPU41, when the first special figure jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2206: Yes), sets the first special figure jackpot flag to OFF (step S2207), mode C of the special figure gaming state (step S2208), the mode C flag is set to ON (step S2209), and the game state transition processing ends. On the other hand, when the first special figure jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S2206: No), the process proceeds to step S2010.

<Steps S2210 to S2212>
When the first special figure jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S2206: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the second special figure jackpot flag is set to ON, so the second special figure jackpot flag is turned off. Along with setting (step S2210), to shift to mode E of the special game state (step S2211), to set the mode E flag to ON (step S2212), to end the game state transition processing.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has three modes of mode A, mode C, and mode E that have different advantages for the player in the special game state, and the number of jackpots from the first hit is set in advance. Continue up to the specified upper limit. And, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment differs in the mode transition destination depending on whether the jackpot is in the first special game or the jackpot in the second special game. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in mode E in which a large number of game balls can be expected to be acquired with the remaining number of sets after the first hit (initial number of sets Mmax-1), how many sets of jackpots are left. It is possible to provide the game machine 10 having a game property such as whether to shift to the mode E or how many are allocated to the 16R jackpot game after shifting to the mode E. - 特許庁

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot is achieved in the first special game in mode A, 100% shift to mode C after the jackpot game ends, but in the case of a jackpot in the first special game in mode A It is also possible to shift to mode C at a certain rate, for example, 50%, and loop mode A at the remaining rate. By doing so, it is possible to provide a game feature in which mode A, which is disadvantageous for the player, may loop, and as a result, when shifting to mode C, a large number of sets can be obtained while leaving a large number of jackpots. Not only the game characteristics of whether to shift to mode E in which the acquisition of game balls can be expected, but also the game characteristics of how to shift to mode C in which the transition to mode E can be expected while leaving a large number of sets of jackpots. It is possible to provide a gaming machine 10 having

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the special symbol game is executed in any of the five game states of mode A to mode E has been described. On the other hand, in this embodiment, in addition to mode A, mode C' and mode E', which are high-probability modes with a high probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot and a time-saving mode limited to the number of times, are provided as special game states. 3 modes including In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is an ST machine that has a probability variable jackpot for all jackpot types and shifts to a limited time mode (mode C' or mode E') after the jackpot game ends.

The game machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33, focusing on differences from the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 31(A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot classification table, FIG. 31(B) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, FIG. 31(C) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table, FIG. 31D is a diagram showing an example of mode transition, and FIGS. 32 and 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the game state transition processing procedure executed in step S1308 of the main processing of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 31 (A) as a jackpot type distribution table, the jackpot in the first special game due to the winning to the first starting port 314 is distributed to the 2R probability variable jackpot, and the winning to the second starting port 315 The jackpot in the second special game is distributed to the 16R probability variable jackpot. That is, in this embodiment, all jackpots are probability variation jackpots, and the jackpot types are distributed according to the special figure types. Of course, the number of types of jackpots and the number of rounds in the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game can be changed as appropriate for the allocation of jackpot types. It is also conceivable that it is distributed by the ratio of

As shown in FIG. 31(B), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure gaming state. This jackpot classification table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C' and mode E'. The content of mode A is the same as in the first embodiment described above. Mode C' and mode E' are the same as mode C and mode E of the first embodiment described above, except that they are limited time-saving modes. That is, the mode C' and the mode E' are high-probability modes with a high probability that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, and time-saving modes with a limited number of times. Here, the upper limit of the number of times of time saving in mode C' and mode E' is set to the same extent as the upper limit of the number of times of time saving in mode B and mode D in the above-described first embodiment, for example, 50 times. Mode E', mode C' and mode A are advantageous game states for the player in that order.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 31(C) prescribes the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In mode C' and mode E', when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without shifting to the jackpot game state, the mode shifts to mode A. When the lottery result is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode C' after the jackpot game executed triggered by the jackpot is finished. When the lottery result is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the mode is shifted to E' after the jackpot game executed triggered by the jackpot is finished. That is, after the end of the time-saving mode limited to the number of times, it falls from mode C 'or mode E 'to mode A, and in the case of a 2R probability variable jackpot in the winning of the first start ports 314L and 314R, it is shifted to mode C ', and the second In the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot in the prize winning for the starting port 315, the mode is shifted to E'.

FIG. 31D shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special game is executed by hitting to the left, and the distribution of the jackpot types in the first special game is 100% for the 2R probability variable jackpot. Therefore, mode A shifts to mode C' after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as a trigger is finished.

In mode C', the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game are alternately executed by hitting left. Also, as described above, in the first special game, 100% is distributed to the 2R probability variable jackpot, and in the second special game, 100% is distributed to the 16R probability variable jackpot. Therefore, from mode C', when the lottery result is a big win before the time saving mode ends, the mode is shifted to either mode C' or mode E' after the big win game executed with the big win as a trigger. be. In addition, as described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without shifting to the jackpot game state in mode C', the mode is shifted from mode C' to mode A.

In mode E', the second special game is executed by hitting to the right, and the jackpot type distribution in the second special game is 100% for the 16R probability variable jackpot, so from mode E', the jackpot After the end of the big win game that is executed as a trigger, the mode is shifted to E'. In addition, as described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without shifting to the jackpot game state in mode E', the mode shifts from mode E' to mode A.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, in this embodiment, since it differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the jackpot type is two of the 2R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot, in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start processing in FIG. Any one of the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag and the loss flag is set as the lottery result flag according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Further, in this embodiment, since the special figure gaming state is three modes of mode A, mode C' and mode E', in the game state transition processing of this embodiment shown in FIGS. The processing for mode transition is different from the game state transition processing (see FIGS. 23 and 24) of the embodiment (steps S2301 to S2308). Steps S2301 to S2308 will be described below.

<Step S2301>
In step S2301 shown in FIG. 32, MPU41, when the time-saving mode is completed and transitions from mode C' or mode E' to mode A (steps S1908 to S1912), the mode C' flag or mode Set the E' flag to off.

<Steps S2302 to S2305>
In step S2302 shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 41, when the jackpot game end flag set to ON in the jackpot game control process in step S1307 of the main process of FIG. When the flag is set to OFF (step S1914: Yes, steps S1915 and S1917), it is determined whether or not the 2R probability variable jackpot flag set in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 22 is set to ON. . That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result of the big winning lottery that triggered the transition to the big winning gaming state is the 2R probability variable big winning.

MPU41, when the 2R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2302: Yes), that is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the shift to the jackpot game state is a 2R probability variable jackpot, The game state is shifted to mode C' (step S2303), and the mode C' flag is set to ON (step S2304). Next, the MPU 41 sets the 2R probability variable jackpot flag to OFF (step S2305), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S2306 to S2308>
MPU41, when the 2R probability variable jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S2302: No), that is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 16R probability variable jackpot, The game state is shifted to mode E' (step S2306), and the mode E' flag is set to ON (step S2307). Next, the MPU 41 sets the 16R probability variable jackpot flag to OFF (step S2308), and terminates the game state transition process.

Thus, in this embodiment, it is necessary to go through mode C' in order to shift to mode E', which is most advantageous to the player. That is, in order to shift to mode E', after shifting to mode C' at the first hit, it is necessary to make a big hit in the second special game before finishing the time saving mode. Since the first hit in mode A and the jackpot in the first special game in mode C' are 2R probability variable jackpots, the number of game balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game is small, and the mode A and mode C' are stayed. In the meantime, we cannot expect an increase in the number of game balls. On the other hand, in mode E' at the time of hitting to the right, since a 100% 16R probability variable jackpot is achieved, acquisition of a large amount of game balls can be expected in the jackpot game. Therefore, in this embodiment, after shifting to mode C' after the first hit, how quickly to get a big hit in the second special game and shift to mode E' where a large amount of game balls can be expected. It is possible to provide a game machine which has game characteristics and furthermore, has game characteristics such as how many jackpots and a large amount of game balls can be obtained in the time-saving mode after shifting to mode E'.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the special symbol game is executed in any of the five game states of mode A to mode E has been described. On the other hand, in this embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, the special figure gaming state is three modes of mode A, mode C' and mode E' as in the above-described fourth embodiment. In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment shifts to a time-saving mode with a limited number of times after the end of the variable probability jackpot game on the condition that the game ball wins the V winning opening of the special variable winning device in a specific round of the probability variable jackpot game. It is a V-ST machine.

Hereinafter, the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41, focusing on differences from the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 34 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, and FIGS. 35(B) and 35(D) are plan views showing the essential parts of the special variable winning device 82, and FIG. 36(A) is a jackpot classification table. Fig. 36B shows an example of a mode data table; Fig. 36C shows an example of a mode transition table; Fig. 36D shows an example of mode transition; 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control processing executed in step S1307 of the main processing of FIG. A flow chart showing an example, FIGS. 40 and 41 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in step S1308 of the main process of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 34, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment includes a special variable winning device 82 provided on the gaming board 31 . The special variable winning device 82 is provided below the variable winning opening 316b.
As shown in FIGS. 35(A) to 35(D), the special variable winning device 82 includes an inlet 821 for introducing game balls 99 into the special variable winning device 82, and a closing opening for closing the inlet 821. A movable tongue portion 822 is provided to move back and forth with respect to the game board 31 by driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back surface of the game board 31 between a position and an open position for opening the introduction port 821 . As shown in FIGS. 35(A) and 35(B), when the inlet 821 is closed by the movable tongue 822 due to the movable tongue 822 being in the standby position, the game ball 99 is a special variable winning device. It is not introduced inside 82. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 35(C) and 35(D), when the inlet 821 is opened by the movable tongue 822 being in the open position, the game ball 99 is placed inside the special variable winning device 82. can be introduced into Note that the introduction port 821 is closed by the movable tongue portion 822 when the special variable prize winning port 39 is not operated. On the other hand, the introduction port 821 is opened by activating the movable tongue portion 822 in the later-described V winning round in the jackpot game.

As shown in FIGS. 35(C) and 35(E), inside the special variable winning device 82, a movable claw portion 823, a V winning opening 824 and a normal winning opening 825 are provided. The V winning port 824 and the normal winning port 825 are respectively provided with ball entry sensors (not shown), and these ball entry sensors detect that a game ball has entered the V winning port 824 or the normal winning port 825. be done. The movable claw portion 823 is rotated by a drive means such as a solenoid (not shown) between a left inclined position leading the game ball 99 to the V winning opening 824 and a right inclined position leading the game ball 99 to the normal winning opening 825. be done. In the state where the special variable winning opening 39 is not operated, the movable claw portion 823 is in a left inclined state and waits in a state of guiding the game ball 99 to the V winning opening 824 . Then, the movable claw portion 823 shifts from the left tilted state to the right tilted state when it is detected that the game ball 99 has won the V winning opening 824 in the V winning round described later in which the special variable winning device 82 is operated. rotated. Further, when the V winning round for operating the special variable winning device 82 is completed, the movable claw portion 823 returns to the left inclined state and waits in a state of guiding the game ball 99 to the V winning opening 824 .

As shown in FIG. 36(A) as a jackpot type distribution table, jackpots in the first special game by winning the first starting port 314 are distributed to 4R normal jackpots or 5R variable jackpots. In the 4R normal jackpot game, the 1st to 4th round games are executed as a game in which game balls are awarded to the variable winning opening 316b, and the V winning round game in which the special variable winning device 82 wins game balls is not executed. . Therefore, in the 4R normal jackpot game, the game ball cannot be entered into the V winning opening 824, and the game does not shift to the time saving mode. On the other hand, in the 5R probability variable jackpot game, for example, the 1st to 4th rounds are executed as a game in which a game ball is awarded to the variable winning opening 316b (see FIG. 4), and the 5th round game is a V prize. It is executed as a round game. Therefore, in the 5R probability variable jackpot game, the player can enter the game ball 99 in the V winning port 824 of the special variable prize winning device 82 in the fifth round game, and shift to the time saving mode after the jackpot game ends. can. Further, by executing the fifth round game as a V winning round game, it is determined whether or not the fifth round game, which is the V winning round game, is executed after the fourth round game is completed. It is possible to know whether it is a certain variable jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by executing a promotion effect (including a failure effect) after the 4-round game is finished.

On the other hand, the jackpot in the second special game by winning the second starting port 315 is distributed to the 10R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot. In the 10R probability variable jackpot game and the 16R probability variable jackpot game, a specific round game is the V winning round game. There may be at least one specific round game, and there may be two or more. Also, when the jackpot types in mode E' are 10R probability variable jackpot and 16R probability variable jackpot, for example, 10 rounds are a specific round game. By doing so, it is possible to know whether or not there are 11 rounds after executing the V winning round game, that is, whether the jackpot type is the 10R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot after the V winning round game is completed. can be done. Therefore, after the 10-round game is executed or ended, the interest in the game can be enhanced by, for example, executing promotion effect from 10R probability variable jackpot to 16R probability variable jackpot. It should be noted that, regarding the distribution of the jackpot types, the number of jackpot types and the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 36(B), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure gaming state. This jackpot classification table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C' and mode E'. The content of mode A is the same as in the first embodiment described above. In addition, in mode A, since the first special game is executed by hitting left, the probability variation expectation is 50% when the lottery result is a big hit in mode A. Mode C' and mode E' are the same as mode C and mode E of the first embodiment described above, and are the same as the fourth embodiment described above, except that they are time-saving modes for a limited number of times. . In addition, in mode C', since the game balls are alternately distributed to the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 by hitting left, the probability variation expectation when the lottery result becomes a big hit in mode C' 75%. In mode E', since the second special game is executed by hitting to the right, the probability variation expectation is 100% when the lottery result is a big hit in mode E'. As described above, in the present embodiment, there are three modes with different probability variation expectations, and mode E', mode C' and mode A are advantageous game states for the player in that order.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 36(C) defines the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In mode C' and mode E', when the upper limit number of special game is executed without shifting to the jackpot game state, when the jackpot game ends when the lottery result is a 4R probability variable jackpot, and when the lottery result is a probability variable jackpot. In this case, when the game ball 99 does not enter the V winning port 824 and the jackpot game ends, the mode is shifted to A. When the lottery result is a 5R probability variable jackpot, the mode shifts to mode C' after the jackpot game ends on condition that the game ball 99 wins the V prize winning opening 824 in the V prize winning round game of the jackpot game. When the lottery result is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, the game shifts to mode E' after the jackpot game is completed on the condition that the game ball 99 wins the V winning prize round game of the jackpot game.

FIG. 36D shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special game is executed by hitting left, and the distribution of the jackpot types in the first special game is 50% for 4R normal jackpots and 5R probability variable jackpots. 50%. Therefore, from the mode A, after the jackpot game ends, the mode shifts to the mode A at a rate of 50% and to the mode C' at a rate of 50%.

In mode C', the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game are alternately executed by hitting left. Also, as described above, in the first special game, it is distributed at a rate of 50% to the 4R normal jackpot and 50% to the 5R variable jackpot, and in the second special game, 25% to the 10R variable jackpot and 75% to the 16R variable jackpot. distributed at a ratio of Therefore, from the mode C', when the lottery result is a big win before the time saving mode ends, the mode shifts to any one of the mode A, the mode C' and the mode E' after the big win game ends. In addition, as described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without shifting to the jackpot gaming state in mode C', the mode shifts from mode C' to mode A.

In mode E ', the second special game is executed by hitting to the right, and the distribution of the jackpot type in the second special game is 25% for the 10R probability variation jackpot and 75% for the 16R probability variation jackpot, so the mode From E', on the condition that the game ball 99 wins the V prize opening 824 in the V winning round game of the jackpot game, the mode shifts to mode E' after the jackpot game ends. In addition, as described above, when the upper limit number of special symbols games are executed without shifting to the jackpot game state in mode E', and the game ball 99 wins the V prize opening 824 in the V prize round game of the jackpot game. When the jackpot game is finished without any player, the mode is shifted from the mode E' to the mode A.例文帳に追加

[Jackpot game control process]
Here, in this embodiment, the jackpot types are 4R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 10R probability variable jackpot and 16R probability variable jackpot, and are different from the above-described first embodiment, so the special figure fluctuation of FIG. In the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the start process, 4R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag, 10R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R probability variable jackpot flag and out flag as lottery result flags according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. is set. Then, in the jackpot game control process shown in FIG. 37, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the game ball can enter the variable winning port 316b or the special variable winning device 82 according to the jackpot type. A control for performing a jackpot game in which a round game is performed a plurality of times is executed.

<Step S2401>
In step S2401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game start flag, which is set to ON in step S2600 of the game state transition process in FIG. to decide. When the MPU 41 determines that it is time to start a jackpot game (step S2401: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2402, and when it is determined that it is not time to start a jackpot game (step S2401: No), the process is executed. The process moves to step S2407.

<Steps S2402 to S2404>
When it is time to start the jackpot game (step S2401: Yes), the MPU 41 specifies the jackpot type (step S2402), and determines whether the jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot (step S2403). The jackpot type is the jackpot type flag (4R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag, 10R probability variable jackpot flag, and 16R probability variable jackpot set to ON in the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. 22 flag) is set to ON.

Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot (step S2403: Yes), according to the number of rounds of the probability variable jackpot, sets the V winning round for operating the special variable winning device 82 (step S2404 ), and the process proceeds to step S2405. For example, the MPU 41 sets 5 rounds as the V winning rounds in the case of the 5R high probability variable jackpot, and sets 10 rounds as the V winning rounds in the case of the 10R high probability variable jackpot and the 16R high probability variable jackpot. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot type is not the probability variable jackpot (step S2403: No), the process proceeds to step S2405 without setting the V prize round for operating the special variable prize winning device .

<Steps S2405 and S2406>
In step S2405, MPU41 is based on the jackpot type flag (4R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag, 10R probability variable jackpot flag and 16R probability variable jackpot flag) set to ON in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. Then, the number of round games R to be executed in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game is set. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the round game number R to "4" when the 4R normal jackpot flag is on, sets the round game number R to "5" when the 5R probability variable jackpot flag is on, and sets the 10R probability variable The number of round games R is set to "10" when the jackpot flag is on, and the number of round games R is set to "16" when the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is on, and is stored in the RAM 412.例文帳に追加As a result, the MPU 41 executes a round game of the round game number R corresponding to the jackpot type in the opening/closing execution mode control process of step S2416 described later. Then, MPU41 sets an opening flag to ON (step S2406), and complete|finishes the said jackpot game control processing. The opening flag is referred to in order to determine whether or not to start measuring the opening time in step S2407, which will be described later.

<Step S2407>
In step S2407, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening flag, which is set to ON in step S2406, is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether opening has started. When the opening flag is set to ON (step S2407: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2408, and when the opening flag is set to OFF (step S2407: No), the process proceeds to step S2415. Transition.

<Step S2408>
When the opening flag is set to ON (step S2407: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening time is being measured (step S2408). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2410 when the opening time is being measured (step S2408: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2409 when the opening time is not being measured (step S2408: No).

<Step S2409>
In step S2409, the MPU 41 starts timing the execution time of the opening, and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening time at which timing is started in step S2409 is referred to by the MPU 41 when it is determined in step S2410 to be described later whether or not to end the opening and shift to the opening/closing execution mode.

<Step S2410>
In step S2410, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening time for which clocking is started in step S2409 has reached a predetermined time necessary for execution of the opening. When the opening time has reached the predetermined time (step S2410: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2411, and when the opening time has not reached the predetermined time (step S2410: No), the jackpot game control process. exit.

<Steps S2411 to S2414>
When the opening time has reached the predetermined time (step S2410: Yes), the MPU 41 finishes measuring the opening time (step S2411) and sets the opening flag to off (step S2412). Next, the MPU 41 sets the open/close execution mode flag to ON (step S2413), and sets the 1 round start flag to ON (step S2214). The opening/closing execution mode flag is referred to when determining whether or not to shift to the opening/closing execution mode process in step S2415, which will be described later. Further, the first round start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the first round of the opening/closing execution mode in step S2501 of the opening/closing execution mode processing in FIG. 38, which will be described later.

<Step S2415>
In step S2415, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag, which is set to ON in step S2413, is set to ON. When the opening/closing execution mode flag is set to ON (step S2415: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2416, and when the opening/closing execution mode flag is set to OFF (step S2415: No), the process proceeds to step S2416. to step S2417.

<Step S2416>
In step S2416, the MPU 41 executes opening/closing execution mode control processing. In the opening/closing execution mode control process, the MPU 41 executes a round game for operating the variable winning device 316 or the special variable winning device 82 a plurality of times according to the jackpot type. The details of the opening/closing execution mode control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. FIG.

<Step S2417>
In step S2417, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending flag, which is set to ON in step S2524 in the opening/closing execution mode control process of FIG. 39 to be described later, is set to ON. MPU41, when the ending flag is set to ON (step S2417: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2418, when the ending flag is set to OFF (step S2417: No), the jackpot game control process exit.

<Step S2418>
When the ending flag is set to ON (step S2417: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending time is being measured (step S2418). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2420 when the ending time is being measured (step S2418: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2419 when the ending time is not being measured (step S2418: No).

<Step S2419>
In step S2419, the MPU 41 starts counting the ending time after starting the ending, and ends the jackpot game control process. The ending time clocked in step S2419 is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether or not the ending (jackpot game) is to be ended in step S2420 described later.

<Step S2420>
In step S2420, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending time for which timing is started in step S2419 has reached a predetermined time necessary for execution of the ending. When the ending time has reached the predetermined time (step S2420: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2421, and when the ending time has not reached the predetermined time (step S2420: No), the jackpot game control process. exit.

<Steps S2421 to S2423>
When the ending time has reached the predetermined time (step S2420: Yes), the MPU 41 turns off the ending flag that is set to on at step S2524 in the opening/closing execution mode control process of FIG. 39 (step S2421). ). Furthermore, the MPU 41 finishes timing the ending time (step S2422), sets the jackpot game end flag to ON (step S2423), and finishes the jackpot game control process. Thereby, the MPU 41 can end the ending, that is, the jackpot game. In addition, the jackpot game end flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1914 in the game state transition process of FIG. , the game state is shifted from the jackpot game state to any one of mode A, mode C' and mode E'.

[Opening/closing execution mode control process]
In the open/close execution mode control process shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the round game for operating the variable winning device 316 or the special variable winning device 82 is executed a plurality of times according to the jackpot type as described above.

<Steps S2501 and S2502>
In step S2501, MPU41 judges whether the 1 round start flag set to ON by step S2414 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37 is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether to start the opening/closing execution mode (whether to start the first round in the round game). When the 1st round start flag is set to ON (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 1st round start flag to OFF (step S2502), and then shifts the process to step S2506. On the other hand, when the 1st round start flag is set to OFF (step S2501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2503.

<Step S2503>
In step S2503, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning opening open flag, which is set to ON in step S2510 of the opening/closing execution mode control process, is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning opening 316b of the variable winning device 316 is open. If the variable winning opening open flag is set to ON (step S2503: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2511 in FIG. : No), the process moves to step S2504.

<Step S2504>
In step S2504, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special variable winning device operation flag, which is set to ON in step S2508 of the opening/closing execution mode control process, is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special variable winning device 82 is in operation. If the special variable winning device operation flag is set to ON (step S2504: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2514 in FIG. S2504: No), the process proceeds to step S2505.

<Step S2505>
When the variable winning opening opening flag is set to OFF (step S2503: No) and the special variable winning device operation flag is set to OFF (step S2504: No), the MPU 41 starts timing in step S2522 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the interval time to be set has exceeded a predetermined time (step S2505). Here, the interval time is the pause time from the end of the round game to the start of the next round game. That is, in this step S2505, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to end the interval and start the round game. If the MPU 41 determines that the interval time has exceeded the predetermined time (step S2505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2506, and if it determines that the interval time has not exceeded the predetermined time (step S2505: No), the interval , the open/close execution mode control process is ended.

<Steps S2506 to S2508>
When the interval time exceeds the predetermined time (step S2505: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the round game to be started is the V winning round set in step S2404 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37 ( step S2506). When the MPU 41 determines that it is the V winning round (step S2506: Yes), it operates the special variable winning device 82 (step S2507). Specifically, the MPU 41 moves the movable tongue portion 822 of the special variable winning device 82 from the standby position for closing the inlet 821 to the open position for opening the inlet 821 . Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the special variable winning device operation flag to ON (step S2508), and terminates the opening/closing execution mode control process. It should be noted that the special variable winning device operation flag is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether or not the special variable winning device 82 is operating in step S2504 described above.

<Steps S2509 and S2510>
If the round game scheduled to start is not the V winning round (step S2506: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the round game scheduled to start is a round game that opens the variable winning opening 316b. 316c is operated to open the variable winning opening 316b (step S2509). Further, the MPU 41 sets the variable winning opening open flag to ON (step S2510), and terminates the opening/closing execution mode control process. The variable winning opening open flag is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether or not the variable winning device 316 is operating (whether or not the variable winning opening 316b is open) in step S2503 described above.

<Step S2511>
When the variable winning opening open flag is set to ON (step S2503: Yes), in step S2511 of FIG. 39, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the conditions for closing the variable winning opening 316b are established. . Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the variable winning opening 316b was opened, or whether the number of game balls winning the variable winning opening 316b has exceeded a predetermined number (for example, 9). determine whether or not When the conditions for closing the variable winning opening 316b are established (step S2511: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2512, and when the conditions for closing the variable winning opening 316b are not established. (Step S2511: No), the opening/closing execution mode control process is terminated in order to maintain the open state of the variable winning opening 316b.

<Steps S2512 and S2513>
When the condition for closing the variable winning opening 316b is satisfied (step S2511: Yes), the MPU 41 closes the variable winning opening 316b by restoring the opening/closing door 316c (step S2512), and furthermore, closes the variable winning opening. The open flag is set to off (step S2513).

<Steps S2514 to S2516>
If the special variable winning device operation flag is set to ON (step S2504 in FIG. 38: Yes), in step S2514, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has won the V winning port 824 of the special variable winning device 82. to judge. Whether or not a game ball has entered the V winning opening 824 is determined based on the detection result of a ball entering sensor (not shown) provided in the V winning opening 824 . In the special variable winning device 82, since the variable claw portion 393 is tilted to the left at the start of operation, the game ball first introduced into the special variable winning device 82 is the variable claw portion 393 tilted to the left. It is guided to the V winning opening 824 by. When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the V winning opening 824 (step S2514: Yes), it sets the V winning flag to ON (step S2515), and tilts the variable claw portion 393 of the special variable winning device 82 to the left. state to the right tilt state (step S2516). That is, when the winning of the game ball to the V winning opening 824 is confirmed, the MPU 41 guides the game ball introduced into the special variable winning device 82 to the normal winning opening 825 by the right-inclined variable claw portion 393. .

<Step S2517>
When the game ball has not won the V winning opening 824 (step S2514: No), or when the game ball has won the V winning opening 824, the V winning flag is set to ON and the movable claw part 823 is tilted to the right. When the state is activated (step S2514: Yes and steps S2515 and S2516), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the conditions for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82 are satisfied (step S2517). Specifically, the MPU 41 waits for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the operation of the special variable winning device 82 is started (after the introduction port 821 is opened by the operation of the movable tongue 822 being started). It is determined whether or not the number of game balls introduced into the special variable prize winning device 82 (the total number of game balls winning in the V prize opening 824 and the normal prize winning opening 825) has exceeded a predetermined number (for example, 9). . When the condition for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82 is established (step S2517: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2518, and determines the condition for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82. is not established (step S2517: No), the opening/closing execution mode control process is terminated in order to continue the operation of the special variable winning device 82.

<Steps S2518 to S2520>
When the condition for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82 is satisfied (step S2517: Yes), the MPU 41 stops the operation of the special variable winning device 82 (step S2518). Specifically, the MPU 41 closes the introduction port 821 by returning the movable tongue portion 822, returns the movable claw portion 823 to the left inclined state, and when the next special variable winning device 82 starts operating, the game A ball is made to be guided to the V prize opening 824. - 特許庁Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the special variable winning device operation flag to OFF (step S2519), and shifts the process to step S2520.

<Steps S2520 and S2521>
When the variable winning opening open flag is set to OFF (step S2513), or when the special variable winning device operation flag is set to OFF (step S2519), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the round game number R stored in the RAM 412. After that (step S2520), it is determined whether or not the number R of round games after subtraction is "0" (step S2521). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the previously finished round game is the final round game in the opening/closing execution mode. When the number R of round games after subtraction is "0" (step S2521: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2523, and when the number R of round games after subtraction is not "0" (step S2521: No ), and the process proceeds to step S2522.

<Step S2522>
When the round game number R after the subtraction is not "0" (step S2521: No), the MPU 41 starts measuring the interval time until the next round game is executed (step S2522), and performs the opening/closing execution mode control process. exit. The interval time at which timing is started in step S2522 is referred to by MPU 41 in step S2505 of FIG.

<Steps S2523 and S2524>
When the number R of round games after the subtraction is "0" (step S2521: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that the round game ended earlier is the final round game in the opening/closing execution mode. To end the mode, the open/close execution mode flag is set to OFF (step S2523), the ending flag is set to ON (step S2524), and the opening/closing execution mode control processing ends. This ending flag is referenced by the MPU 41 in step S2417 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37 in order to determine whether to start the ending.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, in this embodiment, since the jackpot type is two of 2R probability variation jackpot and 16R probability variation jackpot, in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start processing in FIG. Any one of the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, and the out flag is set as the result flag. In addition, in this embodiment, the flowchart regarding the procedure of special figure fluctuation|variation start processing is abbreviate|omitted. Also, in the game state transition process of the present embodiment, after the big win game state flag is set to ON in step S1906, the big win game start flag is set to ON (step S2600 in FIG. 40). The jackpot game start flag indicates that a jackpot game is started, and is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S2401 of the jackpot game control process shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the special figure gaming state is mode A, mode C 'and mode E 'three modes, in the game state transition processing of this embodiment shown in FIGS. The processing for mode transition is different from the game state transition processing (see FIGS. 23 and 24) of the embodiment (steps S2601 to S2610). Steps S2601 to S2610 will be described below.

<Step S2601>
In step S2601 shown in FIG. 40, MPU41, when the time-saving mode is completed and transitions from mode C' or mode E' to mode A (steps S1908 to S1912), the mode C' flag or mode Set the E' flag to off.

<Steps S2602 to S2604>
In step S2602 shown in FIG. 41, the MPU 41, when ending the jackpot game (step S1914: Yes and steps S1915 and S1917), the V winning flag set to ON in step S2515 of the opening/closing execution mode control process of FIG. is set to ON (step S2602). If the V winning flag is not set to ON (step S2602: No), the MPU 41 shifts to mode A of the special figure gaming state (step S2603), and further sets the mode A flag to ON (step S2604 ), and the process proceeds to step S2610. That is, in the case of the 4R normal jackpot, or when there is no winning of the game ball to the V winning opening 824 in the V winning round in the probability variable jackpot game, the MPU 41 is neither the time saving mode nor the high probability mode after the jackpot game is finished. move to

<Steps S2605 to S2607>
MPU41, when the V winning flag is on (step S2602: Yes), the 5R probability variable jackpot flag set to on by the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 22 is set to on It is determined whether or not it is set (step S2605). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result of the big winning lottery that triggered the shift to the big winning gaming state is the 5R probability variable big winning. When the 5R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2605: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts to mode C' of the special figure gaming state (step S2606), and further sets the mode C' flag to ON. (Step S2607), the process proceeds to step S2610. That is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot and there is a game ball winning to the V prize opening 824 in the V winning round of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 switches to the time-saving mode and high probability after the jackpot game ends. The mode is shifted to mode C'.

<Steps S2608 and S2609>
When the V winning flag is on and the 5R probability variation big hit flag is off (step S2602: Yes and step S2605: No), the MPU 41 turns on in the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. Since it can be determined that one of the 10R probability variable jackpot flag and 16R probability variable jackpot flag set to is set to ON, it is made to shift from the jackpot game state to the mode E 'of the special figure game state (step S2608), Furthermore, the mode E' flag is set to ON (step S2609), and the process proceeds to step S2610. That is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, and there is a winning of a game ball to the V winning opening 824 in the V winning round of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 shortens the time after the end of the jackpot game. mode and high-probability mode, mode E'.

<Step S2610>
The MPU 41 is a jackpot type flag that is set to ON in the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. The flag is set to OFF (step S2610), and the game state transition processing ends.

Thus, in this embodiment, in order to shift to the most advantageous mode E 'for the player, after shifting to the mode C 'distributed with a probability of 50% in the first hit, the time saving mode in the mode C ' It is necessary to obtain a big win in the second special pattern game distributed by the distribution device 35 with a probability of 50% before the game ends. That is, in this embodiment, except when the mode falls due to the end of the time saving mode, the probability of the probability variable jackpot is 50% in mode A, 75% in mode C', and 100% in mode E'. It is possible to provide a game machine having a probability variable ratio.

In the present embodiment, the special variable winning device 82 having the V winning opening 824 is provided separately from the variable winning device 316, but the V winning opening 824 that can be opened and closed is provided in the variable winning device 316, The V winning opening 824 may be opened in the V winning round of the game.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the special symbol game is executed in any of the five game states of mode A to mode E has been explained. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the special figure gaming state is three modes of mode A, mode C' and mode E' as in the above-described second embodiment. In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a 1 type 2 type mixing machine that performs a 1 type game that is a special game by the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 and a 2 type game by the feather accessory device is.

Hereinafter, the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 50, focusing on differences from the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 42 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, and FIGS. 43 and 44 are cross-sectional views showing main parts of the feather accessory device 83 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. Fig. 45(A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot correctness table, Fig. 45(B) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table at the time of a 1st kind jackpot, Fig. 45(C) is a diagram at the time of a 2nd kind jackpot A diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table, FIG. 45(D) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, FIG. 45(E) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table, FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the feather accessory device control process executed in the main process of FIG. 46, and FIG. 48 is a special figure game control process of FIG. 49 and 50 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 46. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 42 , the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment includes a feather accessory device 83 provided on the gaming board 31 . The feather accessory device 83 is provided above the variable winning device 316 and on the right side of the pattern display section 341 . As shown in FIG. 43, the feather accessory device 83 has an introduction port 831 for introducing the game ball 99 into the interior of the feather accessory device 83, and a closed position (solid line position in FIG. 43) for closing the introduction port 831. ) and an open position (position indicated by a phantom line in FIG. 43) for opening the introduction port 831 by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown). In a state where the inlet 831 is closed by the movable feather portion 832 due to the movable feather portion 832 being in the standby position, the game ball 99 is not introduced into the feather accessory device 83 . On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 44(A) and 44(B), when the inlet 831 is opened by the movable feather 832 being in the open position, the game ball can be received by the movable feather 832. is. A game ball received by the movable wing portion 832 can be introduced into the wing accessory device 83 through the inlet 831 . The movable feather portion 832 is operated to the open position when the lottery result of the big winning lottery triggered by the winning of the second starting port 315 is a small winning (see FIG. 45(A)), and the inlet 831 is opened for a predetermined time. , for example, it is opened only for a time (about 0.5 seconds to 1.5 seconds) for 1 to 3 game balls to enter the feather accessory device 83 . Of course, the opening time of the introduction port 831 at the time of the small win may be appropriately set, and is not limited to the time shown above.

Inside the feather accessory device 83, a V winning opening 833, a normal winning opening 834, and a V winning opening opening/closing section 835 are provided. The V winning opening 833 and the normal winning opening 834 are respectively provided with ball entry sensors (not shown), and these ball entry sensors detect that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 or the normal winning opening 834. be done. The V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 operates between a closed position (FIG. 44(A)) in which the V winning opening 833 is closed and an open position (FIG. 44(B)) in which the V winning opening 833 is opened. not shown) or the like. The V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 is normally on standby at the closed position to close the V winning opening 833, and for example, when the lottery result in the big winning lottery is a small winning, the movable feather 832 is operated to the open position. Synchronized with the timing, when the feather accessory device 83 is operated for a predetermined time shorter than the operation time of the movable feather part 832, for example, in the E mode, the same number of times as the number of times of time saving, the V prize opening 824 has a probability of 50% to 80%. The V prize opening 833 is opened only during the time when the game ball wins.

As shown in FIG. 45(A) as a jackpot right/wrong table, the jackpot right/wrong table of this embodiment is not classified into a high probability mode and a low probability mode as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 45(A)). 12 (A) and FIG. 12 (B)), classified into the first special symbol game by winning the first start port 314 and the second special symbol game by winning the second start port 315. In the first special pattern game, 0 to 2 of the counter value (random number) of the 0 to 738 jackpot random number counter is a jackpot, and the remaining 736 pieces of 3 to 738 are out, and the first special The jackpot probability in the figure game is 3/739 (=approximately 1/246.3) as in the low probability mode in the first embodiment. On the other hand, in the second special game, as in the first special game, three counter values (random numbers) of 0 to 2 out of the counter values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter of 0 to 738 are jackpots. There is a jackpot probability of 3/739 (=about 1/246.3). That is, regardless of the first special game and the second special game, the big win in the big win lottery becomes the big win in the first game. Also, 723 pieces from 3 to 735 are small hits, and 3 pieces from 736 to 738 are out. Here, a small win is a win for executing a two-game game in which the movable wing portion 832 of the wing accessory device 83 is opened for a predetermined period of time. Then, when the wing accessory device 83 is activated by the small win and the game ball wins the V winning opening 833 of the wing accessory device 83, it becomes a big win in the second game. That is, in the 2nd special game, the big hit in the 2nd game is the main, and the probability of becoming a big hit in the 1st game is low as in the 2nd special game. Hereinafter, the jackpot in the first game in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is "first jackpot", and the jackpot due to the game ball entering the V winning port 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is "second jackpot". is sometimes called.

As shown in FIG. 45(B) as a jackpot type distribution table, the 1 type jackpot is distributed to the 4R short-time jackpot or the 8R short-time jackpot. Also, as shown in the jackpot type distribution table in FIG. 45(C), the two types of jackpots are distributed to the 4R short-time jackpot, 8R short-time jackpot, or 16R short-time jackpot. Here, the number of time reductions in each time reduction jackpot is set according to the lottery probability in the jackpot lottery, the small winning probability, the operating time of the feather accessory device 83 at the time of the small winning, the operating time of the V winning opening opening and closing part 835, etc. , and in the present embodiment, for example, 50 times. In addition, in this embodiment, all the jackpots are time-saving jackpots for both the first type jackpot and the two-type jackpot, but the jackpot types are sorted so that they become non-time-saving jackpots at a certain rate (for example, 20% to 50%). may In this case, the probability that the game ball wins in the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 by the time the time saving mode ends in mode E′ is right-handed without special hitting such as stop hitting or twisting. , the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 may be operated so as to achieve 90% or more, preferably substantially 100%. In addition, in mode E', the probability that the game ball wins in the V winning port 833 of the feather accessory device 83 by the time the time saving mode ends is substantially 100%, and the upper limit is set for the number of big wins from the first win. may That is, the gaming machine 10 as a one-kind-two-mixer machine according to the present embodiment may combine the specs of the limit machine according to the above-described third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 45(D), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure gaming state. This jackpot classification table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C' and mode E'. The contents of Mode A, Mode C' and Mode E' are the same as in the fourth embodiment, and the game states are advantageous to the player in order of Mode E', Mode C' and Mode A.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 45(E) prescribes the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In mode C' and mode E' which are time saving modes, the mode is shifted to mode A when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without shifting to the jackpot game state. Further, in the case of a type 1 jackpot, the mode is shifted to the mode C' after the jackpot game is finished, and in the case of the type 2 jackpot, the mode is shifted to the mode E' after the jackpot game is finished.

Here, in mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special game is executed by hitting to the left, and the jackpot in the first special game is a one-type jackpot, so from mode A After the jackpot game ends, the mode is shifted to C'.

In mode C', the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game are alternately executed by hitting left. That is, in mode C', the first special game with 100% jackpot of the first kind and the second special game with the main jackpot of the second kind are alternately executed. Therefore, from mode C ', on the condition that the time saving mode does not end, the mode C 'with a probability of approximately 50% after the end of the jackpot game (probability slightly exceeding 50%). (more precisely, the probability is slightly less than 50%). In addition, as described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without shifting to the jackpot gaming state in mode C', the mode shifts from mode C' to mode A.

In mode E', the second special game is executed by hitting to the right, the main type 2 jackpot, and the type 1 jackpot with a low probability (approximately 1/246.3 in this embodiment). Therefore, from mode E', after the jackpot game is over, the mode generally shifts to mode E' and falls to mode C' with a low probability. In addition, as described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without shifting to the jackpot game state in mode E', the mode shifts from mode E' to mode A. Also, in the case of a big hit in mode E', mode E' may be looped without falling to mode C'.

The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a jackpot success/failure table different from that of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 45(A)), and is capable of executing two types of games in which the feather accessory device 83 is operated. , Part of the main processing is different from the above-described first embodiment, and the special figure variation start processing and the game state transition processing in the special figure game control processing executed as the main processing are different.
[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 46, in the main process of this embodiment, between the special figure game control process of step S1306 and the jackpot game control process of step S1307, the feather accessory device control process is executed (step S2701). Details of the feather accessory device control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Feather accessory device control process]
<Step S2801>
As shown in FIG. 47, in the feather role device control process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether the special figure fluctuation stop flag, which is set to ON in step S1606 of the special figure game control process in FIG. 20, is set to ON. is determined (step S2801). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to execute the second game because the special game has ended. MPU41, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S2801: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2802, it is determined that the feather accessory device operation flag is set to OFF If so (step S2801: No), the process proceeds to step S2809.

<Step S2802>
When the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S2801: Yes), the feather accessory device operation set to ON in step S2907 of the special figure fluctuation start processing in FIG. 48 described later It is determined whether the flag is set to ON (step S2802). When the MPU 41 determines that the feather accessory device operation flag is set to ON (step S2802: Yes), it can be determined that it is time to operate the feather accessory device 83, so the process proceeds to step S2803. . On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S2801: No), it can be determined that it is not time to operate the feather accessory device 83, so the feather accessory device control process exit.

<Steps S2803 to S2808>
When the feather accessory device operation flag is set to ON (step S2802: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the feather accessory device operation flag to OFF (step S2803), and the movable feather portion of the feather accessory device 83 The operation of 832 is started (step S2804), and the movable blade portion operating flag is set to ON (step S2805). As a result, in the wing accessory device 83 , the introduction port 831 is opened, and the game ball can be introduced into the wing accessory device 83 by the movable wing portion 832 . Next, the MPU 41 starts the operation of the V winning opening opening/closing section 835 (step S2806), and sets the V winning opening opening/closing section operating flag to ON (step S2807). As a result, the V winning opening 833 of the wing accessory device 83 is opened, and the game ball introduced into the wing accessory device 83 through the introduction port 831 can win the V winning opening 833 . Furthermore, the MPU 41 starts measuring the operating time (step S2808). The timing in step S2808 is used to determine whether or not it is time to return the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 to the standby state in step S2810 to be described later to close the V winning opening 833, or in step S2814. This is referred to by the MPU 41 to determine whether or not it is time to return the movable vane 832 and close the introduction port 831 .

<Step S2809>
MPU41, if the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S2801: No), that is, if it is not the timing to operate the feather accessory device 83, the V winning opening opening and closing unit that is set to ON in step S2807 It is determined whether or not the operating flag is set to ON (step S2809). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning opening 833 is open. When the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation flag is set to ON (step S2809: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2810, and when the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation flag is set to OFF. (Step S2809: No), the process proceeds to step S2815.

<Step S2810>
When the V winning opening opening/closing unit operating flag is set to ON (step S2809: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the clocking time at which clocking is started in step S2808 is within a predetermined first predetermined time. is determined (step S2810). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to return the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 to the standby position and close the V winning opening 833 . If the MPU 41 determines that the measured time has reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2813, and if it determines that the measured time has not reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: No), the process proceeds to step S2811.

<Steps S2811 and S2812>
When the MPU 41 determines that the clocked time has not reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: No), it determines whether or not the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 (step S2811). Whether or not the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 is determined by whether or not the game ball has been detected by a ball entering sensor (not shown) provided in the V winning opening 833, for example. When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the V winning hole 833 (step S2811: Yes), it sets the type 2 jackpot flag to ON (step S2812), and terminates the feather accessory device control process. Here, the two-type jackpot flag indicates whether or not to execute the jackpot game based on the winning of the game ball to the V winning prize port 833, and the jackpot game state is executed in step S3005 in the game state transition processing of FIG. 49 described later. is referred by the MPU 41 to determine whether or not to shift to . On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has not won the V winning hole 833 (step S2811: No), it ends the feather accessory device control process without setting the second type jackpot flag to ON.

<Steps S2813 and S2814>
When the MPU 41 determines that the clocked time has reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: Yes), that is, when it determines that it is time to close the V winning opening 833, the MPU 41 moves the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 to the standby position. (step S2813), set the V winning opening opening/closing unit operating flag to OFF (step S2814), and terminate the feather accessory device control process.

<Step S2815>
When the V winning opening opening/closing section operating flag is set to OFF (step S2809: No), the MPU 41 checks whether the movable feather section operating flag set to ON in step S2805 is set to ON. It judges (step S2815). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning opening 833 is open. The MPU 41 determines whether or not the introduction port 831 of the feather accessory device 83 is open. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2816 when the movable wing portion in-operation flag is set to ON (step S2815: Yes), and when the movable wing portion in-operation flag is set to OFF (step S2815: No), the feather accessory device control process is terminated.

<Step S2816>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the clocked time for starting clocking in step S2808 has reached a predetermined second predetermined time when the movable wing portion in-operation flag is set to ON (step S2815: Yes). (Step S2816). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to return the movable blade portion 832 to the standby position and close the introduction port 831 . When the MPU 41 determines that the measured time has reached the second predetermined time (step S2816: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2817, and when it determines that the measured time has not reached the second predetermined time (step S2816: No), in order to maintain the open state of the introduction port 831 of the wing accessory device 83, the wing accessory device control process is terminated.

<Steps S2817 to S2820>
When the counted time has reached the second predetermined time (step S2816: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the movable wing portion 832 to the standby position, closes the introduction port 831 (step S2817), and sets the movable wing portion operating flag. is turned off (step S2818). As a result, the second type game is ended when the lottery result in the big winning lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315 is a small winning. Furthermore, the MPU 41 ends the timing of the operation time of the wing accessory device 83 started in step S2808 (step S2819), sets the wing accessory device operation end flag to ON (step S2820), Terminate the physical device control process. The feather accessory device operation end flag indicates that the operation of the feather accessory device 83 has ended, that is, the two-type game has ended. After the end of the game, the MPU 41 refers to it to determine whether or not to shift to the jackpot game state.

[Special figure fluctuation start process]
Since the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured as a one-type two-type mixing machine, the special figure fluctuation start processing is different from the special figure fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above. have a point. As shown in FIG. 48, the special figure fluctuation start processing of the present embodiment differs from the special figure fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above until the lottery result flag is set. (Steps S2901 to S2908). Also, in the present embodiment, as a lottery result other than the big hit lottery in the big hit lottery in the second special game, there is a small hit in addition to the off, so in the special figure fluctuation start process of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned first Steps S1811 and S1817 (see FIG. 22) related to the deviation in the special figure fluctuation start processing of the embodiment are considered to be small hits (steps S2909 and S2910). Steps S2901 to S2910 will be described below.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
In the special figure fluctuation start processing of the present embodiment, first, when starting the fluctuation of the special figure, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special figure game to be started is the first special figure game (step S2901). When the MPU 41 determines to start the first special figure game (step S2901: Yes), the first special figure big hit success/failure table (see FIG. 45(A)) performs the success/failure determination (step S2902), and the process is performed. The process moves to step S2904. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines not to start the first special symbol game (step S2901: No), that is, when it determines to start the second special symbol game, the second special symbol jackpot success or failure table (FIG. 45 (A) (see step S2903), and the process proceeds to step S2904.

<Step S2904>
In step S2904, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big win. If the lottery result is a jackpot (step S2904: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2905, and if the lottery result is not a jackpot (step S2904: No), that is, if the lottery result is a small hit or a loss, The process moves to step S2906.

<Step S2905>
When the lottery result is a jackpot (step S2904: Yes), the MPU 41 distributes the jackpot type based on the special figure jackpot table (see FIG. 45(B)) (step S2905), and shifts the process to step S2908. . Specifically, the MPU 41 distributes the jackpot type to either the 4R short-time jackpot or the 8R short-time jackpot according to the counter value of the jackpot type counter.

<Steps S2906 and S2907>
When the lottery result is not a big win (step S2904: No), that is, when the lottery result is a small win or a loss, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result is a small win (step S2906). When the lottery result is a small hit (step S2906: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the feather accessory device operation flag to ON (step S2907), and shifts the process to step S2908. The feather accessory device operation flag is a flag for operating the feather accessory device 83, and in step S2802 of the feather accessory device control process in FIG. 47, it is determined whether or not to operate the feather accessory device 83. is referred to by the MPU 41 for this purpose. On the other hand, when the lottery result is not a small hit (step S2906: No), that is, when the lottery result is out, the process proceeds to step S2908 without setting the feather accessory device operation flag to ON.

<Step S2908>
When the MPU 41 executes processing according to the lottery result (steps S2904 to S2907), it sets the lottery result flag to ON. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the type 1 jackpot flag to ON when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is the 4R short-time jackpot or the 8R short-time jackpot, and sets the small hit flag to ON when the jackpot is a small win. , set the out flag to on if it is out.

<Steps S2909 and S2910>
When the lottery result flag is set to ON (step S2908), the MPU 41 performs the predetermined processing (steps S1807 to S1811) in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and then the out flag set to ON in step S2908. Or it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set to ON (step S2809). MPU41, when the off flag or the small hit flag is set to ON (step S2909: Yes), sets the off flag or the small hit flag to off (step S2810), and shifts the process to step S1815. On the other hand, when the off flag or the small hit flag is set to OFF (step S2909: No), the process proceeds to step S1818. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S1815 to S1818 of the special figure variation start processing (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and the special figure variation start processing ends.

[Game state transition processing]
Since the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above is configured as a loop probability variable machine, in the game state transition process of the first embodiment described above, at the end of the special figure game (at the end of the type 1 game ), it is determined whether or not the time-saving mode ends, and after the time-saving mode ends, the mode is shifted to mode A (see steps S1909 to S1913 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, since the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 1 type 2 type mixing machine, the operation of the feather accessory device is performed not only at the end of the special figure game (at the end of the 1 type game) At the end (at the end of the second game), it is determined whether or not the time saving mode ends, and after the time saving mode ends, the mode is shifted to mode A (steps S3001 and S3002 in FIG. 49). It is different from the game state transition processing of the embodiment. In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, the special game jackpot (1 type jackpot) is used as a trigger to shift to the jackpot game state, but in this embodiment, not only the 1st jackpot, but also the feather accessory device It is different from the first embodiment described above in that it shifts to a jackpot game state by a second jackpot based on the winning of a game ball into the V prize opening 833 of 83 (steps S3003 to S3005 in FIG. 49). Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, the transition destination of the mode was determined according to the jackpot type (see steps S1914 to S1932 in FIG. 13 (A) and FIG. 23), but in this embodiment, one type It is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the mode transition destination is determined depending on whether it is a jackpot or a double jackpot (FIG. 45(E), steps S3006 to S3012 in FIG. 50). Steps S3001 to S3012 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. FIG.

<Step S3001>
In step S3001 shown in FIG. 49, MPU41, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to on (step S1900: Yes and step S1901), the special figure of FIG. It is determined whether or not the one-type jackpot flag, which is set to ON in step S2908 of the figure fluctuation start process, is set to ON (step S3001). The type 1 jackpot flag indicates that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The MPU 41, when the type 1 jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3001: Yes), executes processing to shift to the jackpot game state (steps S1903 to S1907). On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3002 when the type 1 jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S3001: No), that is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a small win or a loss.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the feather accessory device operation flag, which is set to ON in step S2907 of the special figure fluctuation start processing in FIG. 48, is set to ON. The feather accessory device operation flag indicates that the lottery result in the big winning lottery is a small hit, that is, the feather accessory device 83 is to be operated. When the feather accessory device operation flag is set to ON (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that it is not the timing to shift the game state because it is necessary to operate the feather accessory device 83. The game state transition processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the feather accessory device operation flag is set to OFF (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 executes processing as to whether to shift to any of mode A, mode C', or mode E'. (Steps S1908 to S1911, S3013, steps S1914, S1915, S1917, S3006 to S3012 in FIG. 50).

<Steps S3003 to S3004>
When the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S1900: No), the MPU 41 turns on the feather accessory device operation end flag set to on in step S2820 of the feather accessory device control process in FIG. is set (step S3003). The feather accessory device operation end flag indicates the timing to terminate the operation of the feather accessory device 83, that is, the timing to return the movable feather portion 832 to the standby position and close the introduction port 831. be. When the feather accessory device operation end flag is set to ON (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the feather accessory device operation end flag to OFF (step S3004), and shifts the process to step S3005. On the other hand, when the feather accessory device operation end flag is set to OFF (step S3003: No), the process proceeds to step S1914 in FIG.

<Step S3005>
When it is time to end the operation of the feather accessory device 83 (step S3003: Yes and step S3004), the MPU 41 sets the two types of jackpot flags to be turned on in step S2812 of the feather accessory device control process in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is set to ON (step S3005). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift to the jackpot game state after the operation of the feather accessory device 83 is completed. MPU41, when it is determined that the 2 types of jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3005: Yes), when the 1 type of per flag is set to ON (step S3001: Yes), the jackpot gaming state (steps S1903 to S1907). On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the two-type jackpot flag is set to off (step S3005: No), similarly to when the feather accessory device operation flag is set to off (step S3002: No) , mode A, mode C' or mode E' (steps S1908-S1911, S3013, steps S1914, S1915, S1917, S3006-S3012 in FIG. 50).

<Step S3006>
In step S3006 shown in FIG. 50, the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game state when the jackpot game end flag set to ON in the jackpot game control process in step S1307 of the main process of FIG. 17 is set to ON. When the process is executed (step S1914: Yes, steps S1915 and S1917), it is determined whether or not the 1 type jackpot flag set to ON in step S2908 of the special figure fluctuation start process in FIG. 48 is set to ON. . That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the transition destination after the end of the jackpot game is any of mode C' and mode E' of the special figure gaming states. MPU41 transfers a process to step S3007, when the 1st kind jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3006: Yes). On the other hand, when the type 1 jackpot flag is not set to ON (step S3002: No), that is, when the type 2 jackpot flag is set to ON, the process proceeds to step S3010.

<Steps S3007 to S3009>
MPU41, when the 1 type jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3006: Yes), to shift to mode C' of the special figure gaming state (step S3007), further sets the mode C' flag to ON (Step S3008). That is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 is in the short-time mode and the high-probability mode after the jackpot game ends, and alternately switches to the first start port 314 and the second start port 315. The mode is shifted to mode C' in which a game ball can enter. Then, the MPU 41 sets the type 1 jackpot flag to OFF (step S3009), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3010 to S3012>
MPU41, when the type 1 jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S3006: No), that is, when the type 2 jackpot flag is set to ON, the mode E 'of the special figure game state is shifted to ( Step S3010), and the mode E' flag is set to ON (step S3011). That is, the MPU 41 is in the time-saving mode and the high-probability mode after the end of the jackpot game in the case of a two-type jackpot by winning the game ball into the V prize opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83, and is supported by the electric support member 36. The game ball is shifted to a mode E' in which the second starting port 315 is likely to win. Then, the MPU 41 sets the type 2 jackpot flag to OFF (step S3012), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3013>
In addition, in the case of a type 1 jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode C' after the jackpot game ends, and the mode C' flag is set to ON (steps S3007 and S3008), and in the case of a type 2 jackpot, mode E' after the jackpot game ends. Since the mode E' flag is set to ON (steps S3010 and S3011), when the mode is shifted to mode A due to the end of the time saving mode (steps S1908 to S1910 in FIG. 49), ON in step S3008 , or the mode E' flag, which is set to ON in step S3010, is set to OFF.

Thus, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the special game state, from mode A to mode C', from mode C' to mode A, mode C' and mode E', from mode E' Transition to either mode A or mode E'. That is, after the first hit in mode A, before falling to mode A due to the end of time saving, how to continue the time saving mode with one type of jackpot or two types of jackpots in mode 'C and mode E', which are time saving modes. It has gameplay. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 which is a one-type/two-type mixed machine but has game characteristics similar to those of an ST machine. Also, in mode C', the first special game and the second special game can be alternately executed by hitting to the left, while in mode E', the second special game is basically executed by hitting to the right. At the same time, compared to the probability of becoming a 1st kind of jackpot in the 1st special game and the 2nd special game, the degree of expectation of becoming a 2nd kind of jackpot due to the operation of the feather accessory device due to the small hit in the 2nd special game is high. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in mode E', compared to mode C', the possibility of falling to mode A due to the end of the time saving mode is low, and as a result, the expectation of a big win and the player are advantageous. Since the mode C' and the mode E' continue to have two types of modes with different expectations, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Seventh to Twelfth Embodiments]
In the above-described first embodiment, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the distribution member 38 that is alternately rotated clockwise and counterclockwise by the game balls. The gaming machine 10 having the sorting device 35 has been described. On the other hand, the seventh to twelfth embodiments differ from the first embodiment in the configuration of the sorting section of the sorting device. The seventh to twelfth embodiments will be individually described below with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. FIG.

<Seventh embodiment>
The sorting device of this embodiment is common to the above-described first embodiment in that it includes a sorting unit that rotates alternately clockwise and counterclockwise, but the sorting unit is a solenoid or the like. It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that it is rotated alternately clockwise and counterclockwise by driving means (not shown).

As shown in FIGS. 51A and 51B, the sorting device 35A of the present embodiment includes a sorting member 38A (sorting portion) rotatably fixed directly below the introduction port 350. . The distribution member 38A is formed in a claw shape, and is rotated by a drive means (not shown) between a right tilted position shown in FIG. 51(A) and a left tilted position shown in FIG. 51(B). dynamically driven. When the distribution member 38A is located at the right inclined position shown in FIG. 51A, the game ball 99 introduced through the introduction port 350 is guided to the first passage 351 by the distribution member 38A. As a result, the game ball 99 enters the left first starting port 314L. On the other hand, when the distribution member 38A is positioned at the left inclined position shown in FIG. Induced. Thereby, the game ball 99 wins the second start opening 315 when receiving the support of the electric support member 36, and wins the right first starting opening 314R when not receiving the support of the electric support member 36. - 特許庁In addition, in the distribution device 35A of the present embodiment, in order to prevent the game ball from being hit so that the game ball enters the second passage 352, the distribution device 35A is made opaque, for example. It is preferable to make the distribution member 38A invisible from the outside.

Also, the distribution member 38A may be driven by the driving means so as to rotate alternately between the left tilted position and the right tilted position every predetermined time (for example, about 0.5 seconds to 2 seconds). Conceivable. Of course, the distribution member 38A does not necessarily need to be rotated in a constant cycle, and may be driven to perform patterned and irregular rotation, and may be rotated in a plurality of different rotation patterns for a constant period of time or indefinitely. It may be operated by changing every hour. For example, the rotation pattern in which the ball is likely to enter the first passage 351 and the rotation pattern in which the ball is likely to enter the second passage 352 may be changed at fixed or irregular intervals. As a rotation pattern in which the ball is likely to enter the first passage 351, a pattern in which the distribution member 38A stops at the right tilted position longer than the left tilted position, and a pattern in which the distribution member 38A stops at the right tilted position to the left A pattern in which the speed (time) of turning to the tilted position is slower (longer) than the speed (time) of turning from the left tilted position to the right tilted position is conceivable. When a plurality of rotation patterns are used together, the distribution member 38A is rotationally driven so that the game balls 99 are finally distributed to the first path 351 and the second path 352 with a theoretical value of 1:1. is preferred. However, the distribution member 38A may be rotationally driven so that the theoretical game ball distribution ratio between the first path 351 and the second path 352 is other than 1:1. In this case, the theoretical distribution ratio of game balls between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 may be changed according to the game state. For example, compared to mode B, mode C can be configured so that game balls are more likely to be guided to the second path 352, and vice versa. Further, a ball entry sensor is provided in the vicinity of the introduction port 350, and when the entry of the game ball 99 into the introduction port 350 is detected by this ball entry sensor, distribution is performed when the distribution member 38A is at the left inclined position. It is conceivable to rotate the member 38A to the right tilt position while rotating the distribution member 38A to the left tilt position when the distribution member 38A is at the right tilt position.

Thus, in this embodiment, since the distribution member 38A is rotated at a predetermined timing by the drive means, the ratio of distribution of the game balls 99 to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 is temporarily can be accidentally or intentionally biased. Thereby, when the special figure gaming state is mode B or mode C, the game ball 99 is guided to either the first passage 351 or the second passage 352, that is, the game ball 99 is supported by the electric support member 36 Since the player can enjoy the game while being happy and sad about whether or not he/she wins at the second starting port 315, the interest in the game can be improved.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, similarly to the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the distribution portion is rotated between the right tilt position and the left tilt position by driving means such as a solenoid. This is different from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Further, the game machine according to this embodiment differs from the game machine according to the above-described seventh embodiment in the shape of the distribution section.

As shown in FIGS. 52(A) and 52(B) , the sorting device 35B of the present embodiment includes a sorting member 38B (sorting portion) rotatably fixed directly below the introduction port 350. . The distributing member 38B is formed in a substantially T-shape or anchor shape having an arc portion 382B and a shaft portion 383B, and has a right tilt position shown in FIG. 52(A) and a left tilt position shown in FIG. It is rotationally driven between positions by a driving means (not shown). Note that the distribution member 38B of the present embodiment differs from the distribution member 38A of the above-described seventh embodiment only in shape, and is otherwise similar to the distribution member 38A of the above-described seventh embodiment. It has the same function and effect as the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment. Moreover, the distribution member 38B of this embodiment can be changed in design similarly to the distribution member 38A of the above-described seventh embodiment.

Furthermore, the shape and the like of the distributing portion that distributes the game balls 99 to the first passage 351 or the second passage 352 by being rotated by the driving means are similar to those of the distributing member 38A of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. It is not limited to the distribution member 38B of the eighth embodiment shown in 52, and various design changes are possible. For example, it may have the same or similar shape as the distribution member 38 of the first embodiment described above, and in the distribution member 38B of the eighth embodiment, a flat plate portion or a bent portion is provided instead of the arc portion 382B. It may be a configuration.

<Ninth and Tenth Embodiments>
The sorting device 35 of the ninth and tenth embodiments, as a sorting unit, rotates the game ball 99 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by interfering with the game ball 99 to move the game ball 99 to the first passage 351. , or the second passage 352, in that a rotating body is provided.

As shown in FIG. 53(A), in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the sorting portion of the sorting device 35C is a columnar shape that can freely rotate in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions. It is configured as a roller 38</b>C (rotating body) and arranged directly below the introduction port 350 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 53(B), in the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the sorting portion of the sorting device 35D is a windmill that can rotate freely in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions. 38D and located directly below the inlet 350. As shown in FIG. The windmill 38D has a rotating body 382D fixed by a nail 381D (fixing part) so as to be freely rotatable. The nail 381D has an end driven into the game board 31, the end being a fixed end, and the end opposite to the end being a free end. Also, the nail 381D is made of metal, for example, and is plastically deformable. Therefore, since the nail 381D of the windmill 38D is plastically changeable, when the position of the nail 381D deviates from the initial set position, and in turn the position of the rotating body 382D deviates from the initial set position, the nail 381D is moved to the initial set position. It is possible to return to This makes it possible to improve the deviation of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the nail 381D.

In addition, in the game machine 10 according to the ninth and tenth embodiments, the interference of the game ball 99 causes the rotors such as the roller 38C and the windmill 38D that rotate freely in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction to be distributed. Since it is adopted as a part, the ratio of the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 can be temporarily and accidentally biased. As a result, similar to the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment and the eighth embodiment described above, when the special figure gaming state is mode B or mode C, the game ball 99 moves from the first passage 351 and the second It is possible to enjoy the game while wondering whether the game ball 99 is guided to the second path 352, that is, whether the game ball 99 receives the support of the electric support member 36 and enters the second start hole 315. Interest can be improved. In addition, when the distribution section is a rotating body such as the roller 38C or the windmill 38D, the player can easily determine the tendency of the distribution section to divide the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 (individuals between game machines). difference) can also be read. As a result, the player can adjust the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 22 to adjust the shooting intensity (shooting stroke) of the game ball, thereby finding a shooting stroke that makes it easy for the game ball to be distributed to the second passage 352. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy searching for a shooting intensity that allows game balls to be easily distributed to the second path 352, or to search for a game machine 10 that allows game balls to be easily distributed to the second path 352 from a plurality of gaming machines 10. can be obtained.

The configuration of the rotating body as the distribution section is not limited to the cylindrical roller 38C shown in FIG. 53(A) or the windmill 38D shown in FIG. 53(B), and design changes are possible. For example, the rotating body may be a prismatic rotating body such as a triangular prism or a square prism, a member having a flat cross section such as an elliptical cylindrical member or a flat plate member, a rotating body having unevenness on the outer peripheral surface such as a gear, or a rotating body having a plurality of blades. A propeller-shaped member or the like may be used.

Further, the rotating bodies such as the cylindrical roller 38C and the windmill 38D may be configured to be rotatable clockwise and counterclockwise by driving means such as a solenoid connected to the rotating bodies. In this case, it is conceivable that the rotation of the rotating body is alternately switched between the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction, for example, at regular time intervals (for example, about 0.5 seconds to 2 seconds). Of course, the rotating body does not necessarily have to switch the direction of rotation at regular time intervals, and may switch the direction of rotation at patterned irregular time intervals. In this case, it is preferable to switch the direction of rotation of the rotor so that the game balls 99 are distributed between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 with a theoretical ratio of 1:1. The direction of rotation of the rotating body may be switched so that the theoretical distribution ratio of game balls to 352 is other than 1:1. In this case, the theoretical distribution ratio of game balls between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 may be changed according to the game state. For example, the rotating body can be driven so that the game ball is more easily guided to the second path 352 in mode C than in mode B, and vice versa. In addition, a ball entry sensor is provided near the inlet 350, and when the entry of the game ball 99 into the inlet 350 is detected by the ball entry sensor, the rotating body is rotated in a direction opposite to the previous rotation direction. It is also possible.

<Eleventh and twelfth embodiments>
The sorting device of the eleventh and twelfth embodiments distributes the game balls 99 to the first path 351 or the second path 352 by an immovable and unrotatable sorting portion (fixed sorting portion) regardless of rotation or rotation. is different from the first embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 54(A), the distribution device 35E of the gaming machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment has a top portion 389E directly below the introduction port 350, and distributes it as a bilaterally symmetrical mountain-shaped fixed portion 38E. part is formed. Since the game balls 99 interfering with the top portion 389E or its vicinity are distributed to the left and right in the mountain-shaped fixed portion 38E, the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54(B), in the sorting device 35F of the gaming machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the vertex nail 389F (fixed portion) is positioned directly below the introduction port 350 and is a symmetrical triangular shape. A distribution portion is formed by the nail 38F. In this triangular nail 38F, game balls 99 interfering with the vertex nail 389F are distributed to the left and right, so the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352. The ends of the triangular nails 38F are driven into the game board 31, the ends being fixed ends and the ends opposite to the ends being free ends. Also, the triangular nail 38F is made of metal, for example, and is plastically deformable. Therefore, since each of the triangular nails 38F is plastically changeable, it is possible to return the triangular nails 38F to the initial setting positions when the positions of the triangular nails 38F are deviated from the initial setting positions. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the deviation of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the triangular peg 38F.

Also in the game machine 10 according to the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, since the distribution portion is an immovable and non-rotatable fixed distribution portion such as the mountain-shaped fixed portion 38E and the triangular nail 38F, the game balls 99 The ratio distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 can be temporarily and accidentally biased. As a result, similar to the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described seventh embodiment and eighth embodiment, when the special figure gaming state is mode B or mode C, the game ball 99 moves from the first passage 351 and the second Since it is possible to enjoy the game while wondering whether the game ball 99 will be guided to the second path 352, that is, whether the game ball 99 will enter the second start hole 315 with the support of the electric support member 36. Interest can be improved. In addition, when the distribution section is a stationary and non-rotatable distribution section such as the mountain-shaped fixed section 38E or the triangular nail 38F, the player distributes the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the fixed distribution section. It is also possible to read the tendency of (individual difference between game machines). As a result, the player can adjust the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 22 to adjust the shooting strength (shooting stroke) of the game ball, thereby finding a shooting stroke that makes it easy for the game ball to be distributed to the second passage 352. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy searching for a shooting intensity that allows game balls to be easily distributed to the second path 352, or to search for a game machine 10 that allows game balls to be easily distributed to the second path 352 from a plurality of gaming machines 10. can be obtained.

In addition, the configuration of the distributing portion for distributing the game balls 99 to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 is limited to the mountain-shaped fixing portion 38E shown in FIG. 54(A) and the triangular peg 38F shown in FIG. 54(B). The design can be changed without For example, the distributing portion may have other bilaterally symmetrical shapes such as a dome-shaped mountain portion, or four or more nails such as a square nail (rhombic nail) whose top nail is positioned directly below the inlet 350. It may consist of a nail or a single nail. Of course, by making the shape asymmetrical, the distribution ratio of the game balls between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 may be biased.

[Thirteenth to twenty-ninth embodiments]
In the above-described first embodiment, the electric support member 36 as a normal electric accessory is provided with a plurality of delay guides 364 extending from the wall portion 361 in a slanting manner with the distal end portion located on the left side (downstream side) of the base end portion. , and by arranging these delay guides 364 in a staggered manner, it is possible to ensure a long residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric accessory 36 . On the other hand, in the thirteenth to twenty-ninth embodiments, a longer residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36 is ensured by a structure different from that of the first embodiment. The thirteenth to twenty-ninth embodiments will be individually described below with reference to FIGS. 55 to 63. FIG.

<Thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments>
In the above-described first embodiment, the delay portion of the electric support member 36, which is a normal electric accessory, extends in a staggered manner from the wall portion 361, and the tip portion is positioned on the left side (downstream side) of the base end portion. By providing a plurality of inclined delay guides 364 to move the game ball 99 on the electric support member 36 along a meandering path, the game ball 99 stays on the electric support member 36 for a long time. On the other hand, in the thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments, as in the first embodiment, the electric support member is configured to move the game ball 99 along a meandering path by means of the delay section. However, the configuration of the delay section is different from that of the first embodiment.

The thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments will be described below with reference to FIGS. 55(A) to 55(C). Here, FIG. 55(A) is a plan view of the electric support member 36A of the game machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 55(B) is the electric support member 36B of the game machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment. A plan view, FIG. 55C, is a plan view of the electric support member 36C of the gaming machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 55(A), in the electric support member 36A of the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, each of the plurality of delay guides 364A as the delay section is an equilateral triangle in plan view, and the right side ( The inclined side is located on the upstream side), and they are arranged in a zigzag pattern as a whole. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55(B), in the electric support member 36B of the gaming machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment, each of the plurality of delay guides 364B as the delay section is semicircular in plan view, They are arranged in a staggered pattern. In the plurality of delay guides 364A and 364B shown in FIGS. 55(A) and 55(B), the game ball 99 interferes with the respective delay guides 364A and 364B in the electric support members 36A and 36B. It moves from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) while meandering.

It should be noted that the plurality of delay guides serving as the delay portions are not limited to having an equilateral triangle or a semicircular shape in plan view, and are not particularly limited as long as they have a shape that allows the game ball 99 to meander. For example, the plurality of delay guides are each formed into a polygonal shape such as an isosceles triangle, a right triangle, a trapezoid, or a parallelogram, and arranged in a staggered manner so that the inclined side is located on the right side (upstream side). is formed into a shape having a parabolic or arc-shaped outer circumference such as a quadrant, semi-ellipse, or quadrant-ellipse, and staggered so that the parabolic or arc-shaped outer circumference is located on the right side (upstream side) Arranged things etc. may be used.

As shown in FIG. 55(C), in the electric support member 36C of the gaming machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment, the delay portion is formed as a meandering groove 364C. With such a meandering groove 364C as well, the game ball 99 moves from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) while meandering in the electric support member 36C. In addition, the shape of the meandering groove 364C as the delay portion can be variously formed as long as the shape of the groove allows the game ball 99 to meander.

As described above, in the electric support members 36A to 36C of the thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments, similarly to the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, while the game ball 99 is meandering in the electric support members 36A to 36C, By moving from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side), it is possible to secure a long retention time of the game ball 99 in the electric support members 36A to 36C. As a result, in the thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments, as in the first embodiment described above, when the player hits right when the special figure gaming state is mode B or mode C, the electric power It becomes difficult to receive support from the support members 36A-36C. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an abnormal profit exceeding the profit expected in the gaming machine 10 from being obtained in the case of right-handed throwing in a situation where left-handed throwing is encouraged.

<Sixteenth to twenty-ninth embodiments>
In the above-described first embodiment, as the delay portion of the electric support member 36, a plurality of slanted portions extending in a staggered manner from the wall portion 361 and having the tip portion positioned on the left side (downstream side) of the base portion. By providing a delay guide 364 and moving the game ball 99 on the electric support member 36 along a meandering path, the moving distance of the game ball on the electric support member 36 is increased and the residence time of the game ball 99 on the electric support member 36 is increased. has long been secured. On the other hand, in the 16th to 29th embodiments, as the delay part of the electric support member, the game ball is linearly moved in the electric support member, and the residence time of the game ball in the electric support member is is different from the above-described first embodiment in that it is configured to ensure a long time.

Hereinafter, the sixteenth to twenty-ninth embodiments will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. There exists an effect similar to 1st Embodiment. That is, when the special game state is mode B or mode C, if the player hits to the right, it becomes difficult to receive support from the electric support member. It is possible to prevent an abnormal profit exceeding the profit expected in the game machine 10 from being obtained when the game machine 10 hits.

(16th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 56A is a perspective view of the electric support member 36D of the game machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. be.

As shown in FIGS. 56(A) and 56(B), in the sixteenth embodiment, a plurality of linear projections 364D extending continuously between the wall portions 361 are provided as delay portions of the electric support member 36D. It is The plurality of linear projections 364D extend parallel to each other at regular intervals. Each linear projection 364D has a horizontal surface 365D and a vertical surface 366D, and has a triangular uniform cross section. In the electric support member 36D of this embodiment, the movement of the game ball 99 is delayed on the horizontal surface 365D by providing the horizontal surface 365D.

The horizontal surface 365D may be a smooth surface or a rough surface, but a rough surface with a large movement resistance is preferable from the viewpoint of delaying the game ball. Here, the rough surface includes, in addition to a satin surface due to embossing, a surface having unevenness due to embossing or the like. Also, the movement resistance of the game ball may be increased by arranging an elastic member on the horizontal surface or by forming the horizontal surface with an elastic material.

Instead of the horizontal surface 365D, the linear convex portion 364D may have a slightly inclined surface in which the left side (downstream side) is slightly lower or higher than the right side (upstream side). In this case, if the angle of inclination of the slightly inclined surface with respect to the horizontal is smaller than the angle of inclination with respect to the horizontal of the electric support member 36D, the retarding function is achieved. preferable. Further, it is not always necessary to provide a plurality of linear protrusions as delay portions, and one may be provided.

(17th to 19th embodiments)
Here, FIG. 57(A) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the electric support member 36E of the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 57(C) is a cross-sectional view showing essential parts of the support member 36F, and FIG. 57C is a cross-sectional view showing essential parts of the electric support member 36G of the gaming machine 10 according to the nineteenth embodiment.

The electric support members 36E to 36G of the seventeenth to nineteenth embodiments are different from the electric support members of the sixteenth embodiment in that a plurality of linear projections 364E to 364G having horizontal surfaces 365E to 365G are provided. Common with 36D. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57(A), the linear projection 364E of the seventeenth embodiment is provided with an inclined surface 366E instead of the vertical surface 366D of the sixteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 57(B), the linear projection 364F of the eighteenth embodiment has a horizontal surface 365F, but instead of the vertical surface 366D of the sixteenth embodiment, a circular arc surface 366F is provided. This is different from the sixteenth embodiment described above. It should be noted that the surface that can substitute for the vertical surface 366D of the electric support member 36D of the sixteenth embodiment is not limited to the inclined surface 366E and the arc surface 366F, and may be surfaces of other shapes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57(C), in the eighteenth embodiment, a plurality of linear protrusions 364G are provided adjacent to each other, and horizontal surfaces 365G and vertical surfaces 366G are alternately continuous. It is different from the linear projection 364D of the sixteenth embodiment described above. Of course, also in the eighteenth embodiment, instead of the vertical surface 366G, a surface having another shape such as an inclined surface or an arcuate surface may be employed.

The linear projections 364E, 364F, and 364G of the seventeenth to nineteenth embodiments can also be modified in the same manner as in the sixteenth embodiment.

(Twentieth embodiment)
Here, FIG. 58(A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36H of the game machine according to the twentieth embodiment, and FIG. 58(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A2-A2 of FIG. 58(A). .

The electric support member 36H of the twentieth embodiment shown in FIGS. 58A and 58B is different from the first embodiment in that it is provided as a plurality of linear recesses.

As shown in FIGS. 58(A) and 56(B), in the twentieth embodiment, a plurality of linear recesses 364H extending continuously between the wall portions 361 are provided as delay portions of the electric support member 36H. ing. The plurality of linear recesses 364H extend parallel to each other at regular intervals. Each linear recess 364H has a horizontal surface 365H and a vertical surface 366H and has a triangular uniform cross-section. In the electric support member 36H of this embodiment, the movement of the game ball 99 is delayed on the horizontal surface 365H by providing the horizontal surface 365H. It should be noted that the linear concave portion 364H may employ surfaces of other shapes in place of the horizontal surface 365H and the vertical surface 366H, as in the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments described above. Moreover, it is not always necessary to provide a plurality of linear concave portions as delay portions, and one linear concave portion may be provided.

(Twenty-first to twenty-sixth embodiments)
Here, FIG. 59A is a perspective view of the electric support member 36I of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment, and FIG. 59B is a perspective view of the electric support member 36J of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-second embodiment. FIG. 60(A) is a perspective view showing the main part of the electric support member 36K of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-third embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 61(A) is a perspective view showing a main part of the support member 36L, FIG. 61(A) is a perspective view showing a main part of the electric support member 36M of the game machine 10 according to the twenty-fifth embodiment, and FIG. Fig. 10 is a perspective view showing a main part of an electric support member 36N of the game machine 10 according to the embodiment;

The electric support members 36I to 36N of the twenty-first to twenty-sixth embodiments shown in FIGS. It differs from the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 59A, in the twenty-first embodiment, the delay portion of the electric support member 36I is formed as a plurality of projections 364I, and these projections 364I are arranged in a rectangular lattice. Each convex portion 364I has a cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the electric support member 36I, which is a cross-sectional shape (A1-A1 It has a shape similar to the cross-sectional shape along the cutting line (see FIG. 56(B)).

As shown in FIG. 59(B), in the twenty-second embodiment, a plurality of protrusions 364J having the same shape as in the twenty-first embodiment is arranged in an orthorhombic lattice (rhombic lattice, triangular lattice, arranged in an isosceles grid).

As shown in FIG. 60(A), in the twenty-third embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364K are formed in the shape of a quadrangular prism, and these convex portions 364K are arranged in a rectangular grid. The plurality of protrusions 364K may be formed in a polygonal prism shape other than a square prism shape such as a triangular prism shape or a pentagonal prism shape, or may be formed in a staggered shape (orthorhombic lattice shape (rhombic lattice shape, triangular lattice shape, isosceles lattice shape)). may be placed.

As shown in FIG. 60B, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, a plurality of projections 364L are formed in a quadrangular pyramid shape, and these projections 364L are arranged in a rectangular grid. The plurality of protrusions 364L may be formed in a polygonal pyramid shape other than a square pyramid shape such as a triangular pyramid shape and a pentagonal pyramid shape, and may be formed in a rhombic lattice shape (rhombus lattice shape, triangular lattice shape, isosceles lattice shape). may be placed.

As shown in FIG. 61(A), in the twenty-fifth embodiment, a plurality of projections 364M are formed in a cylindrical shape, and these projections 364M are arranged in a rectangular lattice.

As shown in FIG. 61B, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364N are formed in a hemispherical shape, and these convex portions 364N are arranged in a rectangular lattice.

The plurality of protrusions 364M of the twenty-fifth embodiment and the plurality of protrusions 364N of the twenty-sixth embodiment may be arranged in an orthorhombic lattice (rhombic lattice, triangular lattice, isosceles lattice). Also, instead of the plurality of protrusions 364M and the plurality of protrusions 364N, a plurality of protrusions having a circular bottom surface such as a conical shape or a truncated cone shape may be discretely arranged.

It should be noted that the plurality of projections as the delay portion need not all have the same shape, and may be arranged by combining a plurality of projections of different shapes. may be placed. Moreover, the plurality of convex portions as the delay portions do not necessarily have to be arranged in a grid pattern, and may be arranged in a regular pattern other than a grid pattern, or may be randomly arranged without regularity.

(27th and 28th embodiments)
Here, FIG. 62(A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36O of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-seventh embodiment, and FIG. 62(B) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36P of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a perspective view.

Electric support members 36O and 36P of the twenty-seventh and twenty-eighth embodiments shown in FIGS. 62(A) and 62(B) are provided as a plurality of recesses 364O and 364P in which delay portions are discretely arranged. This is different from the above-described first embodiment in this respect.

As shown in FIG. 62(A), in the electric support member 36O of the twenty-seventh embodiment, a plurality of recesses 364O are formed as delay portions, and these recesses 364O are arranged in a rectangular lattice. Each concave portion 364O has a cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the electric support member 36O that is similar to the cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the linear convex portion 364D of the sixteenth embodiment (cut A1-A1 in FIG. 56A). It has the same shape as the cross-sectional shape along the line (see FIG. 56(B)).

As shown in FIG. 62(B), in the electric support member 36P of the twenty-eighth embodiment, a plurality of recesses 364P having the same shape as the recesses 364O of the twenty-seventh embodiment described above are formed as delay portions at an oblique angle. They are arranged in a square grid (rhombic grid, triangular grid, isosceles grid).

The shape of the plurality of recesses as the delay portion can be changed variously, for example, a polygonal prism shape such as a square prism shape, a polygonal pyramid shape such as a square pyramid shape, a cylindrical shape, a hemispherical shape, a conical shape, a truncated cone shape, and the like. may have a circular bottom surface.

Further, the plurality of recesses serving as the delay portions need not all have the same shape, and may be arranged by combining a plurality of recesses having different shapes. may be placed in combination with Furthermore, the plurality of concave portions as the delay portions do not necessarily have to be arranged in a grid pattern, and may be arranged in a regular pattern other than a grid pattern, or may be arranged in a random pattern without regularity.

(29th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 63(A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36Q of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-ninth embodiment, and FIG. 63(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A3-A3 of FIG. be.

The electric support member 36Q of the twenty-ninth embodiment shown in FIGS. 63(A) and 63(B) is different from the first embodiment described above in that the delay portion is provided as a plurality of rollers 364Q that are rotationally driven. different from the form.

As shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B, the electric support member 36Q of the twenty-ninth embodiment includes a plurality of rollers 364Q (five in this embodiment) as delay portions. However, it is not always necessary to provide a plurality of rollers 364Q, and at least one roller 364Q is sufficient. Each roller 364Q is rotatably supported so that its rotation axis extends along the lateral direction of the electric support member 36Q (the direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball 99). Further, each roller 364Q is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction, which is the opposite direction to the moving direction of the game ball, by driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid. Therefore, the game ball 99 moving on the electric support member 36Q interferes with a plurality of rollers 364Q, and a load is applied toward the right side (upstream side). As a result, the momentum of the game ball 99 moving from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) is reduced, so that a long residence time of the game ball 99 moving on the electric support member 36Q is ensured.

The roller 364Q may have a smooth outer surface or a rough surface, but a rough surface having a large movement resistance is preferable from the viewpoint of delaying the game ball. Here, the rough surface includes, in addition to a satin surface due to embossing, a surface having unevenness due to embossing or the like. Also, an elastic member may be arranged on the outer surface of the roller 364Q, or the outer surface of the roller 364Q may be made of an elastic material to increase the movement resistance of the game ball.

Further, when the delay portion is configured as a roller, it may be configured to apply a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force to the game ball 99 via the roller. As a result, the momentum of the game ball 99 can be reduced by attracting the game ball 99 to the roller. In this case, the rollers may be rotationally driven in the counterclockwise direction as in the twenty-ninth embodiment, but may be freely rotatable without being rotationally driven by the driving means.

Further, the roller 364Q includes linear protrusions 364D to 364G, a linear recess 364H, and a plurality of protrusions arranged in a grid like the electric support members 36D to 36P of the sixteenth to twenty-eighth embodiments described above. It is also conceivable to use them in addition to the configuration in which 364I to 364N and recesses 364O and 364P are provided.

[Thirtyth to thirty-eighth embodiments]
In the above-described first embodiment, the two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R) having the same function are provided, and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35. A right first starting port 314R is provided directly under the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, and a second starting port 315 having a function different from that of the first starting port 314 is connected to the first left starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314L. The case where it is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391, which is the area directly below the introduction port 350 of the sorting device 35 between the 1 starting port 314R, has been described. On the other hand, the thirtieth to thirty-eighth embodiments are different from the first embodiment in that each of the first start opening and the second start opening is provided one by one. The thirtieth to thirty-eighth embodiments will be individually described below with reference to the drawings.

<Thirtieth Embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the plate-shaped electric support member 36 supports the winning of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315 has been described. In contrast, the present embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the electric support member is formed in an upside down shape. In addition, since the electric support member is formed in an upside-down shape, the configurations of the first start opening and the second start opening are also different from those of the above-described first embodiment.

The thirtieth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. FIG. Here, FIG. 64(A) is a view showing the main part of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36R of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 65(A) is a view of FIG. 64(A) when the electric support member 36R is in a standby state, FIG. 65(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A3-A3 of FIG. 65(A), FIG. 66(A) is a view when the electric support member 36R is in the operating position in FIG. 64(A), and FIG. 66(B) is a sectional view along the A4-A4 section line in FIG. 66(A).

In the above-described first embodiment, the two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R) having the same function are provided, and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35. , the right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. As shown in FIG. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the second starting port 315 having a different function from the first starting port 314 is located between the first left starting port 314L and the first right starting port 314R. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 provided in the area immediately below the inlet 350 . Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, the electric support member 36 is located on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable prize winning device 316 and below the exit of the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 (the second starting port 315 above), and between a standby position that restricts the entry of game balls into the second start port 315 and an operating position that allows the entry of game balls into the second start port 315. It is possible to move back and forth on the game board 31 between them.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is provided in the center of a certain ball receiving portion 391 . That is, the first starting port 314 of this embodiment is provided at the position of the second starting port 315 of the first embodiment described above, and the game ball 99 and the second passage 352 distributed to the first passage 351 All of the distributed game balls 99 can win the same first starting port 314 . In addition, the second starting port 315 of the present embodiment is provided at a position offset to the right from directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 described later, and the game balls 99 released from the second passage 352 The ball is not directly entered into the second starting hole 315 .

As shown in FIGS. 64(A) and 64(B), the electric support member 36R has an inverted V-shape having a left guiding portion 361R (first portion) and a right guiding portion 362R (second portion). . The left guiding portion 361R is positioned below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and to the left of the second starting port 315 and is inclined downward to the right toward the second starting port 315 . Therefore, the left guide portion 361R can guide the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 to the right side. The right guide portion 362R extends continuously between the left side of the stage 310 below the variable prize winning device 316 and the right side of the second starting port 315, and is inclined downward to the left toward the second starting port 315. . Therefore, the right guide section 362R can guide the game ball moving from the stage 310 to the left side toward the second starting port 315 . In addition, it is preferable to provide a delay section in the right guidance section 362R, as in the first embodiment described above. As a result, in a game state in which the electric support member 36R is operated for a short period of time, when a hitting method (right hitting) other than the recommended hitting method (left hitting) is performed, the game ball wins the second start port 315. It becomes difficult to be That is, in the gaming machine 10, by eliminating the advantage of playing right-handed in a game state in which left-handed is encouraged, the player can be encouraged to actively play left-handed.

A penetrating portion 363R is provided between the left guide portion 361R and the right guide portion 362R so as to be positioned above the second starting port 315. As shown in FIG. The through portion 363R has a notch shape that opens forward, and is formed in a form that allows the game ball 99 to pass therethrough. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided from the left guidance portion 361R can pass through the penetration portion 363R and enter the second starting port 315, and the game ball 99 guided from the right guidance portion 362R can pass through the penetration portion 363R. It is possible to enter the second starting port 315 by passing through. In addition, the electric support member 36R moves between a standby position that restricts the entry of game balls into the second start port 315 and an operating position that allows the entry of game balls into the second start port 315. can be moved to The movement of the electric support member 36R in the front-rear direction is realized by driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid. Also, although the electric support member 36R has a different shape from the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above, the operating conditions, the operating pattern, etc. are the same as those of the first embodiment. Specifically, in mode A to mode C, when the lottery result in the normal drawing lottery is a hit, the game ball 99 passing through the first through gate 318 can enter the second start port 315 for a short time. In mode D and mode E, the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 is driven for a long time so that it can enter the second starting port 315 when the lottery result in the normal figure winning lottery is a win. . In addition, the electric support member 36R is operated on the condition that the passage of the game ball in the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is detected at the first through gate 318 without performing the lottery for the normal figure. may

As shown in FIGS. 65A and 65B, when the electric support member 36R is in the standby position, the electric support member 36R does not protrude from the game board 31, and the whole is inside the game board 31. Located in Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 is entered into the first starting hole 314 without being guided to the second starting hole 315 by the left guiding portion 361R. In addition, the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 falls along the game board 31 on the left side of the stage 310 without being guided to the second starting port 315 by the right guide portion 362R, and is dropped from the out port 317. Ejected. That is, the electric support member 36R, like the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above, allows the game ball 99 to enter the first start opening 314 when in the standby position, Entry of the game ball 99 into the 2 starting port 315 is restricted.

As shown in FIGS. 66A and 66B, the electric support member 36R protrudes from the game board 31 when the electric support member 36R is at the operating position. Therefore, the game ball 99 passing through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 is guided toward the penetrating portion 363R by the left guide portion 361R, and the electric support member 36R operates until the game ball 99 reaches the penetrating portion 363R. When it is in the position, the ball passes through the penetrating portion 363R and is entered into the second starting hole 315. As shown in FIG. In addition, the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 is guided toward the penetrating portion 363R by the right guiding portion 362R. , passes through the through portion 363R and is struck into the second starting hole 315. As shown in FIG. That is, the electric support member 36R, like the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above, permits restriction of the game ball 99 to the first starting port 314 when in the operating position, while allowing the second Entry of the game ball 99 into the starting port 315 is permitted. Further, when the electric support member 36R is in the operating position, both the game ball 99 passing through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and the game ball 99 hit to the right side area of the game board 31 are the second Allows the ball to enter the starting port 315.

Also in this embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, retraction guide nails 393 and 394 (retreat guide portions) are provided on the right side of the sorting device 35 . The retraction guide nails 393 and 394 guide the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36R in the direction of retracting from the sorting device 35 . That is, the retraction guide nails 393 and 394 guide the game balls 99 flowing down the right area of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the second starting port 315, so that the electric support member 36R is opened for a short time. It is possible to prevent the game ball 99 in the right area of the sorting device 35 from being guided to the second start port 315 by the electric support member 36R.

Thus, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 , is entered into the first starting port 314 . On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is entered into the second starting port 315 when supported by the electric support member 36R by operating the electric support member 36R, and is driven by the electric support member 36R. If the support cannot be received, the ball is entered into the first starting hole 314 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, a state in which the game ball is entered into the first starting port 314 through the first passage 351, a state in which the game ball 99 is entered into the first starting port 314 through the second passage 352, It can take three states: a state in which a game ball is entered into the second starting port 315 by the second passage 352 or the electric support member 36R. Further, whether the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enters either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 depends on whether or not the electric support member 36R is operated. The operating time and operating frequency of depends on the mode type of the special game state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, not only can be a plurality of states by cooperation of the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36R, game balls distributed to the second passage 352 according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state Since the easiness of entering the second start hole 315 of 99 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machine, and the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, the electric support member 36R of this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, not only restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second start port 315, The presence or absence of the restriction on the entry of the game ball 99 passing through the second passage 352 into the first starting port 314 is switched at the same time. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36R work together to achieve the first start port 314 and the second start port 315. It is possible to change the entrance ball ratio with. As a result, mode A (expected value is 0%), mode C (expected value is 50%), and mode E (expected value is 100%), reduce the monotony of the game based on the three game states with different expected values of the ball entry ratio, and control the operation of the electric support member 36R to create a new game. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with a high degree of interest.

By the way, in the first embodiment described above, a game ball hits to the right like the electric support member 36 passes above the first starting hole 314R and enters the second starting hole 315. FIG. In this case, when the electric support member 36 returns to the standby position at the timing when the game ball passes above the first starting hole 314R, there is a possibility that the game ball hits to the right will enter the first starting hole 314. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game ball hit to the right is guided to the second starting hole 315 by the right guiding portion 362R of the electric support member 36R, the game ball hit to the right is guided to the first starting hole 314 not pass over the Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the first starting hole 314 when hitting to the right.

Note that the through-hole of the electric support member 36R is not limited to a cut-out shape that opens forward, and may be a through-hole that opens only upward and downward without opening in the horizontal direction.

<Thirty-first Embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the plate-shaped electric support member 36 supports the winning of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315 has been described. On the other hand, the present embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the normal electric accessory is configured as an electric tulip. In addition, since the normal electric accessory is configured as an electric tulip, the configurations of the first start port and the second start port are also different from those of the above-described first embodiment.

The thirty-first embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 67(A) and 67(B). Here, FIGS. 67(A) and 67(B) are diagrams showing essential parts of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 and the electric tulip accessory device 36S of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment. 67(A) shows a state in which the electric tulip accessory device 36S is closed, and FIG. 67(B) shows a state in which the electric tulip accessory device 36S is opened.

In the above-described first embodiment, the two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R) having the same function are provided, and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35. , the right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. As shown in FIG. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the second starting port 315 having a different function from the first starting port 314 is located between the first left starting port 314L and the first right starting port 314R. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 provided in the area immediately below the inlet 350 .

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67A and 67B, there is one first starting port 314, and this first starting port 314 introduces the sorting device 35. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 provided in the region immediately below the mouth 350 . That is, the first starting port 314 of this embodiment is provided at the position of the second starting port 315 of the first embodiment described above, and the game balls 99 and the second passage 352 distributed to the first passage 351 Any of the game balls 99 distributed to can win the same first starting port 314 . Further, the second starting port 315 of this embodiment is provided inside the electric tulip accessory device 36S, which will be described later.

The electric tulip accessory device 36S is provided at a position offset to the right from the area directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, and includes a housing 367S fixed to the game board 31, and rotatable left and right feather members 3681S, 3682S.

The housing 367S has an upper opening 369S that allows the left and right feather members 3681S and 3682S to rotate and the game ball 99 to enter. This upper opening 369S is a portion for introducing the game ball 99 into the electric tulip accessory device 36S, and is provided at a position offset to the right from the region immediately below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. That is, the game ball guided to the second passage 352 is restricted from being directly introduced into the upper opening 369S. A second starting port 315 is provided directly below the upper opening 369S. The second starting port 315 is offset to the right with respect to the second passage 352, similar to the upper opening 369S.

A triangular peg 31S composed of three pegs is provided above the upper opening 369S. This triangular peg 31S restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the electric tulip accessory device 36S when the left and right feather members 3681S and 3682S are closed (see FIG. 67(A)). In place of the triangular nail 31S, a single nail may be used to limit the entry of the game ball 99, or a non-nail may be used to limit the entry of the game ball. In addition, by reducing the distance between the tips of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S in the closed state, the game ball 99 is delivered to the electric tulip accessory device 36S when the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are closed. The triangular nail 31S may be omitted if the ball entry can be restricted.

On the right side of the electric tulip accessory device 36S, a road peg 31M' (induction part) made up of a plurality of pegs is provided through a gap that allows the game ball 99 to pass through. The road nail 31M' is provided so as to incline downward to the left, and guides the game ball 99 that is struck to the right side area of the game board 31 and flows down the right side area toward the electric tulip accessory device 36S. Therefore, in a state where the left and right feather members 3681S and 3682S, which will be described later, are opened (see FIG. 67(B)), the game ball 99 is guided by the road nail 31M', and the electric tulip accessory is driven through the upper opening 369S. It is introduced inside the device 36S, and the game ball 99 is entered into the second starting port 315. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S, which will be described later, are closed (see FIG. 67(A)), the game ball 99 guided by the road nail 31M' enters the upper opening 369S by the right wing member 3682S. is limited, passes through the gap between the electric tulip accessory device 36S and the road nail 31M', and is discharged from the out port 317. Also in the present embodiment, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide section by increasing the size of the stage 310 instead of the road nail 31M'.

The left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are rotatable by driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back surface of the game board 31, and the driving means causes the tip portions of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S to approach each other. A state (see FIG. 67(A)) and an open state (see FIG. 67(B)) in which the tip portions of the left and right blade members 3681S and 3682S are separated are switched. The left and right blade members 3681S and 3682S are driven by the MPU 41 in the same manner as the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment. That is, in the normal electric accessory control process (see FIG. 19) in the first embodiment described above, the operation of the normal electric accessory (electric support member 36) causes the opening of the left and right feather members 3681S and 3682S of the present embodiment. Correspondingly, the return of the normal electric accessory (electric support member 36) corresponds to the closing of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S of the present embodiment.

In the closed state of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S shown in FIG. 67(A), the game ball 99 passing through the second passage 352 collides with the side surface of the left wing member 3681S and enters the electric tulip accessory device 36S. can't ball That is, in the closed state of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S, the entry of the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 into the second starting port 315 is blocked by the left wing member 3681S. At this time, the game ball 99 that collided with the side surface of the left wing member 3681S is repelled to the left and falls into the ball receiving portion 391, and is guided to the first starting port 314 by the ball receiving portion 391, thereby leading to the first starting port. Win 314. In addition, the game ball 99 struck in the right area of the game board 31 and guided toward the electric tulip accessory device 36S by the road nail 31M' collides with the side surface of the electric tulip accessory device 36S, and the electric tulip accessory. The ball cannot enter inside the device 36S. At this time, the game ball 99 that collides with the side surface of the electric tulip accessory device 36S passes through the gap between the electric tulip accessory device 36S and the road nail 31M' as described above, and is discharged from the out port 317. .

In the open state of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S shown in FIG. 67(B), the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 is picked up by the left wing member 3681S and enters the electric tulip accessory device 36S. Then, the second starting port 315 is won. In addition, the game ball 99 that flows down the right side area of the game board 31 and is guided toward the electric tulip accessory device 36S by the road peg 31M' bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road peg 31M'. The ball is picked up by the right wing member 3682S, enters the electric tulip accessory device 36S, and wins the second starting port 315. That is, the electric tulip accessory device 36S hits the game ball 99 that has passed through the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and the right side area of the game board 31 when the left and right feather members 3681S and 3682S are in the closed state. Any of the game balls 99 that have been used are allowed to enter the second starting port 315. - 特許庁

Also in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the game balls 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T are guided to the right side of the distribution device 35 in the direction of retreating from the distribution device 35. Retreat guide nails 393, 394 (retreat guide parts) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right area of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second start port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, it is possible to prevent the game balls 99 located in the right area of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

In this way, the electric tulip accessory device 36S of this embodiment, as in the above-described first embodiment, not only restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second start port 315, but also distributes the game ball 99. At the same time, whether or not the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the device 35 is restricted from entering the first starting port 314 is switched. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the distribution device 35 and the electric tulip accessory device 36S (left and right feather members 3681S, 3682S) cooperate with each other to The ball entry ratio between the first starting hole 314 and the second starting hole 315 can be varied. As a result, mode A (expected value is 0%), mode C (expected value is 50%), and mode E (expected value is 100%), reduce the monotony of the game based on the three game states with different expected values of the ball entry ratio, It is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine with new game features depending on the control mode of the operation. In particular, when configured as an electric tulip accessory device 36S, for example, in a game state (for example, mode A or mode C) in which left-handed hitting that hits a game ball to the left side area of the game board 31 is encouraged, the right side area of the game board 31 In order to prevent the game ball 99 from entering the electric tulip accessory device 36S when the game ball is hit to the right, a delay unit (the delay guide 364 of the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above) is provided. ) is not necessary, and a known electric tulip accessory device 36S can be adopted. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has the advantage of being easier to design than the first embodiment described above. In addition, in this embodiment, since only one first starting port 314 is required, compared to the first embodiment described above, one first starting port and one incoming ball sensor can be omitted. The design is easier than the first embodiment, and the manufacturing cost is advantageous.

<Thirty-Second Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 has been described. On the other hand, this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a general winning opening having a different function from the first starting opening is provided directly under the second passage of the sorting device. .

The thirty-second embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. 68(A). Here, FIG. 68(A) is a diagram showing the main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36 of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 68(A), this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that there is one first starting port 314, but this first starting port 314 It is common to the above-described first embodiment in that it is provided immediately below the first passage 351 of . A second starting port 315 having a function different from that of the first starting port 314 is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 which is a region immediately below the introduction port 350 as in the first embodiment. In addition, the electric support member 36 is arranged in series between the left side of the stage 310 below the variable prize winning device 316 and the outlet below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, as in the first embodiment described above. It extends and can move in the front-rear direction of the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. Further, below the second passage 352, a general winning opening 313' having a function different from that of the first starting opening 314 and the second starting opening 315 is provided instead of the first starting opening. That is, the electric support member 36 opens the general winning opening 313' at the standby position, and closes the general winning opening 313' at the operating position. In addition, the electric support member 36 restricts entry of the game ball to the second starting port 315 in the state where the general winning opening 313' is opened at the standby position, and the state where the general winning opening 313' is closed at the operating position. Then guides to the second starting port 315 and allows the game ball to enter the second starting port 315 .

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 are The ball is entered at the starting port 314 . On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is entered into the second starting port 315 when supported by the electric support member 36 by operating the electric support member 36, and the electric support member 36 If the player cannot receive the support from the player, the ball is put into the general winning hole 313'.

Here, the sorting device of the conventional game machine sorts the game balls between the first starting section and the second starting section, and has the disadvantage that the game becomes monotonous. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by hitting left, the state in which the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first start port 314 and the state in which the game ball enters the second passage A state in which the game ball 352 is entered into the general winning hole 313′ and a state in which the game ball in the second passage 352 is entered into the second starting hole 315 by the second passage 352 and the electric support member 36. can take two states. Further, whether the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enters the general winning hole 313' or the second starting hole 315 depends on whether or not the electric support member 36 is operated. The operating time and operating frequency of depends on the mode type of the special game state. Therefore, in this embodiment, not only can be a plurality of states by the cooperation of the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36, game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state Since the easiness of entering the ball into the second starting port 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machine, and the interest of the game is improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the game ball 99 in the second passage 352 can enter the general winning hole 313', thereby providing the game machine 10 with novel game characteristics that cannot be realized in conventional game machines. be. Specifically, for example, in mode A, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enter the first starting port 314, but the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enter the first starting port 314 and The ball is entered into the general prize winning opening 313' without being entered into any of the second starting openings 315. - 特許庁On the other hand, in mode C as latent probability variation, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enters the first start port 314, and the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enters the second start port 315. do. That is, half of the game balls 99 introduced into the sorting device 35 enter the starting port (first starting port 314) and half enter the general winning port 313' in mode A, In mode C, all the game balls 99 are entered into the starting holes (half the first starting hole 314, half the second starting hole 315). Therefore, in mode C, not only the second special figure game that is not performed in mode A is performed, but also if the number of game balls entered in the sorting device 35 is used as a reference, the special figure is double that of mode A. A game is executed. In other words, in mode C (variable latent probability), the chance of receiving a big winning lottery is doubled compared to mode A. As described above, the present embodiment provides the gaming machine 10 which is a new gaming machine that could not be realized by conventional gaming machines.

Also, if the number of prize balls is different between the first start port 314 and the general winning port 313', the increase and decrease of the game balls in the special game can be different from the above-described first embodiment. can also For example, by making the number of prize balls for the general prize winning opening 313' larger than the number of prize balls for the first start opening 314, it is possible to impart a gradual decrease in the number of game balls in the special game. On the other hand, by making the number of prize balls for the general prize winning opening 313' smaller than the number of prize balls for the first start opening 314, it is possible to impart a game property in which the number of game balls in the special game is drastically reduced. In this case, by increasing the number of game balls obtained in the jackpot game, it is possible to make the gaming machine 10 in which the number of game balls increases and decreases rapidly.

<Thirty-third embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 has been described. Also, in the thirty-second embodiment described above, the case where the general prize winning opening 313' is provided directly below the second passage 352 has been described. On the other hand, in this embodiment, neither the first start opening nor the general winning opening is provided directly under the second passage of the sorting device, which is the difference between the first embodiment and the 32nd embodiment described above. different from the form. In addition, in this embodiment, the 2nd starting port is not provided directly under the 2nd path|passage of a sorting apparatus, either.

The thirty-third embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. 68(B). Here, FIG. 68(B) is a diagram showing the main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36 of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 68(B), this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that there is one first starting port 314, but this first starting port 314 is provided immediately below the first passage 351, which is common with the above-described first embodiment, and further common with the 32nd embodiment. In addition, the second starting port 315 and the electric support member 36 of this embodiment are also common to the above-described first and thirty-second embodiments. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, neither the first starting opening nor the general winning opening is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 . Directly under the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, there is not provided a second starting opening having a different function from the first starting opening and the general winning opening, nor a winning opening such as a through gate. In this embodiment, the game ball 99 is guided to the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, and the game ball is allowed to enter the second starting port 315. As in the first embodiment and the thirty-second embodiment, when the electric support member 36 is in the standby position, the game ball 99 in the second path 352 falls along the game board 31, It is different from the first embodiment and the thirty-second embodiment described above in that it is discharged from the out port 317 without winning a prize.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 are A ball is entered into the mouth 314 . On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is entered into the second starting port 315 when supported by the electric support member 36 by operating the electric support member 36, and is driven by the electric support member 36. When the support cannot be received, it is discharged from the out port 317 . Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by hitting left, the state in which the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first start port 314 and the game ball in the second passage 352 is ejected from the out port 317, and a state in which the game ball in the second passage 352 enters the second starting port 315 by the second passage 352 and the electric support member 36. Whether the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is ejected from the out port 317 or entered into the second starting port 315 depends on whether or not the electric support member 36 is operated. The operating time and operating frequency of depends on the mode type of the special game state. Therefore, also in the present embodiment, not only can be a plurality of states by cooperation of the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36, game distributed to the second passage 352 according to the mode type of the special figure game state Since the ease with which the ball 99 enters the second starting hole 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machine, and the interest in the game is improved.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the game ball 99 in the second path 352 is not entered into either the first starting hole 314 or the second starting hole 315, it has a new game property that cannot be achieved in conventional game machines. A gaming machine 10 is provided. Specifically, for example, in mode A, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enter the first starting port 314, but the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 are discharged from the out port 317. be. On the other hand, in mode C, which is a latent probability variable, game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enter the first starting port 314, and game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enter the second starting port 315. be done. That is, half of the game balls 99 introduced into the sorting device 35 enter the starting port (first starting port 314) in mode A and half are discharged from the out port 317, while in mode C All the game balls 99 are entered into the starting holes (half the first starting hole 314, half the second starting hole 315). Therefore, in mode C, not only the second special figure game that is not performed in mode A is performed, but also if the number of game balls entered in the sorting device 35 is used as a reference, the special figure is double that of mode A. A game is executed. In other words, in mode C (variable latent probability), the chance of receiving a big winning lottery is doubled compared to mode A. As described above, the present embodiment provides the gaming machine 10 which is a new gaming machine that could not be realized by conventional gaming machines.

In this embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the second passage 352 is discharged from the out port 317 when there is no support by the electric support member 36. A winning hole may be provided at a distant position so that a game ball passing through the second passage 352 can enter the winning hole.

<Thirty-fourth Embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, the plate-shaped electric support member 36 is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position, thereby leading to the second starting port 315. The case where the entry of the game ball 99 is supported has been explained. In contrast, the present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the electric support member is slid along the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. Also, the first starting port 314 is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the second starting port 315 is provided directly under the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. It differs from the first embodiment described above.

The thirty-fourth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG. Here, FIG. 69(A) is a diagram showing the main part of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36T in the standby state of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 69(B) is a diagram. 69(A) is a perspective view of the main part, FIG. 70(A) is a view showing the main part when the electric support member 36T is at the operating position in FIG. 69(A), and FIG. ) is a perspective view showing a main part of the device.

In the above-described first embodiment, it has two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R), the left first starting port 314L is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the right first A starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 . Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the second starting port 315 is located between the first left starting port 314L and the first right starting port 314R, and is the area directly below the introduction port 350 of the sorting device 35. It is provided in the center of the receiving portion 391 .

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69(A), there is one first starting port 314 , and this first starting port 314 is provided directly below the sorting device 35 . On the other hand, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352 . Further, on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, a road peg 31M' is provided, and on the left side of the peg 31M', an electric support member 36T is provided. The road nail 31M' guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36T. Also in the present embodiment, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide section by increasing the size of the stage 310 instead of the road nail 31M'.

The electric support member 36T has a plate-like shape that is slightly inclined downward to the left, and is movable along the game board 31 along the movement direction of the game ball 99 on the electric support member 36T. Specifically, the electric support member 36T is positioned between a standby position directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and directly above the second starting port 315, and an operating position adjacent to the left side of the trailing nail 31M'. You can move between them. That is, the electric support member 36T can operate between a standby position that closes the second starting port 315 and an operating position that closes the gap between the second starting port 315 and the leading nail 31M'.

As shown in FIGS. 69(A) and 69(B), when the electric support member 36T is at the standby position, that is, when the electric support member 36T is positioned directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and at the second starting port 315 , the electric support member 36T closes the second starting port 315 and restricts entry of the game ball 99 to the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36T is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36T and discharged from the out port 317. As shown in FIG. Further, the electric support member 36T forms a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass between the electric support member 36T and the road nail 31M' when it is in the standby position. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided toward the second operation port 315 by the road nail 31M' passes through the gap between the electric support member 36T (second start port 315) and the road nail 31M', and the out port 317 discharged from

As shown in FIGS. 70(A) and 70(B), when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, that is, when the electric support member 36T is positioned adjacent to the left side of the trailing nail 31M', the electric support The member 36T opens the second starting hole 315 to allow the entry of the game ball 99, and allows the entry of the game ball 99 moving the road nail 31M' to the left into the second starting hole 315. bridge between the road nail 31M' and the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315, and the game ball moving the road nail 31M' to the left is moved to the second position by the electric support member 36T. It moves toward the starting port 315 and is hit by the second starting port 315 . In addition, a plurality of guard nails 31B (two in this embodiment) are arranged as a guard portion on the upper left of the second starting port 315. As shown in FIG. The plurality of nails 31B prevent the game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36T to the second start opening 315 from jumping over the second start opening 315 when the electric support member 36T is at the operating position. be. That is, the game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36T to the second starting port 315 collides with the plurality of guard nails 31B without entering the second starting port 315 directly when the movement speed is high. After that, the ball is entered into the second starting port 315 .

Also in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided to the right side of the distribution device 35 in the direction away from the distribution device 35. Retreat guide nails 393 and 394 (retreat guide parts) are provided to guide game balls 99 flowing down the right area of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second start port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short period of time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 in the right area of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

Thus, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 , is entered into the first starting port 314 . On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is not entered into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36T is at the standby position. In addition, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the lead nail 31M' to the left toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36T is at the standby position, the lead nail 31M ' and the second starting port 315 and discharged from the out port 317 . On the other hand, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, the electric support member 36T bridges between the second start opening 315 and the road nail 31M' with the second start opening 315 opened. A game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 and a game ball 99 moving leftward from the stage 310 toward the second starting port 315 are both entered into the second starting port 315 . Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by hitting left, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first start port 314, and the second passage A state in which the game ball of 352 enters the second starting port 315, and a game ball in the second passage 352 does not enter either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, and is out. Ejection from port 317 can take three states. In addition, the game ball 99 that is hit to the left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is hit to the right and moves on the stage 310 enters the second start port 315 or is discharged from the out port 317. Whether depends on the presence or absence of operation of the electric support member 36T, the operation time and operation frequency of the electric support member 36T depends on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, in this embodiment, not only can be a plurality of states by cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36T, but also the second passage 352 and the second stage 310 according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state Since the easiness of entering the ball into the starting hole 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machine, and the interest of the game is improved.

<Thirty-Fifth Embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, the plate-shaped electric support member 36 is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position, thereby leading to the second starting port 315. The case where the winning of the game ball 99 is supported has been explained. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the electric support member can be rotated in a direction intersecting the game board 31 (in a substantially horizontal plane) between the standby position and the operating position. different from the form. Also, the first starting port 314 is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the second starting port 315 is provided directly under the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. It differs from the first embodiment described above.

The thirty-fifth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 71(A) is a diagram showing the main part of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36U of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 71(B) is FIG. 71(A). It is a figure which shows the principal part of.

In the above-described first embodiment, the two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R) are provided, the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the right first A starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 . Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the second starting port 315 is provided in a region directly below the introduction port 350 of the sorting device 35 between the first left starting port 314L and the first right starting port 314R. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 .

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71(A), there is one first starting port 314 , and this first starting port 314 is provided directly below the sorting device 35 . On the other hand, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352 . Further, a road peg 31M' is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36U is provided on the left side of the peg 31M'. The road nail 31M' guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36U. Also in the present embodiment, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide section by increasing the size of the stage 310 instead of the road nail 31M'.

As shown in FIGS. 71A and 71B, the electric support member 36U has a plate-like shape having a pair of wall portions 361U projecting upward from the edges in the width direction, and is slightly inclined downward to the left. are placed. The pair of wall portions 361U function as guides for guiding the game ball 99 from the right (upstream) end 362 to the left (downstream) end 363 . The electric support member 36U is provided with a rotation shaft 362U, and when a rotational force is input to the rotation shaft 362U from a drive means (not shown) such as a solenoid, the electric support member 36U rotates in a plane view as shown in FIG. (B) are rotated clockwise and counterclockwise. Since the electric support member 36U is in a slightly inclined state, it is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane that is slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal plane.

In addition, the electric support member 36U is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane by controlling the driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and the standby position ( 71(A) and 71(B)) and the operating position adjacent to the left side of the lead nail 31M' (position indicated by two-dot chain lines in FIGS. 71(A) and 71(B)). You can move between them. That is, the electric support member 36U can operate between a standby position that closes the second starting port 315 and an operating position that closes the gap between the second starting port 315 and the leading nail 31M'.

When the electric support member 36U is in the standby position indicated by solid lines in FIGS. When positioned directly above, the electric support member 36U closes the second starting port 315 and restricts entry of the game ball 99 to the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36U is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36U and discharged from the out port 317 . Further, the electric support member 36U forms a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass between the electric support member 36U and the road nail 31M' when it is in the standby position. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided toward the second operation port 315 by the road nail 31M' passes through the gap between the electric support member 36U (second start port 315) and the road nail 31M', and the out port 317 discharged from

On the other hand, when the electric support member 36U is at the operating position indicated by the two-dot chain lines in FIGS. The support member 36U opens the second starting port 315 to allow the entry of the game ball 99, and allows the entry of the game ball 99 moving the road nail 31M' to the left side into the second starting port 315. bridge between the road nail 31M' and the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315, and the game ball moving the road nail 31M' to the left is moved to the second position by the electric support member 36T. It moves toward the starting port 315 and is hit by the second starting port 315 . Also in this embodiment, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, a game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36U to the second start opening 315 is placed on the upper left side of the second start opening 315 for the second start. A plurality of guard nails 31B (guard portions) are provided to prevent jumping over the opening 315. - 特許庁

Also in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided to the right side of the distribution device 35 in the direction away from the distribution device 35. Retreat guide nails 393 and 394 (retreat guide parts) are provided to guide game balls 99 flowing down the right area of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second start port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short period of time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 in the right area of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

Thus, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 , is entered into the first starting port 314 . On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is not entered into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36U is in the standby position. In addition, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable prize winning device 316 moves the lead nail 31M' to the left toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36U is at the standby position, the lead nail 31M ' and the second starting port 315 and discharged from the out port 317 . On the other hand, when the electric support member 36U is in the operating position, the electric support member 36U bridges between the second start opening 315 and the road nail 31M' in a state where the second start opening 315 is opened. The game balls 99 distributed to the second path 352 and the game balls 99 moving leftward from the stage 310 toward the second starting port 315 are both entered into the second starting port 315 . Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by hitting left, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first start port 314, and the second passage A state in which the game ball 352 enters the second starting port 315, and a game ball in the second passage 352 does not enter either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, and is out. Ejection from port 317 can take three states. In addition, the game ball 99 that is hit to the left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is hit to the right and moves on the stage 310 enters the second start port 315 or is discharged from the out port 317. Whether depends on the presence or absence of operation of the electric support member 36U, the operation time and operation frequency of the electric support member 36T depends on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, also in this embodiment, not only can be a plurality of states by the cooperation of the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36U, depending on the mode type of the special figure gaming state, the second passage 352 and the stage 310 Since the easiness of entering the ball into the second start hole 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machine, and the interest of the game is improved.

Note that the electric support member 36U may be arranged horizontally without being tilted with respect to the horizontal plane, and configured to be rotatable along the horizontal plane. In this case, the surface of the electric support member 36U may be provided with a guide portion such as a groove that slopes downward to the left to promote the movement of the game ball 99 toward the second starting port 315 side.

<Thirty-sixth embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, the plate-shaped electric support member 36 is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position, thereby leading to the second starting port 315. The case where the winning of the game ball 99 is supported has been explained. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the electric support member is rotatable in the vertical plane along the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position, which is different from the above-described first embodiment. . Also, the first starting port 314 is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the second starting port 315 is provided directly under the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. It differs from the first embodiment described above.

The thirty-sixth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 72 is a view showing the main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36V of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. In the standby position, FIG. 72(B) shows the electric support member 36V in the intermediate position between the standby position and the operating position, and FIG. 72(C) shows the electric support member 36V in the operating position. .

In the above-described first embodiment, the two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R) are provided, the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the right first A starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 . Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the second starting port 315 is provided in a region directly below the introduction port 350 of the sorting device 35 between the first left starting port 314L and the first right starting port 314R. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, although not shown in the drawings, there is one first starting port 314 as in the thirty-fourth and thirty-fifth embodiments described above. A starting port 314 is provided directly below the sorting device 35 . On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 72(A), the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352 . Also in this embodiment, a road nail 31M' is provided on the left side of the stage 310 (not shown) below the variable winning device 316. An electric support member 36V is provided so as to be rotatable with respect to the upper side. The road nail 31M' guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36V. Also in the present embodiment, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide section by increasing the size of the stage 310 instead of the road nail 31M'.

The electric support member 36V is provided with a rotation shaft 362V, and a rotational force is input to the rotation shaft 362V from a drive means (not shown) such as a solenoid, so that the electric support member 36V moves along the game board 31. The vertical plane is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise in FIGS. 72(A) to 72(C). In addition, the electric support member 36V is rotated in the vertical plane by controlling the drive means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and the standby position ( 72(A)) and an operating position adjacent to the left side of the trailing nail 31M' (solid line position in FIG. 72(C)). That is, the electric support member 36V closes the gap between the standby position (solid line position in FIG. 72A) in which the second starting port 315 is closed and the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'. It is operable between the operating position (solid line position in FIG. 72(C)). The electric support member 36V is inclined slightly leftward and downward at the standby position and the operating position. This makes it easier to move the game ball 99 to the left in the electric support member 36V. However, the electric support member 36V may be arranged horizontally. In this case, the surface of the electric support member 36V is provided with a guide portion such as a groove that slopes downward to the left so that the game ball 99 can be moved toward the second starting port 315 side. may promote movement to

When the electric support member 36V is in the standby position shown by the solid line in FIG. The electric support member 36V closes the second starting port 315 and restricts entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. - 特許庁Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36V is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36V and discharged from the out port 317 . Further, the electric support member 36V forms a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass between the electric support member 36V and the road nail 31M' when it is in the standby position. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided toward the second operation port 315 by the road nail 31M' passes through the gap between the electric support member 36V (second start port 315) and the road nail 31M', and the out port 317 discharged from

On the other hand, when the electric support member 36V is in the standby position indicated by the solid line in FIG. The opening 315 is opened to allow the entry of the game ball 99, and the opening 31M' and the second start opening 31M' are opened so that the opening 31M' of the game ball 99 moving to the left side can enter the second starting opening 315. 2 bridges between the starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315, and the game ball moving leftward on the road nail 31M' is moved to the second position by the electric support member 36V. It moves toward the second starting port 315 and is hit by the second starting port 315 . Also in the present embodiment, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, a game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36U to the second start opening 315 is placed on the upper left side of the second start opening 315. A plurality of guard nails 31B (guard portions) are provided to prevent jumping over the opening 315. - 特許庁

Also in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided to the right side of the distribution device 35 in the direction away from the distribution device 35. Retreat guide nails 393 and 394 (retreat guide parts) are provided to guide game balls 99 flowing down the right area of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second start port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short period of time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 in the right area of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

Thus, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 , is entered into the first starting port 314 . On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is not entered into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36V is in the standby position. In addition, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the lead nail 31M' to the left toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36V is at the standby position, the lead nail 31M ' and the second starting port 315 and discharged from the out port 317 . On the other hand, when the electric support member 36V is in the operating position, the electric support member 36V bridges between the second start opening 315 and the road nail 31M' with the second start opening 315 opened. A game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 and a game ball 99 moving leftward from the stage 310 toward the second starting port 315 are both entered into the second starting port 315 . Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by hitting left, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first start port 314, and the second passage A state in which the game ball of 352 enters the second starting port 315, and a game ball in the second passage 352 does not enter either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, and is out. Ejection from port 317 can take three states. In addition, the game ball 99 that is hit to the left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is hit to the right and moves on the stage 310 enters the second start port 315 or is discharged from the out port 317. Whether depends on the presence or absence of operation of the electric support member 36V, the operation time and operation frequency of the electric support member 36V depends on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, also in this embodiment, not only can be a plurality of states by cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36V, but also the second passage 352 and the stage 310 according to the mode type of the special figure game state Since the easiness of entering the ball into the second start hole 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machine, and the interest of the game is improved.

In this embodiment, the electric support member 36V is stopped at two positions above the second starting port 315 and to the left of the lead nail 31M'. The position where the electric support member 36V stands up shown in B) may be set as the operating position and stopped. At the position where the electric support member 36V stands up, both the second starting opening 315 and the gap between the second starting opening 315 and the trailing nail 31M' are opened at the same time. Therefore, while the game ball 99 in the second passage 352 can enter the second starting port 315, the game ball 99 flowing down the right side of the distribution device 35 and the game ball 99 moving the road nail 31M' entry into the second starting port 315 is restricted by the upright electric support member 36V. As a result, in the game state (mode A to mode C) in which the electric support member 36V is opened for a short period of time, the area to the right of the sorting device 35 is provided without providing a retraction guide part such as the retraction guide nails 393 and 394. It is possible to prevent the game ball 99 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36V.

<Thirty-seventh Embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, the plate-shaped electric support member 36 is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position, thereby leading to the second starting port 315. The case where the entry of the game ball 99 is supported has been explained. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the electric support member is rotatable in a direction intersecting the game board 31 (in a substantially horizontal plane) between the standby position and the operating position. It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that it has a length dimension extending to the left of the road nail 31M'. Also, the first starting port 314 is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the second starting port 315 is provided directly under the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. It differs from the first embodiment described above.

The thirty-seventh embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. FIG. Here, FIG. 73(A) is a diagram showing the main part of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36W at the standby position of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 73(B) is a diagram. 73(A) is a perspective view of the main part, FIG. 74(A) is a view showing the case where the electric support member 36W is in the operating position in FIG. 73(B), and FIG. 74(B) is an electric support member in this embodiment. It is a top view which shows the modification of 36W.

In the above-described first embodiment, the two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R) are provided, the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the right first A starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 . Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the second starting port 315 is provided in a region directly below the introduction port 350 of the sorting device 35 between the first left starting port 314L and the first right starting port 314R. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 .

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73(A), there is one first starting port 314 , and this first starting port 314 is provided directly below the sorting device 35 . On the other hand, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352 . Further, a road peg 31M' is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36W is provided on the left side of the peg 31M'. The road nail 31M' guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36W. Also in the present embodiment, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide section by increasing the size of the stage 310 instead of the road nail 31M'.

As shown in FIGS. 73(A) and 73(B), the electric support member 36W is an elliptical plate material in plan view, and has an elliptical through hole 363W and a closing portion 364W. The electric support member 36W has a length dimension extending from above the second starting port 315 to the left of the road nail 31M', and is arranged in a state of being inclined slightly downward to the left. As a result, the electric support member 36W can properly move the game ball 99 of the road nail 31M' to the second starting port 315 in the operating position. In addition, the electric support member 36W may be arranged horizontally. In this case, a guide portion such as a groove that is inclined downward to the left is provided on the surface of the support member 36W, and the game ball 99 is guided toward the second starting port 315 side. may facilitate the movement of

The through-hole 363W has a minor diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99, and allows the game ball 99 to pass through. Further, the through hole 363W is located between the second start opening 315 and the road nail 31M' when the electric support member 36W is at the standby position, and is located between the second start opening when the electric support member 36W is at the operating position. It is formed at a location where it can be positioned directly above 315 . The shapes of the electric support member 36W and the through hole 363W are not limited to elliptical, and may be other shapes such as circular, oval, and oblong. The closing portion 364W is positioned above the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36W is at the standby position, and is positioned between the second starting port 315 and the trailing nail 31M' when the electric support member 36W is at the operating position. located in between.

The electric support member 36W is provided with a rotating shaft 362W, and when a rotational force is input to the rotating shaft 362W from a drive means (not shown) such as a solenoid, the electric support member 36W intersects the game board 31. 73(B) in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction in FIG. 73(B). In addition, the electric support member 36W is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane by controlling the drive means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and blocks the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, while the through hole 363W becomes the second starting port 315. and the lead nail 31M' (see FIG. 73(B)), and the through hole 363W is located directly above the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 to open the second starting port 315. On the other hand, it is movable between the operating position (see FIG. 74(A)) that bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'. That is, the electric support member 36W is operable between a standby position that closes the second starting port 315 and an operating position that closes the gap between the second starting port 315 and the leading nail 31M'.

When the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, that is, when the closing portion 364W of the electric support member 36W is positioned above the second starting port 315 and the through hole 363W is positioned adjacent to the left side of the trailing nail 31M', The electric support member 36W closes the second starting port 315 with the closing portion 364W to restrict entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 is not entered into the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36W is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36W and discharged from the out port 317 . Further, when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, the through hole 363W is located at a position through which the game ball 99 can pass between the electric support member 36W and the road nail 31M'. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the left side by the road nail 31M' passes through the through hole 363W and is ejected from the out port 317. - 特許庁

On the other hand, when the electric support member 36W is in the operating position, that is, the through hole 363W of the electric support member 36W is positioned directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and directly above the second starting port 315, and the closing portion 364W is When positioned between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M', the electric support member 36W opens the second starting port 315 through the through hole 363W to allow the entry of the game ball 99, and The closing part 364W bridges between the road nail 31M' and the second starting port 315 so that the game ball 99 moving leftward on the 31M' can enter the second starting port 315. - 特許庁Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315, and the game ball moving the road nail 31M' to the left is moved to the second position by the electric support member 36W. It moves toward the starting port 315 and is hit by the second starting port 315 . Also in this embodiment, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, a game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36U to the second start opening 315 is placed on the upper left side of the second start opening 315 for the second start. A plurality of guard nails 31B (guard portions) are provided to prevent jumping over the opening 315. - 特許庁

Also in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the game balls 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T are guided to the right side of the distribution device 35 in the direction of retreating from the distribution device 35. Retreat guide nails 393, 394 (retreat guide parts) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right area of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second start port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, it is possible to prevent the game balls 99 located in the right area of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

Thus, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 , is entered into the first starting port 314 . On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is not entered into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36W is at the standby position. In addition, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable prize winning device 316 moves the road nail 31M' to the left toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36W is at the standby position, the through hole 363W. and falls from between the road nail 31M' and the second starting port 315 and is ejected from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36W is at the operating position, the through hole 363W of the electric support member 36W bridges between the second start opening 315 and the road nail 31M' with the second start opening 315 opened. Therefore, the game ball 99 distributed to the second path 352 and the game ball 99 moving leftward toward the second starting port 315 from the stage 310 with the road nail 31M' both enter the second starting port 315. be balled. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by hitting left, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first start port 314, and the second passage A state in which the game ball 352 enters the second starting port 315, and a game ball in the second passage 352 does not enter either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, and is out. Ejection from port 317 can take three states. In addition, the game ball 99 hit left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball hit right and moving on the stage 310 enter the second start port 315 or are ejected from the out port 317. Whether depends on the presence or absence of operation of the electric support member 36W, the operation time and operation frequency of the electric support member 36W depends on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, also in this embodiment, not only can be a plurality of states by cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36W, but also the second passage 352 and the stage 310 according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state Since the easiness of entering the ball into the second start hole 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machine, and the interest of the game is improved.

As shown in FIG. 74(B), the electric support member 36W has a through portion 363W' such as a notch that opens not only vertically but also partially laterally instead of the vertically open through hole 363W. It may be provided.

<38th Embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, the plate-shaped electric support member 36 is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position, thereby leading to the second starting port 315. The case where the entry of the game ball 99 is supported has been explained. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is rotatable around a rotation axis inclined with respect to the horizontal direction, and has a length dimension from above the second starting port 315 to the left of the road nail 31M'. , is different from the first embodiment described above. Also, the first starting port 314 is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the second starting port 315 is provided directly under the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. It differs from the first embodiment described above.

The thirty-eighth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. FIG. Here, FIG. 75(A) is a view showing the main part of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36X of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 76(A) is a cross-sectional view along the A5-A5 cutting line in FIG. 75(B), FIG. 76(B) is a cross-sectional view along the A6-A6 cutting line in FIG. 75(B), FIG. FIG. 77A shows a main part including the electric support member 36X when the electric support member 36X is at the standby position, and FIG. 77B shows the main part including the electric support member 36X when the electric support member 36X is at the operating position. FIG. 78 is a perspective view showing a modification of the electric support member 36X in this embodiment.

In the above-described first embodiment, it has two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R), the left first starting port 314L is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the right first A starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 . Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the second starting port 315 is provided in a region directly below the introduction port 350 of the sorting device 35 between the first left starting port 314L and the first right starting port 314R. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 .

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75(A), there is one first starting port 314 , and this first starting port 314 is provided directly below the sorting device 35 . On the other hand, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352 . Further, a road peg 31M' is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36X is provided on the left side of the peg 31M'. The road nail 31M' guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36X. Also in the present embodiment, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide section by increasing the size of the stage 310 instead of the road nail 31M'.

As shown in FIGS. 75(A), 75(B), 76(A) and 76(B), the electric support member 36X has a first through portion 361X and a second through portion 362X. 2 It has a length dimension from above the starting port 315 to the left side of the road nail 31M', and is arranged in a state of being slightly inclined downward to the left. Thereby, the electric support member 36X can appropriately move the game ball 99 of the road nail 31M' to the second starting port 315 in the operating position. In addition, the electric support member 36X may be arranged horizontally. In this case, a guide portion such as a groove that slopes downward to the left is provided on the surface of the support member 36W, and the game ball 99 is guided toward the second starting port 315 side. may facilitate the movement of

The first through portion 361X is defined by a pair of protruding pieces 361aX and 361bX facing each other, and opens leftward. The first through portion 361X is located directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, and the game ball 99 enters the second start port 315 by the projecting piece 361aX when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position. (see FIG. 77(A)), and when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position, it penetrates in the vertical direction to allow the game ball 99 to enter the second start port 315 ( See FIG. 77(B)).

The second through portion 362X is defined by a pair of protruding pieces 362aX and 362bX facing each other, and is opened rightward. Also, the second through portion 362X penetrates in a direction orthogonal to the first through portion 361X. The second penetrating portion 362X does not necessarily have to penetrate in the direction perpendicular to the first penetrating portion 362X, and may penetrate in the direction intersecting with the first penetrating portion 361X. The second through portion 362X is located in the gap between the second start port 315 and the road nail 31M', and when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the second through portion 362X penetrates in the vertical direction. Passage of the game ball 99 is allowed in the gap between the opening 315 and the road nail 31M' (see FIG. 77(A)), and the second starting opening is opened by the projecting piece 362aX when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position. The passage of the game ball 99 is restricted between 315 and the road nail 31M' (see FIG. 77(B)).

The electric support member 36X is rotatable around a rotation axis extending substantially horizontally and slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal direction by driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid controlled by the MPU 41 . In addition, the electric support member 36X is rotated by controlling the driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and the first through portion 361X penetrates in the front-rear direction, blocking the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. On the other hand, the standby position (see FIG. 77A) where the second through portion 363W vertically penetrates between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M′ and the first through portion 361X An operating position in which the second passage 362W of the sorting device 35 penetrates in the vertical direction immediately below the second passage 352, while the second penetration portion 362W penetrates in the front-rear direction to bridge between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'. (See FIG. 77(B)). That is, the electric support member 36X is in a standby position in which the second starting port 315 shown in FIG. , and an operating position in which the second starting port 315 shown in FIG. .

As shown in FIG. 77(A), when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the electric support member 36X closes the second starting port 315 to restrict entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. do. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36X is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36X and discharged from the out port 317 . Also, when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the second through portion 362X vertically penetrates between the electric support member 36X and the road nail 31M' so that the game ball 99 can pass therethrough. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the left side by the road nail 31M' passes through the second through portion 362X and is ejected from the out port 317. - 特許庁

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77(B), when the electric support member 36X is at the operating position, the electric support member 36X opens the second starting port 315 to allow the game ball 99 to enter the road. It bridges between the road nail 31M' and the second starting hole 315 so that the game ball 99 moving the nail 31M' to the left side can enter the second starting hole 315. - 特許庁Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315, and the game ball moving leftward on the road nail 31M' is moved to the second position by the electric support member 36X. It moves toward the second starting port 315 and is hit by the second starting port 315 . Also in the present embodiment, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, a game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36U to the second start opening 315 is placed on the upper left side of the second start opening 315. A plurality of guard nails 31B (guard portions) are provided to prevent jumping over the opening 315. - 特許庁

Also in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided to the right side of the distribution device 35 in the direction away from the distribution device 35. Retreat guide nails 393 and 394 (retreat guide parts) are provided to guide game balls 99 flowing down the right area of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second start port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short period of time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 in the right area of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

Thus, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 is entered into the first starting port 314 . On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is not entered into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position. In addition, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the road nail 31M' to the left toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36X is at the standby position, the second penetration It passes through the portion 362X, drops from between the road nail 31M' and the second starting port 315, and is ejected from the out port 317. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position, the first through portion 361X of the electric support member 36X opens the second starting opening 315 and the opening between the second starting opening 315 and the trailing nail 31M'. , and the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball 99 moving leftward from the stage 310 toward the second starting port 315 both pass through the first through portion 361X. The ball passes through and enters the second starting port 315 . Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by hitting left, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first start port 314, and the second passage A state in which the game ball 352 enters the second starting port 315, and a state in which the game ball in the second passage 352 enters neither the first starting port 314 nor the second starting port 315, and exits from the out port 317. It can take three states to be discharged. In addition, the game ball 99 hit left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball hit right and moving on the stage 310 enter the second start port 315 or are discharged from the out port 317. Whether depends on the presence or absence of operation of the electric support member 36X, the operation time and operation frequency of the electric support member 36X depends on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, also in this embodiment, not only can be a plurality of states by the cooperation of the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36X, depending on the mode type of the special figure gaming state, the second passage 352 and the stage 310 Since the easiness of entering the ball into the second start hole 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machine, and the interest of the game is improved.

Instead of the first through-hole 361X and the second through-hole 362X that are partially open not only up and down but also to the sides, the electric support member 36X has a through-hole 361X that is open only up and down as shown in FIG. ', 362X' may be provided, and a through portion that is partially open not only up and down but also sideways and a through hole that is open only up and down may be used together.

Furthermore, in the thirtieth to thirty-eighth embodiments, one first starting port 314 was provided, but two first starting ports are provided in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment. The game ball 99 released from the first passage 351 may be entered by the starting port, and the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 may be entered by the other first starting port 314L.

In addition, in the thirtieth to thirty-eighth embodiments, the same configuration as in the first embodiment described above can be modified in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above. Configurations of the form (see FIGS. 26 to 54) and configurations of modifications thereof can also be employed. For example, in the thirtieth to thirty-seventh embodiments, the rollers 38C of the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 53(A)) and the windmills 38D of the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 53(B)) are used as the distribution section. Rotating body such as, mountain-shaped fixing part 38E of the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 54(A)), triangular nail 38F of the twelfth embodiment (see FIG. 53(A)), and the top nail of the triangular nail 38F A fixed distribution part such as a single chisel can be preferably employed. When such a rotating body or fixed distribution section is employed as the distribution section, the player can read the tendency of distribution by the distribution section between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 (individual differences between game machines). is also possible. As a result, the player can adjust the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 22 to adjust the shooting strength (shooting stroke) of the game ball, thereby finding a shooting stroke that makes it easy for the game ball to be distributed to the second passage 352. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy searching for a shooting intensity that allows game balls to be easily distributed to the second path 352, or to search for a game machine 10 that allows game balls to be easily distributed to the second path 352 from a plurality of gaming machines 10. can be obtained.

[Summary of Invention]
An outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be added below. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding of the corresponding relationship between each additional note and each embodiment, reference numerals and the like may be attached for convenience of explanation, but the invention related to the additional note is limited to the specific configuration attached with the reference numeral. not a thing It is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352) and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are distributed to the distribution section (38). A sorting device (35) that sorts to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by
A first winning port (314L) into which game balls distributed to the first passage (351) can enter;
A second prize winning port (315) that allows a game ball to enter and has a function different from that of the first prize winning port (314L);
A detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352);
Triggered by the detection of the game ball passing through the second passage (352) by the detection means (318), the second winning port (315) of the game ball that passed through the second passage (352) ) from a first position (standby position) where entry of a ball into the second passage (352) is restricted to a second position where entry of a game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) into the second winning port (315) is permitted. A movable accessory member (36) that operates to (operating position);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, the game balls are distributed to the first path and the second path by the distribution device, and when the game balls are distributed to the second path by the distribution device, the movable accessory member Entry of the game ball into the second winning hole is permitted or restricted depending on the presence or absence of operation. Specifically, the game ball distributed to the second path is restricted from entering the second winning hole when the movable accessory member is in the first position where the movable accessory member is not operated. When the movable accessory member is in the second position where it operates, the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole is permitted. In this way, by the cooperation of the sorting device and the movable accessory member, it is possible to vary the ratio of balls entering the second winning hole. As a result, the monotonousness of the game can be reduced, new game characteristics can be realized according to the control mode of the motion of the movable accessory member, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Appendix A2]
A supplementary note characterized by further comprising a third winning port (314R) that can enter the game balls distributed to the second path (352) and has the same function as the first winning port (314L). The gaming machine described in A1.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A2, the sorting device sorts the game balls to the first starting hole and the third starting hole having the same function as the first starting hole. As a result, when the movable accessory member is at the standby position, the game ball is entered into different winning holes (first winning hole and second winning hole) having the same function, thereby further reducing the monotony of the game. New playability can be achieved according to the control mode of the motion of the movable accessory member, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Appendix A3]
The movable accessory member (36) has a longer operating time when satisfying a second condition different from the first condition than the operating time when satisfying the first condition. The gaming machine according to A1 or Appendix A2.

[Appendix A4]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
It is better to hit the game ball in the left area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318), or to the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319). A first game state that is more advantageous to the player than when the ball is hit, and the detecting means (319) preferably hits the game ball to the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detecting means (319). 318), the game state is shifted between a plurality of game states including a second game state that is advantageous to the player compared to the case where the game ball is hit to the left area so that the passage of the game ball is detected. further comprising game state transition means (41),
The first condition is the first game state (mode A, mode C),
The gaming machine according to appendix A3, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

According to the gaming machine according to appendices A3 and A4, the ease with which the game ball enters the third winning hole by the movable accessory member in the case where the first condition is satisfied and the case where the second condition is satisfied are considered different. For example, the operation time of the movable accessory member is changed according to the game state (advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied, even if the movable accessory member is operated, it is difficult for the game ball launched to the right side area to enter the third winning hole. It is possible to set the ease of throwing a game ball into the third winning hole. As a result, in a situation (for example, the first game state) in which left-hand hitting is encouraged to hit the game ball in the left-hand area of the game board, it is disadvantageous to the player if the player hits right-hand by hitting the game ball in the left-hand area of the game board. Therefore, in a situation where left-handed hitting is encouraged, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game by right-handed hitting and promote the progress of the game by left-handed hitting.

[Appendix A5]
Said second winning port (315), the time required for the game ball detected by said other detecting means (319) to enter said second winning port (315) is determined by said detecting means (318) The gaming machine according to appendix A4, characterized in that it is arranged at a position longer than the time required for the game ball to be detected to enter the second winning hole (315).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix A5, the time required for the game ball detected by the detecting means to enter the second winning hole, and the game ball detected by the other detecting means to enter the second winning hole It differs from the time it takes to hit the ball. Therefore, for example, a game ball hit in the left area of the game board is allowed to enter the second winning hole, while a game ball hit in the right area is made difficult to enter the third winning hole. becomes possible. As a result, if the player hits right in a situation where left-handed hitting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player is in a disadvantageous situation, so left-handed hitting is encouraged in situations where left-handed hitting is encouraged. it becomes possible to

[Appendix A6]
The operation time of the movable accessory member (36) in the first game state (mode A, mode C) is such that the game ball detected by the detection means (318) is in the second winning hole (315). ) is allowed to be entered, and the time for restricting the game ball detected by the other detection means (318) from entering the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A4 or Supplementary Note A5.

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A5, it is possible to appropriately restrict entry of a game ball into the second winning hole when hitting to the right in the first game state in which hitting to the left is encouraged. Therefore, if the player hits right in a situation where left-handed hitting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. becomes possible.

[Appendix A7]
The operation time of the movable accessory member (36) in the case of the second game state (mode E) is such that the game ball detected by the other detection means (319) The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A4 to A6, characterized in that it is a time that allows a ball to be landed at .

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A6, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning hole by hitting right in the second game state. Therefore, by hitting to the right in the second game state, it is possible to proceed with the game in a state where the number of game balls hardly increases or decreases.

[Appendix A8]
The movable accessory members (36, 36R, 36S) are
At the first position (standby position), entry of a game ball into one of the second winning port (315) and the third winning port (314R) is restricted, Allows the game ball to enter the other winning opening (315) different from the winning opening (314R),
At the second position (operating position), entry of game balls into one of the winning openings (314R) is permitted, and entry of game balls into the other winning opening (315) is restricted. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A6.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A7, the game ball is allowed to enter one of the second winning opening and the third winning opening depending on whether or not the movable accessory member is operated. a state in which entry of a game ball into the other winning opening is restricted, and entry of a game ball into one of the winning openings is restricted, whereas entry of a game ball into the other winning opening is restricted; Any of the allowed states is realized. Thus, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A7, the movable accessory member not only permits or restricts entry of a game ball into one of the winning openings, but also permits or restricts entry of a game ball into the other winning opening. Permit or restrict at the same time. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game, and to provide a highly interesting game machine with new game features according to the control mode of the motion of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A9]
The movable accessory member (36) is
In the first position (standby position), the third prize winning port (314R) is in the open state, and in the second position (operating position), the opening and closing portion (362) in which the third prize winning port (314R) is in the closed state )When,
Continuing to the opening and closing portion (362), at the first position (standby position), the game ball on the right side of the third winning opening (314R) is restricted from moving toward the opening and closing portion (362), A guide portion (363) that allows movement of the game ball on the right side of the third winning hole (314R) toward the opening/closing portion (362) at the second position (operating position);
The gaming machine according to appendix A2, characterized by having

[Appendix A10]
The opening/closing part (362)
At the first position (standby position), the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is allowed to enter the third winning port (314R), and enters the second winning port (315). limit the ball,
In the second position (operating position), the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is restricted from entering the third winning port (314R), and entering the second winning port (315) allow the ball,
The guide part is
At the first position (standby position), restricting the movement of the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) toward the opening/closing portion (362),
The gaming machine according to appendix A9, characterized in that, in the second position (operating position), a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) is allowed to move toward the opening/closing portion (363). .

According to the gaming machine according to appendices A9 and A10, the movable accessory member has an opening/closing portion capable of opening and closing the third winning opening and a guide portion for moving the game ball on the right side of the third winning opening toward the opening/closing portion. With the simple configuration of providing a single movable accessory member, game balls can be made to enter the third winning port from a plurality of paths. As a result, in a gaming machine employing the sorting device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting gaming machine with new game features according to the control mode of the motion of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A11]
The movable accessory member (36R) includes a first portion (361R) that allows a game ball to enter the second winning port (315) from the left side of the second winning port (315), and the second winning port. The gaming machine according to appendix A1, further comprising a second part (362R) for allowing a game ball to enter the second winning hole (315) from the right side of (315).

[Appendix A12]
The movable accessory member (36R) is
At the first position (standby position), the game ball passing through the second passage is allowed to enter the first start port (314),
In the second position (operating position), the first portion (361R) allows the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) to enter the second winning port (315), and the second The gaming machine according to appendix A11, wherein the portion (362R) allows a game ball hit to the right side area of the game board (31) to enter the second winning hole (315).

In the gaming machine according to appendices A11 and A12, the movable accessory member includes a first portion for entering a game ball into the second prize winning port from the left side of the second prize winning port, and a game ball entering the second prize winning port from the right side of the second prize winning port. With the simple configuration of providing the second part for entering the ball into the second winning hole, one movable accessory member can cause the game ball to enter the second winning hole from a plurality of paths. As a result, in a game machine employing a sorting device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting game machine with new game features according to the control mode of the movement of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A13]
The movable accessory member (36R) is provided between the first part (361R) and the second part (362R), and allows the entry of game balls into the second winning hole (315). further having a penetrating portion (363R),
The game according to appendix A11 or appendix A12, wherein the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R) are inclined so as to become lower toward the through portion (363R). machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A13, both the game ball in the second path and the game ball in the right area can be It can be moved to the penetrating part and entered into the second winning hole.

[Appendix A14]
The movable accessory member (36S) includes a rotatable first movable accessory member (3681S) and a second movable accessory member (3682S),
The tip portions of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) are close to each other at the first position (standby position), and at the second position (operating position). The game machine according to appendix A1, wherein the tips of the are spaced apart.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A14, the movable accessory member is configured as a so-called electric tulip. Therefore, with a simple configuration, the movable accessory member allows or restricts the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening and allows or restricts the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening at the same time.

[Appendix A15]
One of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) is provided below the second passage (352), and at the first position (standby position) the The game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) interferes to move the game ball toward the first winning port (314), and the second passage (352) is moved at the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to appendix A14, characterized in that the game balls that have passed through interfere with each other to move the game balls toward the second winning port (315).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A15, game balls are distributed to the first path and the second path by the distribution device, and the game balls are distributed to the second path by the distribution device as the first movable accessory as the movable accessory member. Entry of a game ball into the first winning hole and the second winning hole is permitted or restricted depending on whether or not the member and the second movable accessory member are operated. In the gaming machine according to Appendix A15, the sorting device and the movable accessory member work together, so that the game ball sorted to the second passage is directed to the second winning hole by the movable accessory member. , and permitting or restricting the entry of game balls into the first winning hole are simultaneously performed. As a result, in a game machine employing a sorting device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting game machine with new game features according to the control mode of the movement of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A16]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) is
Operated from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position) with the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection means (318) or the other detection means (319),
When it is in the second position (operating position), any game ball of the game ball passing through the second passage (352) and the game ball passing through the specific area to the second winning port (315) The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A9, characterized in that entry of a ball is permitted.

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A16, not only the game balls passing through the second path of the distribution device, but also the game balls launched to the right side area of the game board enter the second winning hole by the movable accessory member. can be made Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning hole from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine with new playability.

[Appendix A17]
A supplementary note characterized by further comprising a retraction guiding part (393, 394) provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member (36) and guiding the game ball in a direction away from the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to Appendix A16.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A17, a retraction guide section that guides the game ball in a direction away from the second prize winning opening is provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to appendix A12, for example, in a gaming state in which the operation time of the movable role member is short and the gaming machine is encouraged to be launched in the left area of the game board, the second winning hole in the movable role member Since the game ball can be received at a position away from the game ball, it is possible to secure a long time until the game ball reaches the second winning hole. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second winning hole in a short period of time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the standby position, which is not recommended. When performing, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A18]
The retraction guide part (393, 394) includes the plurality of nails,
The plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner such that the nails farther from the second prize winning port (315) are positioned lower than the nails closer to the second prize winning port (315). The gaming machine according to appendix A11.

According to the gaming machine of appendix A18, the game ball can be guided to the upstream side in the movement direction of the game ball by a simple configuration in which a plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner. Also, in a game machine, since a large number of nails are generally driven into the game board, it is possible to provide a retraction guide section when driving these nails. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and the increase in manufacturing cost due to the provision of the retraction guide part, and to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member when the movable accessory member operates for a short time.

[Appendix A19]
The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball toward the second winning port (315) at the second position, and moves the game ball at the movable accessory member (36). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A18, characterized by having a delay unit (364) for delaying.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A19, the delay part is provided in the movable accessory member that guides the game ball to the second winning hole. Therefore, for example, even if the game ball is received by the movable role member by hitting the right side in a game state where the movable role member is activated for a short time and the left side is encouraged, the game ball is received by the delay unit. It is possible to secure a long time until the ball reaches the second winning hole. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the movable role member from reaching the second winning hole in a short period of time from the start of operation of the movable role member until it returns to the first position. It is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessary member when doing so.

[Appendix A20]
The gaming machine according to appendix A19, wherein the delay section (364, 364A-364C) moves the game ball along a meandering path in the movable accessory member (36, 36A-36C).

[Appendix A21]
The delay part (364D-364H) includes one or more linear projections (364D-364G) or linear recesses ( 364H), the gaming machine according to Appendix A19 or Appendix A20.

[Appendix A22]
Any one of appendix A19 to appendix A21, wherein the delay portions (364I to 364P) are a plurality of discrete protrusions (364I to 364N) or a plurality of recesses (364O, 364P) The game machine described.

[Appendix A23]
The gaming machine according to appendix A22, wherein the plurality of projections (364I to 364N) or the plurality of recesses (364O, 364P) are arranged in a grid pattern.

According to the gaming machine according to appendices A22 and A23, it is possible to delay the movement of the game ball on the movable accessory member by means of the delay section with a simple configuration. For example, when the movable accessory member is formed by resin molding, the delay section can be integrally built into the movable accessory member by resin molding. As a result, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay section.

[Appendix A24]
From appendix A19, wherein the delay part (364Q) is one or more rollers (364Q) having a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball on the movable accessory member (36Q) The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A23.

[Appendix A25]
The game machine according to appendix A24, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) are rotationally driven in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the game ball.

[Appendix A26]
The gaming machine according to appendix A24 or appendix A25, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) apply magnetic force or electromagnetic force to the game ball.

According to the game machine according to appendices A24 to A26, since the movable accessory members are provided with rollers, not only is the design of the game machine improved, but also the behavior of the game ball moving the movable accessory members is improved. Since it becomes easy to draw attention to , interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix A27]
further comprising game state transition means (41) for transitioning a game state when a predetermined state is established between a plurality of game states;
The game state transition means (41) provides a third game state (mode A), a fourth game state (mode C, mode C') and a The gaming machine according to appendix A2, characterized by including a fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E').

The gaming machine according to appendix A27 has three game states, ie, third to fifth game states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio for the second winning hole is different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to appendix A27, it is possible to create new game features with improved game features based on three game states with different expected values of the ball entry ratio to the second winning hole. become.

[Appendix A28]
The third game state is
The game ball hit to the left side area is easy to enter the first winning port (314L) and the third winning port (314R), but is difficult to enter the second winning port (315),
The game ball launched into the right area is difficult to enter any of the first winning port (314L), the second winning port (315) and the third winning port (314R),
The fourth game state is
The game ball hit to the left side region enters the first winning port (314L), the second winning port (315) and the third winning port (314R) as compared with the game ball hit to the right side region. easy to be balled,
The fifth game state is
The game ball hit to the right side area is difficult to enter the first winning hole (314L) and the third winning hole (314R), and the second winning point is compared to the game ball hit to the left side area. The gaming machine according to appendix A27, characterized in that it is easy for a ball to enter the mouth (315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A28, in each of the third to fifth gaming states, the ease with which a ball enters the first, second, and third winning openings depends on the launching area of the game ball with respect to the game board. different. As a result, three game states, ie, the third to fifth game states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first and second winning holes and the third winning hole is different, can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix A29]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) moves from the first position to the second position when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the specific area by the other detection means (319). ,
In the third game state and the fourth game state, it is better to launch a game ball into the left area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318). is advantageous to the player compared to the case of hitting the game ball in the right area so that the passage of the is detected,
In the fifth game state, the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318) when the game ball is launched into the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319). A gaming machine according to appendix A28, which is more advantageous to the player than hitting the game ball to the left side area.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A29, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means or other detection means, the movable accessory member is activated to allow the game ball to enter the second winning hole. to Each of the third to fifth game states has a launch area that is advantageous to the player by using whether or not the movable accessory member is activated. That is, by a simple method using a movable accessory member, it is possible to realize three game states, the third to fifth game states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio to the third winning hole is different.

[Appendix A30]
The first winning port (314L) and the third starting port (314R) transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by the entry of a game ball. Giving the opportunity to make the first special judgment (jackpot lottery) whether or not to let,
The second winning port (315) is a second special determination whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering a game ball. Give an opportunity to do (jackpot lottery),
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix A29, wherein the second special determination has a higher degree of expectation for obtaining a determination result to shift to the second special game than the first special determination.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A30, when the gaming machine enters the first and third start ports and the game ball enters the second start port, the game is shifted to the second special game that is advantageous to the player. Expectations (functions) are different. Therefore, by making the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole, the second winning hole, and the third starting hole different, three game states with different expectations of shifting to the second special game can be realized. As a result, the playability is enhanced, and the amusement of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix A31]
The third game state is
The game ball that is launched into the left region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning port (314L), and the second starting port (315 ) and the third winning hole (314R) is difficult to enter,
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) enter the first winning port (314R) and the second winning port (315). It is difficult to be played, and it is easy to enter the third winning hole (314R),
The fourth game state is
The game ball that is launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning hole (314L), and the second winning hole ( 315) and the third winning hole (314R) is difficult to enter,
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) enter the first winning port (314R) and the third winning port (314L). and is easily entered into the second winning hole (315) when the detection means (318) detects that the game ball passes through the second passage (352),
The fifth game state is
The game ball hit to the right side region is difficult to enter the first winning port (314L) and the third winning port (314R), and the game ball passes through the specific region by the other detection means (319). The gaming machine according to appendix A30, characterized in that a ball is likely to be entered into the second winning hole (315) when it is detected that the game is to be played.

[Appendix A32]
In the third game state and the fourth game state, the game ball launched into the right area is the first winning port (314L), the second winning port (315) and the third winning port (314R). The gaming machine according to appendix A31, characterized in that it is difficult for a ball to enter either of them.

[Appendix A33]
The fifth game state is
The game ball that is launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning hole (314L), and the second winning hole ( 315) and the third winning hole (314R) is difficult to enter,
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) are won in the first winning port (314L) and the third winning port (314R). A supplementary note characterized in that the detection means (318) detects that the game ball passes through the second passage (352), and that the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to A31 or Appendix A32.

In the gaming machine according to appendices A31 to A33, by adopting the sorting device together with the movable accessory member, three types of expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole, the second winning hole, and the third winning hole are different. A game state is realized. Therefore, there are a third game state and a fourth game state in which game balls are launched in the left area and the game is progressed using the sorting device, and a game ball is launched in the right area and the game is played without using the sorting device. A progressing fifth game state can be realized. As a result, the game can be given a wide range, and at the same time, the playability is enhanced, and the interest of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix A34]
Said 4th game state (mode C, mode C') and said 5th game state (mode E, mode E') are compared with said 3rd game state (mode A), said 1st special determination and said 1st 2. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A30 to A33, characterized in that, in the special judgment, there is a high probability of being judged to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state).

[Appendix A35]
A first special symbol game that displays the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening (314L) and the third starting opening (314R) by the first special symbol. A first special symbol display unit (371) to be executed,
A second special symbol display unit ( 372) and
further comprising
The game state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special game state, after the end of the first special symbol game based on the first special determination or the second special determination Move to a special game state,
On the condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole (314L) and the third winning hole (314R) is to shift to the special game state. , to shift to the fourth game state (mode C, mode C') after the end of the special game in the special game state,
On the condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole (315) is to shift to the special game state, the special in the special game state The gaming machine according to appendix A34, wherein the gaming machine is shifted to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the game is finished.

According to the gaming machines pertaining to appendices A34 and A35, for example, there are game characteristics with barriers before transitioning to a special game state in which a large amount of game value is provided, and game characteristics with multiple substantially variable probability continuation rates. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with a variety of playability.

[Appendix A36]
As a result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment,
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first determination result (probability variable jackpot) to be shifted to the fifth game state (mode E, mode E');
A second determination result (normal jackpot) that is shifted to a game state other than the fifth game state (mode E, mode E') after the special game in the special game state is completed;
The gaming machine of Appendix A35, comprising:

[Appendix A37]
The game state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, after the end of the special game triggered by the first special determination or the second special determination, the fourth game Compared with the state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth game state (mode E, mode E'), it is determined to shift to the special game state in the first special determination or the second special determination. Shift to the sixth game state (mode B, mode D) with a low probability,
When the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number in the sixth game state (mode B, mode D), to shift to the first game state (mode A) The gaming machine according to appendix A36, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to notes A36 and A37, as a result of the first special determination or the second special determination, the first determination result of shifting to the fifth game state after the end of the special game, and the fifth state after the end of the special game It includes a second determination result that is shifted to a game state other than the game state. Also, the fourth game state and the fifth game state have a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state in the first special determination or the second special determination than the third game state. There are three game states from third to fifth game states in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first and second winning ports and the third winning port is different, and the first and third winning ports are provided. On the condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the mouth is to shift to the special game state, the state is shifted to the fourth game state after the end of the special game, and the game proceeds to the second winning hole. On the condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball is to shift to the special game state, the state is shifted to the fifth game state after the special game is finished. That is, the game machine having three game states from the first to the third game state can be applied to the probability variable machine including the so-called loop probability variable machine. Then, according to the gaming machine according to appendices A36 and A37, the fifth game state, which is most advantageous to the player, is entered step by step through the fourth game state. That is, in order to shift to the fifth game state that is most advantageous to the player, first shift to the fourth game state, and in the fourth game state, enter the game ball into the second winning hole in the special game determination, The result of the second special judgment must be the first judgment result. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a game property that allows the player to shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player in stages.

[Appendix A38]
Said game state transition means (41), when the result of said first special judgment or said second special judgment is said second judgment result, said The gaming machine according to appendix A37, characterized in that the gaming machine is shifted to the first gaming state (mode A) after the special game is finished.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A38, when the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, the state shifts to the third game state after the end of the special game, so the fourth game state and the fifth game State stay rate is low. On the other hand, in the fourth game state and the fifth game state, it is possible not only to expect the game ball to enter the second winning hole by the support by the movable accessory member, but also to be in the special game state in the first special judgment or the second special judgment. This is a mode with a high probability of being determined to shift to . Therefore, the rate of staying in the fourth game state and the fifth game state is low, so that it has a game property that it is easy to fall to the third game state, but on the other hand, there is a sharpness in the transition of the game state, and the game value that the player can obtain. It is possible to provide a game machine with sharpness in terms of.

[Appendix A39]
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the third game state (mode A) is to shift to the special game state, the first special determination or the second special determination a transition count setting means for setting an upper limit number of transitions to be transitioned to the special game state with the transition to the special game state based on the first time;
The game state transition means (41) shifts to the third game state (mode A) after the end of the special game state of the transition upper limit number set by the transition number setting means (41). The gaming machine according to Appendix A35.

The gaming machine according to appendix A39 has three game states, that is, the third to fifth game states in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole, the second winning hole, and the third winning hole is different, and the transition upper limit Until the number, the transition to the special game state from the first hit continues. That is, a gaming machine having three game states from the third to fifth game states can be applied to a so-called limit machine. Then, on the condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole or the third winning hole is to shift to the special game state, after the end of the special game, the fourth After the special game is completed, the fifth game is played on the condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole is to shift to the special game state. state. That is, the transition destination of the game state after the special game differs depending on whether the trigger is the entry of the ball into the first or third winning opening or the entry of the ball into the second winning opening. Therefore, in the remaining chances of transitioning to the special game state after the first hit, the game characteristics of how to shift to the fifth game state that is most advantageous to the player while leaving as many chances of transitioning to the special game state as possible. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with

[Appendix A40]
The game state transition means (41), the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game in the fourth game state (mode C') or the fifth game state (mode E') is the upper limit number The gaming machine according to appendix A35, wherein the gaming machine is shifted to the third gaming state (mode A) when reaching

[Appendix A41]
Further comprising a special variable ball entry device (82) having a special ball entry section (824) that is opened in the special game,
The game state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the third game state (mode A) is to shift to the special game state, the special in the special game in the special game state On the condition that the game ball enters the ball entering portion, after the special game is completed, the game state is shifted to the fourth game state (mode C'),
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the fourth game state (mode C') is to shift to the special game state, in the special game in the special game state The gaming machine according to appendix A40, wherein the gaming machine is shifted to the fifth gaming state (mode E') after the special game ends on condition that the gaming ball enters the special ball entering section (824). .

In the gaming machine according to appendix A40 and appendix A41, when the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number in the fourth game state or the fifth game state, it is shifted to the first game state. be. That is, a game machine having three game states of the third to fifth game states can be applied to ST machines including so-called V-ST machines. Further, in the gaming machine according to notes A40 and A41, it is necessary to go through the fourth game state in order to shift to the fifth game state, which is most advantageous to the player. That is, in order to shift to the fifth game state, after first shifting to the fourth game state, the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number In the second special symbol game It is necessary that the result of the special determination is to shift to the special game state. Therefore, after the transition from the third game state to the fourth game state, how quickly to acquire the determination result of shifting to the special game state in the second special symbol game, and shift to the fifth game state most advantageous to the player. Determination of how many special game states are shifted until the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number after shifting to the fifth game state. It is possible to provide a game machine having a game feature of whether or not a result is obtained.

[Appendix A42]
A first special symbol game that displays the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening (314L) or the third winning opening (314R) with the first special symbol A first special symbol display unit (371) to be executed,
A second special symbol display unit ( 372) and
When the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole (315) is a specific result (small hit) different from the one to shift to the special game state A game ball can be entered by being activated, and a special entry in which the game state transition means (41) is granted the right to shift to the special game state (2 types of jackpots) by the game ball's entry. a feather accessory device (83) having a ball (833);
further comprising
The game state transition means (41)
Triggered by the fact that the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is to shift to the special game state (one type of jackpot), the state is shifted to the special game state,
On the condition that the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special game state, the fourth game state (mode C) after the end of the special game in the special game state. to
After the operation of the feather accessory device (83) is completed, based on the right to transition to the special game state (2 types of jackpots) granted by the game ball entering the special ball entry section (833) Move to the special game state,
Characterized by shifting to the fifth game state (mode E) after the end of the special game in the special game state that is shifted with the entry of the game ball into the special ball entry section (833). The gaming machine according to Appendix A34.

[Appendix A43]
Said game state transition means (41), in said fourth game state or said fifth game state, when the total number of games of said first special symbol game and said second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number, said The gaming machine according to appendix A42, characterized in that the gaming machine is shifted to a third gaming state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A42 and appendix A43, the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is to shift to a special game state (type 1 jackpot), or the game ball enters the special ball entering section By doing so, the right to shift to the special game state is granted (two types of jackpots), and the state shifts to the special game state. In other words, a game machine having three game states of the third to fifth game states can also be applied to a so-called one-kind-two-kind mixed machine.

[Appendix A44]
It is detected that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352) by the detection means (318), or that the game ball has passed through the specific area is detected by the other detection means (319). Triggered by this, normal determination means (41 ),
The fourth game state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth game state (mode E, mode E') are compared with the third game state (mode A) by the normal determination means (41). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A29 to A41, characterized in that the normal judgment has a high probability that the movable accessory member (36) is to be operated.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A44, the probability that the movable accessory member is determined to be activated in the normal determination by the normal determining means differs between the fourth game state, the fifth game state, and the third game state. As a result, three game states, ie, the third to fifth game states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first and second winning holes and the third winning hole is different, can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix A45]
In the fourth game state (mode C, mode C'), it is detected by the detection means (318) that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352) compared to the third game state (mode A). A game machine according to appendices A27 to A44, characterized in that the time from detection to start of operation of the movable accessory member (36) is short.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A45, in the fourth game state, compared to the third game state, the movable accessory member starts operating after the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage. short time to As a result, three game states, ie, the third to fifth game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole, the second winning hole, and the third winning hole are different, can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix A46]
In the fifth game state (mode E, mode E'), compared to the third game state (mode A) and the fourth game state (mode C, mode C'), the movable accessory member (36) The game machine according to any one of appendices A27 to A45, characterized in that the operation time of the is long.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A46, the operating time of the movable accessory member is longer in the fifth game state than in the second game state and the third game state. As a result, three game states, ie, the third to fifth game states in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first and second winning holes and the third winning hole is different, can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix A47]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A40, characterized in that the distribution part (38) is fixed at a position where game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) interfere.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A47, the sorting portion of the sorting device is fixed at a position where game balls introduced from the inlet interfere with each other. Therefore, the player can read the tendency (individual difference between game machines) of sorting between the first passage and the second passage by the sorting section. As a result, the player can adjust the launch position of the game ball through trial and error to find the launch position of the game ball that allows the game ball to be easily distributed to the second passage. The enjoyment of searching for the launching position of the game ball where the game ball is easily distributed, or when a plurality of game machines of the same type are installed in the island facility of the game hall, the game ball is thrown from those game machines to the second passage. It is possible to obtain the enjoyment of searching for an easy-to-understand game machine.

[Appendix A48]
The game machine according to appendix A47, wherein the allocating parts (38D, 38F) have fixed parts (381D, 389F) that are immovable and non-rotatable.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A48, it is determined by accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball against the fixed part. Therefore, the game balls are randomly distributed to the first path and the second path by an accidental factor, thereby reducing the monotony of the game and improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix A49]
The gaming machine according to appendix A48, wherein one end of the fixed portion (381D, 389F) is fixed, and at least a part of the portion other than the one end is plastically deformable.

[Appendix A50]
The game machine according to appendix A49, wherein the fixed portion (381D, 389F) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix A51]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A48 to A50, wherein the fixing parts (381D, 389F) are nails.

In the game machine according to appendices A49 to A51, since at least a part of the fixing portion of the distribution portion is plastically changeable, the fixing portion is returned to the initial setting position when the position of the fixing portion deviates from the initial setting position. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion.

[Appendix A52]
The distribution part (38F) has a plurality of nails,
A48 to A51, wherein the plurality of nails are arranged bilaterally symmetrically with one nail at the top and a vertical line passing through the one nail as an axis of symmetry in a front view. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A52, by adjusting the peg on the top, it is possible to improve the deviation of the allocation ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed part.

[Appendix A53]
The distribution section (38E) has a rotating body (382D) rotatably fixed by the fixing section (381D),
The rotating body (382D) is a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and a direction opposite to the first direction, and is directed toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A48 to A52, wherein the gaming machine is rotatable in the second direction for moving the ball.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A53, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it is possible to select from various patterns and design the distribution pattern of the game balls to the first path and the second path. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix A54]
The gaming machine according to appendix A53, wherein the rotating body (382D) is freely rotatable in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix A55]
Said distribution part (38C) is a first direction to move the game ball toward said first passage (351), and a direction opposite to said first direction, toward said second passage (352) A game machine according to appendix A54, characterized in that it is a roller fixed so as to be freely rotatable in the second direction for moving the game ball.

In the game machines according to appendices A54 and A55, rotating bodies such as freely rotatable rollers are employed as the distribution section, and even with these rotating bodies, accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball against the rotating bodies determined by Therefore, the game balls are randomly distributed to the first path and the second path by an accidental factor, thereby reducing the monotony of the game and improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix B1]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352) and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are distributed to the distribution section (38). A sorting device (35) that sorts to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by
A first winning hole (314) into which game balls distributed to the first passage (351) and game balls distributed to the second passage (352) can enter;
A second prize winning port (315) that allows a game ball to enter and has a function different from that of the first prize winning port (314);
A detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352);
Triggered by the detection of the game ball passing through the second passage (352) by the detection means (318), the second winning port (315) of the game ball that passed through the second passage (352) ) to a second position where the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is allowed to enter the second winning port (315). Accessory member (36);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, the game balls are distributed to the first path and the second path by the distribution device, and when the game balls are distributed to the second path by the distribution device, the movable accessory member Entry of the game ball into the second winning hole is permitted or restricted depending on the presence or absence of operation. Specifically, the game balls distributed to the second path are restricted from entering the second winning hole when the movable accessory member is in a standby position in which the movable accessory member is not in operation. A game ball is permitted to enter the second winning hole when the accessory member is in the operating position. In this way, by cooperating with the sorting device and the movable accessory member, it is possible to change the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole. As a result, in a gaming machine in which both the game balls distributed to the first passage and the game balls distributed to the second passage can enter the same first winning hole, the monotonousness of the game is reduced and the game ball is movable. It is possible to realize new playability according to the control mode of the action of the accessory member, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix B2]
The movable accessory member (36) has a longer operating time when satisfying a second condition different from the first condition than the operating time when satisfying the first condition. The gaming machine described in B1.

[Appendix B3]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
It is better to hit the game ball in the left area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318), or to the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319). A first game state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case of hitting a ball, and the detecting means (319) to hit the game ball in the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detecting means (319). 318), the game state is shifted between a plurality of game states including a second game state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the game ball is hit to the left area so that the passage of the game ball is detected. further comprising game state transition means (41),
The first condition is the first game state (mode A, mode C),
The gaming machine according to appendix B2, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

According to the gaming machines according to appendices B2 and B3, the ease of entry of a game ball into the second winning hole by the movable accessory member in the case where the first condition is satisfied and the case where the second condition is satisfied are considered different. For example, the operation time of the movable accessory member is changed according to the game state (advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied, if the movable accessory member is operated, it is difficult for the game ball launched to the right side area to enter the second winning hole. It is possible to set the ease of throwing a game ball into the second winning hole. As a result, if the player hits right in a situation where left-handed hitting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player is in a disadvantageous situation, so left-handed hitting is encouraged in situations where left-handed hitting is encouraged. it becomes possible to

[Appendix B4]
Said second winning port (315), the time required for the game ball detected by said other detecting means (319) to enter said second winning port (315) is determined by said detecting means (318) The gaming machine according to appendix B3, characterized in that it is arranged at a position longer than the time required for the game ball to be detected to enter the second winning hole (315).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix B4, the time required for the game ball detected by the detecting means to enter the second winning hole, and the game ball detected by the other detecting means to enter the second winning hole It differs from the time it takes to hit the ball. Therefore, for example, a game ball hit in the left area of the game board is allowed to enter the second winning hole, while a game ball hit in the right area is made difficult to enter the second winning hole. becomes possible. As a result, if the player hits right in a situation where left-handed hitting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player is in a disadvantageous situation, so left-handed hitting is encouraged in situations where left-handed hitting is encouraged. it becomes possible to

[Appendix B5]
The operation time of the movable accessory member (36) in the first game state (mode A, mode C) is such that the game ball detected by the detection means (318) is in the second winning hole (315). ) is the time to allow the ball to be entered and to limit the game ball detected by the other detection means (318) from entering the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to appendix B3 or appendix B4.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix B5, it is possible to appropriately restrict entry of a game ball into the second winning hole when hitting to the right in the first game state in which hitting to the left is encouraged. Therefore, if the player hits right in a situation where left-handed hitting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. becomes possible.

[Appendix B6]
The operation time of the movable accessory member (36) in the case of the second game state (mode E) is such that the game ball detected by the other detection means (319) The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B3 to B5, characterized in that it is a time when a ball is allowed to be landed at .

According to the gaming machine according to appendix B6, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning hole by hitting right in the second game state. Therefore, by hitting to the right in the second game state, it is possible to proceed with the game in a state where the number of game balls hardly increases or decreases.

[Appendix B7]
The movable accessory members (36, 36R, 36S) are
At the first position (standby position), the game ball is allowed to enter the first winning port (314), and the entering of the game ball to the second winning port (315) is restricted,
In the second position (operating position), the entry of game balls into the first winning port (314) is restricted, and the acceptance of gaming balls into the second winning port (315) is restricted. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B6.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B7, the entry of a game ball into one of the second winning hole and the third winning hole is permitted depending on whether or not the movable accessory member is operated. a state in which entry of a game ball into the other winning opening is restricted, and entry of a game ball into one of the winning openings is restricted, whereas entry of a game ball into the other winning opening is restricted; Any of the allowed states is realized. Thus, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A7, the movable accessory member not only permits or restricts entry of a game ball into one of the winning openings, but also permits or restricts entry of a game ball into the other winning opening. Permit or restrict at the same time. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game, and to provide a highly interesting game machine with new game features according to the control mode of the motion of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix B8]
The movable accessory member (36R) includes a first portion (361R) that allows a game ball to enter the second winning port (315) from the left side of the second winning port (315), and the second winning port. A gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B7, characterized in that it has a second part (362R) that allows a game ball to enter the second winning hole (315) from the right side of (315). .

[Appendix B9]
The movable accessory member (36R) is
At the first position (standby position), the game ball passing through the second passage is allowed to enter the first start port (314),
In the second position (operating position), the first portion (361R) allows the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) to enter the second winning port (315), and the second The gaming machine according to appendix B8, wherein the portion (362R) allows a game ball hit to the right side area of the game board (31) to enter the second winning hole (315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B8 and appendix B9, the movable accessory member includes the first portion for entering the game ball into the second winning port from the left side of the second winning port, and the game ball from the right side of the second winning port. With the simple configuration of providing the second part for entering the ball into the second winning hole, one movable accessory member can cause the game ball to enter the second winning hole from a plurality of paths. As a result, in a game machine employing a sorting device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting game machine with new game features according to the control mode of the movement of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix B10]
The movable accessory member (36R) is provided between the first part (361R) and the second part (362R), and allows the entry of game balls into the second winning hole (315). further having a penetrating portion (363R),
The game according to appendix B8 or appendix B9, wherein the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R) are inclined so as to become lower toward the through portion (363R). machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B10, the simple configuration of providing a through portion between the first portion and the second portion having different inclination states allows both the game ball in the second path and the game ball in the right area to It can be moved to the penetrating part and entered into the second winning hole.

[Appendix B11]
The movable accessory member (36S) includes a rotatable first movable accessory member (3681S) and a second movable accessory member (3682S),
The tip portions of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) are close to each other at the first position (standby position), and at the second position (operating position). The game machine according to appendix B7, wherein the tips of the are spaced apart.

In the game machine according to Appendix B11, the movable accessory member is configured as a so-called electric tulip. Therefore, with a simple configuration, the movable accessory member allows or restricts the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening and allows or restricts the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening at the same time.

[Appendix B12]
One of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) is provided below the second passage (352), and at the first position (standby position) the The game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) interferes to move the game ball toward the first winning port (314), and the second passage (352) is moved at the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to appendix B11, characterized in that the game balls that have passed through interfere with each other to move the game balls toward the second winning port (315).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B12, game balls are distributed to the first path and the second path by the distribution device, and the game balls are distributed to the second path by the distribution device as the first movable accessory as the movable accessory member. Entry of a game ball into the first winning hole and the second winning hole is permitted or restricted depending on whether or not the member and the second movable accessory member are operated. In the gaming machine according to Appendix B12, the sorting device cooperates with the movable accessory member so that the game ball sorted to the second passage is directed to the second winning port by the movable accessory member. , and permitting or restricting the entry of game balls into the first winning hole are simultaneously performed. As a result, in a gaming machine employing the sorting device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting gaming machine with new game features according to the control mode of the motion of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix B13]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) is
Operated from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position) with the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection means (318) or the other detection means (319),
When it is in the second position, any of the game balls passing through the second passage (352) and the game balls passing through the specific area are allowed to enter the third winning port (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B12, characterized in that

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix B13, not only the game balls passing through the second path of the distribution device, but also the game balls launched to the right side area of the game board enter the second winning opening by the movable accessory member. can be made Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning hole from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine with new playability.

[Appendix B14]
A supplementary note characterized by further comprising a retraction guiding part (393, 394) provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member (36) and guiding the game ball in a direction away from the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B13.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B14, a retraction guide section that guides the game ball in a direction away from the second prize winning opening is provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to appendix B14, for example, in a gaming state in which the operation time of the movable role member is short and the gaming machine is encouraged to be launched in the left area of the game board, the second winning hole in the movable role member Since the game ball can be received at a position away from the game ball, it is possible to secure a long time until the game ball reaches the second winning hole. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second winning hole in a short period of time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the standby position, which is not recommended. When performing, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix B15]
The retraction guide part (393, 394) includes the plurality of nails,
The plurality of nails are characterized in that they are arranged in an inclined manner such that the nails farther from the second prize winning port (315) are positioned lower than the nails on the side closer to the second prize winning port (315). The gaming machine according to appendix B14.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix B15, the game ball can be guided to the upstream side in the movement direction of the game ball by a simple configuration in which a plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner. Also, in a game machine, since a large number of nails are generally driven into the game board, it is possible to provide a retraction guide section when driving these nails. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and the increase in manufacturing cost due to the provision of the retraction guide part, and to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member when the movable accessory member operates for a short time.

[Appendix B16]
The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball toward the second winning port (315) at the second position, and moves the game ball at the movable accessory member (36). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B15, characterized by having a delay unit (364) for delaying.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B16, the delay part is provided in the movable accessory member that guides the game ball to the second winning hole. Therefore, for example, even if the game ball is received by the movable role member by hitting the right side in a game state where the movable role member is activated for a short time and the left side is encouraged, the game ball is received by the delay unit. It is possible to secure a long time until the ball reaches the second winning hole. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second winning hole in a short period of time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member until it returns to the first position. It is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessary member when doing so.

[Appendix B17]
The gaming machine according to appendix B16, wherein the delay section (364, 364A-364C) moves the game ball along a meandering path in the movable accessory member (36, 36A-36C).

[Appendix B18]
The delay part (364D-364H) includes one or more linear projections (364D-364G) or linear recesses ( 364H), the gaming machine according to Appendix B16 or Appendix B17.

[Appendix B19]
Any one of Appendix B16 to Appendix B18, wherein the delay portions (364I to 364P) are a plurality of protrusions (364I to 364N) or a plurality of recesses (364O, 364P) discretely arranged. The game machine described.

[Appendix B20]
The gaming machine according to appendix B19, wherein the plurality of projections (364I to 364N) or the plurality of recesses (364O, 364P) are arranged in a grid pattern.

According to the gaming machine according to appendices B17 to B20, it is possible to delay the movement of the game ball on the movable accessory member by means of the delay section with a simple configuration. For example, when the movable accessory member is formed by resin molding, the delay section can be integrally built into the movable accessory member by resin molding. As a result, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay section.

[Appendix B21]
From appendix B16, wherein the delay part (364Q) is one or more rollers (364Q) having a rotating shaft extending in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball on the movable accessory member (36Q) The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix B20.

[Appendix B22]
The game machine according to appendix B21, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) are rotationally driven in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the game ball.

[Appendix B23]
The game machine according to appendix B21 or appendix B22, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) apply magnetic force or electromagnetic force to the game ball.

According to the game machine according to appendices B21 to B23, since the movable accessory members are provided with rollers, not only is the design of the game machine improved, but also the behavior of the game ball moving the movable accessory members. Since it becomes easy to draw attention to , interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix B24]
further comprising game state transition means (41) for transitioning a game state when a predetermined state is established between a plurality of game states;
The game state transition means (41) provides a third game state (mode A), a fourth game state (mode C, mode C') and a The gaming machine according to appendix B1, characterized by including a fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E').

The gaming machine according to appendix B24 has three game states, ie, third to fifth game states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio for the second winning hole is different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to appendix B24, it is possible to create new game features with improved game features based on three game states with different expected values of the ball entry ratio to the second winning hole. become.

[Appendix B25]
The third game state is
The game ball launched to the left side area is likely to enter the first winning port (314), but is difficult to enter the second winning port (315),
The game ball launched into the right area is difficult to enter the first winning hole (314) and the second winning hole (315),
The fourth game state is
The game ball hit to the left side area is more likely to enter the first winning hole (314) and the second winning hole (315) than the game ball hit to the right side area,
The fifth game state is
A game ball hit to the right side area is difficult to enter the first winning hole (314), and more likely to enter the second winning hole (315) than a game ball hit to the left side area. The gaming machine according to appendix B24, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix B25, in each of the third to fifth game states, the ease with which the ball enters the first winning hole and the second winning hole differs depending on the launching area of the game ball with respect to the game board. As a result, three game states, ie, the third to fifth game states, in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different, can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix B26]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) moves from the first position to the second position when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the specific area by the other detection means (319). ,
In the third game state and the fourth game state, it is better to launch a game ball into the left area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318). is advantageous to the player compared to the case of hitting the game ball in the right area so that the passage of the is detected,
In the fifth game state, the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318) when the game ball is launched into the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319). The gaming machine according to appendix B25, which is advantageous to the player compared to the case where the game ball is hit to the left side area.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B26, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means or other detection means, the movable accessory member is activated to allow the game ball to enter the second winning hole. to Each of the third to fifth game states has a launch area that is advantageous to the player by using whether or not the movable accessory member is activated. That is, by a simple method using a movable accessory member, it is possible to realize three game states, the third to fifth game states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio to the second winning hole is different.

[Appendix B27]
The first winning port (314R) is a first special determination whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering a game ball. Give an opportunity to do (jackpot lottery),
The second winning port (315) is a second special determination whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering a game ball. Give an opportunity to do (jackpot lottery),
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix B26, wherein the second special determination has a higher degree of expectation than the first special determination for obtaining a determination result for shifting to the second special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B27, the degree of expectation (function) of shifting to the second special game advantageous to the player by entering the game machine ball into the first start hole and entering the game ball into the second start hole is different. Therefore, by differentiating the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second starting hole, it is possible to realize three game states with different degrees of expectation for shifting to the second special game. As a result, the playability is enhanced, and the amusement of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix B28]
The third game state is
The game ball that is launched into the left region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning port (314L), and the second starting port (3145 ) is difficult to enter,
The game ball that is launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning port (314), and the second winning port ( 315) is difficult to enter,
The fourth game state is
The game ball that is launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning port (314), and the second winning port ( 315) is difficult to enter,
The game ball that is launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) is difficult to enter the first winning port (314), and the detection means (318) By detecting that the game ball passes through the second passage (352), it is easy for the ball to enter the third winning port (315),
The fifth game state is
The game ball hit to the right side area is difficult to enter the first winning hole (314), and the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball passes through the specific area. The gaming machine according to appendix B27, characterized in that the ball is likely to be entered into the second winning hole (315).

[Appendix B29]
The third game state and the fourth game state are characterized in that the game balls launched into the right side area are difficult to enter the first winning hole (314) and the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to Appendix B28.

[Appendix B30]
The fifth game state is
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) enter the first winning port (314) and the second winning port (315). hard to be
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) are unlikely to enter the first winning port (314), and the detection means (318) The gaming machine according to appendix B28 or appendix B29, characterized in that the game ball is likely to enter the second winning port (315) triggered by the detection of the game ball passing through the second passage (352). .

In the gaming machine according to appendices B28 to B30, by adopting the sorting device together with the movable accessory member, three game states with different expected values of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole are realized. be. Therefore, there are a third game state and a fourth game state in which game balls are launched in the left area and the game is progressed using the sorting device, and a game ball is launched in the right area and the game is played without using the sorting device. A progressing fifth game state can be realized. As a result, the game can be given a wide range, and at the same time, the playability is enhanced, and the interest of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix B31]
Said 4th game state (mode C, mode C') and said 5th game state (mode E, mode E') are compared with said 3rd game state (mode A), said 1st special determination and said 1st 2. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B27 to B30, characterized in that, in the special judgment, there is a high probability that the special game state (jackpot game state) is determined.

[Appendix B32]
A first special symbol display unit ( 371) and
A second special symbol display unit ( 372) and
further comprising
The game state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special game state, after the end of the first special symbol game based on the first special determination or the second special determination Move to a special game state,
On the condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole (314) is to shift to the special game state, the special in the special game state After the game is completed, the game state is shifted to the fourth game state (mode C, mode C'),
On the condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole (315) is to shift to the special game state, the special in the special game state The gaming machine according to appendix B31, wherein the gaming machine is shifted to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the game is finished.

According to the gaming machines pertaining to appendices B31 and B32, for example, there are game characteristics with obstacles before transitioning to a special game state in which a large amount of game value is awarded, and game characteristics with a plurality of substantially variable probability continuation rates. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with a variety of playability.

[Appendix B33]
As a result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment,
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first determination result (probability variable jackpot) to be shifted to the fifth game state (mode E, mode E');
A second determination result (normal jackpot) that is shifted to a game state other than the fifth game state (mode E, mode E') after the special game in the special game state is completed;
The gaming machine according to appendix B32, comprising:

[Appendix B34]
The game state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, after the end of the special game triggered by the first special determination or the second special determination, the fourth game Compared with the state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth game state (mode E, mode E'), it is determined to shift to the special game state in the first special determination or the second special determination. Shift to the sixth game state (mode B, mode D) with a low probability,
When the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number in the sixth game state (mode B, mode D), to shift to the first game state (mode A) The gaming machine according to appendix B33, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Notes B33 and Supplementary Note B34, as a result of the first special determination or the second special determination, the first determination result of shifting to the fifth game state after the end of the special game, and the fifth state after the end of the special game It includes a second determination result that is shifted to a game state other than the game state. Also, the fourth game state and the fifth game state have a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state in the first special determination or the second special determination than the third game state. There are three game states from third to fifth game states in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole is different, and the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole is triggered. On the condition that the result of the first special determination is to shift to the special game state, the game state is shifted to the fourth game state after the special game is finished, and the game ball enters the second winning hole as a trigger. On the condition that the result of the second special determination is to shift to the special game state, the state is shifted to the fifth game state after the special game is finished. That is, the game machine having three game states from the first to the third game state can be applied to the probability variable machine including the so-called loop probability variable machine. Then, according to the gaming machine according to appendices B33 and B34, the fifth game state, which is most advantageous to the player, is entered step by step through the fourth game state. That is, in order to shift to the fifth game state that is most advantageous to the player, first shift to the fourth game state, and in the fourth game state, enter the game ball into the second winning hole in the special game determination, The result of the second special judgment must be the first judgment result. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a game property that allows the player to shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player in stages.

[Appendix B35]
Said game state transition means (41), when the result of said first special judgment or said second special judgment is said second judgment result, said The gaming machine according to appendix B34, characterized in that the gaming machine is shifted to the first gaming state (mode A) after the special game is finished.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B35, when the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, the state shifts to the third game state after the end of the special game, so the fourth game state and the fifth game State stay rate is low. On the other hand, in the fourth game state and the fifth game state, it is possible not only to expect the game ball to enter the second winning hole by the support by the movable accessory member, but also to be in the special game state in the first special judgment or the second special judgment. This is a mode with a high probability of being determined to shift to . Therefore, the rate of staying in the fourth game state and the fifth game state is low, so that while the game property is easy to fall to the third game state, there is a sharpness in the transition of the game state, and the game value obtained by the player. It is possible to provide a game machine with sharpness in terms of.

[Appendix B36]
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the third game state (mode A) is to shift to the special game state, the first special determination or the second special determination a transition count setting means for setting an upper limit number of transitions to be transitioned to the special game state with the transition to the special game state based on the first time;
The game state transition means (41) shifts to the third game state (mode A) after the end of the special game state of the transition upper limit number set by the transition number setting means (41). The gaming machine according to Appendix B32.

The gaming machine according to appendix B36 has three game states, ie, third to fifth game states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole is different, and up to the transition upper limit number, the first winning The transition from to the special game state continues. That is, a gaming machine having three game states from the third to fifth game states can be applied to a so-called limit machine. Then, on the condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole is to shift to the special game state, the state is shifted to the fourth game state after the special game is completed. , On the condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole is to shift to the special game state, the state is shifted to the fifth game state after the special game is completed. . That is, the transition destination of the game state after the special game differs depending on whether the trigger is the entry of the ball into the first winning hole or the entry of the ball into the second winning hole. Therefore, in the remaining opportunities to transition to the special game state after the first hit, the game property is determined by how many transition opportunities to the special game state are left to shift to the fifth game state that is most advantageous to the player. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with

[Appendix B37]
The game state transition means (41), the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game in the fourth game state (mode C') or the fifth game state (mode E') is the upper limit number The gaming machine according to appendix B32, wherein the gaming machine is shifted to the third gaming state (mode A) when reaching

[Appendix B38]
Further comprising a special variable ball entry device (82) having a special ball entry section (824) that is opened in the special game,
The game state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the third game state (mode A) is to shift to the special game state, the special in the special game in the special game state On the condition that the game ball enters the ball entering portion, after the special game is completed, the game state is shifted to the fourth game state (mode C'),
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the fourth game state (mode C') is to shift to the special game state, in the special game in the special game state The gaming machine according to appendix B37, characterized by shifting to the fifth gaming state (mode E') after the special game is completed on condition that the game ball enters the special ball entering section (824). .

In the gaming machine according to appendix B37 and appendix B38, when the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number in the fourth game state or the fifth game state, it is shifted to the first game state. be. That is, a game machine having three game states of the third to fifth game states can be applied to ST machines including so-called V-ST machines. Further, in the gaming machines according to appendices B37 and B38, it is necessary to go through the fourth game state in order to shift to the fifth game state, which is most advantageous to the player. That is, in order to shift to the fifth game state, after first shifting to the fourth game state, the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number In the second special symbol game It is necessary that the result of the special determination is to shift to the special game state. Therefore, after the transition from the third game state to the fourth game state, how quickly to acquire the determination result of shifting to the special game state in the second special symbol game, and shift to the fifth game state most advantageous to the player. Determination of how many special game states are shifted until the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number after shifting to the fifth game state. It is possible to provide a game machine having a game feature of whether or not a result is obtained.

[Appendix B39]
A first special symbol display unit ( 371) and
A second special symbol display unit ( 372) and
When the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole (315) is a specific result (small hit) different from the one to shift to the special game state A game ball can be entered by being activated, and a special entry in which the game state transition means (41) is granted the right to shift to the special game state (2 types of jackpots) by the game ball's entry. a feather accessory device (83) having a ball (833);
further comprising
The game state transition means (41)
Triggered by the fact that the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is to shift to the special game state (one type of jackpot), the state is shifted to the special game state,
On the condition that the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special game state, the fourth game state (mode C) after the end of the special game in the special game state. to
After the operation of the feather accessory device (83) is completed, based on the right to transition to the special game state (2 types of jackpots) granted by the game ball entering the special ball entry section (833) Move to the special game state,
Characterized by shifting to the fifth game state (mode E) after the end of the special game in the special game state that is shifted with the entry of the game ball into the special ball entry section (833). The gaming machine according to Appendix B28.

[Appendix B40]
Said game state transition means (41), in said fourth game state or said fifth game state, when the total number of games of said first special symbol game and said second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number, said The game machine according to appendix B39, characterized in that the game machine is shifted to a third game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B39 and appendix B40, the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is to shift to the special game state (1st kind jackpot), or the game ball enters the special ball entering section By doing so, the right to shift to the special game state is granted (2 types of jackpots), and the state shifts to the special game state. In other words, a game machine having three game states of the third to fifth game states can also be applied to a so-called one-kind-two-kind mixed machine.

[Appendix B41]
It is detected that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352) by the detection means (318), or that the game ball has passed through the specific area is detected by the other detection means (319). Triggered by this, normal determination means (41 ),
The fourth game state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth game state (mode E, mode E') are compared with the third game state (mode A) by the normal determination means (41). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B26 to B40, characterized in that the normal judgment has a high probability that the movable accessory member (36) is to be operated.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B41, the probability that the movable accessory member is determined to be activated in the normal determination by the normal determination means differs between the fourth game state, the fifth game state, and the third game state. As a result, three game states, that is, the third to fifth game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different, can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix B42]
In the fourth game state (mode C, mode C'), it is detected by the detection means (318) that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352) compared to the third game state (mode A). The game machine according to appendix B24 to appendix B41, characterized in that the time from detection to start of operation of the movable accessory member (36) is short.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B42, in the fourth game state, compared to the third game state, the movable accessory member starts operating after the detecting means detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage. short time to As a result, three game states, that is, the third to fifth game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different, can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix B43]
In the fifth game state (mode E, mode E'), compared to the third game state (mode A) and the fourth game state (mode C, mode C'), the movable accessory member (36) The game machine according to any one of appendices B24 to B42, characterized in that the operating time of is long.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B43, the operating time of the movable accessory member is longer in the fifth game state than in the second game state and the third game state. As a result, three game states, ie, the third to fifth game states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio is different between the first winning hole and the third winning hole, can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix B44]
The game machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B43, characterized in that the distribution part (38) is fixed at a position where game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) interfere with each other.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B44, the sorting unit of the sorting device is fixed at a position where game balls introduced from the inlet interfere with each other. Therefore, the player can read the tendency (individual difference between game machines) of sorting between the first passage and the second passage by the sorting section. As a result, the player can adjust the launch position of the game ball through trial and error to find the launch position of the game ball that allows the game ball to be easily distributed to the second passage. The enjoyment of searching for the launching position of the game ball where the game ball is easily distributed, or when a plurality of game machines of the same type are installed in the island facility of the game hall, the game ball is thrown from those game machines to the second passage. It is possible to obtain the enjoyment of searching for an easy-to-understand game machine.

[Appendix B45]
The game machine according to appendix B44, wherein the allocating parts (38D, 38F) have fixed parts (381D, 389F) that are immovable and unrotatable.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B45, it is determined by accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball against the fixed portion. Therefore, the game balls are randomly distributed to the first path and the second path by an accidental factor, thereby reducing the monotony of the game and improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix B46]
The gaming machine according to appendix B45, wherein one end of the fixed portion (381D, 389F) is fixed, and at least a part of the portion other than the one end is plastically deformable.

[Appendix B47]
The game machine according to appendix B46, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix B48]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B45 to B47, wherein the fixed parts (381D, 389F) are nails.

In the gaming machine according to notes B46 to B48, since at least a part of the fixed part of the distribution part is plastically changeable, when the position of the fixed part deviates from the initial set value, the fixed part is returned to the initial position. it is possible to return. As a result, it is possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion.

[Appendix B49]
The distribution part (38F) has a plurality of nails,
B45 to B48, wherein the plurality of nails are arranged bilaterally symmetrically with one nail as the top portion and a vertical line passing through the one nail as an axis of symmetry when viewed from the front. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B49, by adjusting the peg on the top, it is possible to improve the deviation of the allocation ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed part.

[Appendix B50]
The distribution section (38E) has a rotating body (382D) rotatably fixed by the fixing section (381D),
The rotating body (382D) is a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and a direction opposite to the first direction, and is directed toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B45 to B49, wherein the gaming machine is rotatable in the second direction for moving the ball.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B50, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it is possible to select and design the distribution pattern of the game balls to the first path and the second path from various patterns. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix B51]
The gaming machine according to appendix B50, wherein the rotating body (382D) is freely rotatable in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix B52]
Said distribution part (38C) is a first direction to move the game ball toward said first passage (351), and a direction opposite to said first direction, toward said second passage (352) The gaming machine according to appendix B51, wherein the roller is fixed so as to be freely rotatable in the second direction for moving the game ball.

In the game machines according to appendices B51 and B52, rotating bodies such as freely rotatable rollers are employed as the distribution part, and even with these rotating bodies, accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball against the rotating bodies determined by Therefore, the game balls are randomly distributed to the first path and the second path by an accidental factor, thereby reducing the monotony of the game and improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix C1]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352) and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are distributed to the distribution section (38). A sorting device (35) that sorts to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by
A first winning port (314) into which game balls distributed to the first passage (351) can enter;
A second winning port (315) into which game balls distributed to the second passage (352) can enter, and which has a function different from that of the first winning port (314);
A detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352);
Triggered by the detection of the game ball passing through the second passage (352) by the detection means (318), the second winning port (315) of the game ball that passed through the second passage (352) ) to a second position where the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is allowed to enter the second winning port (315). Accessory members (36T to 36X),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, the game balls are distributed to the first path and the second path by the distribution device, and when the game balls are distributed to the second path by the distribution device, the movable accessory member Entry of the game ball into the second winning hole is permitted or restricted depending on the presence or absence of operation. Specifically, the game ball distributed to the second path is restricted from entering the second winning hole when the movable accessory member is in the standby position where the movable accessory member is not operating, while the game ball is movable. A game ball is permitted to enter the second winning hole when the accessory member is in the operating position. In this way, by cooperating with the sorting device and the movable accessory member, it is possible to change the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole. As a result, in the game machine in which the game balls distributed to the first passage and the game balls distributed to the second passage can be entered into the winning openings having different functions, the monotonousness of the game is reduced and the movable accessory member is provided. It is possible to realize a new game property according to the control mode of the operation, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix C2]
The movable accessory members (36T to 36X) are characterized in that the operation time is longer when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, compared to the operation time when the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to appendix C1.

[Appendix C3]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
It is better to hit the game ball in the left area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318), or to the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319). A first game state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case of hitting a ball, and the detecting means (319) to hit the game ball in the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detecting means (319). 318), the game state is shifted between a plurality of game states including a second game state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the game ball is hit to the left area so that the passage of the game ball is detected. further comprising game state transition means (41),
The first condition is the first game state (mode A, mode C),
The gaming machine according to appendix C2, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

According to the gaming machines according to appendices C2 and C3, the ease with which the game ball enters the second winning hole by the movable accessory member in the case where the first condition is satisfied and the case where the second condition is satisfied are considered different. For example, the operation time of the movable accessory member is changed according to the game state (advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied, if the movable accessory member is operated, it is difficult for the game ball launched to the right side area to enter the second winning hole. It is possible to set the ease of throwing a game ball into the second winning hole. As a result, if the player hits right in a situation where left-handed hitting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player is in a disadvantageous situation, so left-handed hitting is encouraged in situations where left-handed hitting is encouraged. it becomes possible to

[Appendix C4]
Said second winning port (315), the time required for the game ball detected by said other detecting means (319) to enter said second winning port (315) is determined by said detecting means (318) The gaming machine according to appendix C3, characterized in that it is arranged at a position longer than the time required for the game ball to be detected to enter the second winning hole (315).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix C4, the time required for the game ball detected by the detecting means to enter the second winning hole, and the game ball detected by other detecting means to enter the second winning hole It differs from the time it takes to hit the ball. Therefore, for example, a game ball hit in the left area of the game board can enter the second winning hole, while a game ball hit in the right area is made difficult to enter the second winning hole. becomes possible. As a result, if the player hits right in a situation where left-handed hitting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player is in a disadvantageous situation, so left-handed hitting is encouraged in situations where left-handed hitting is encouraged. it becomes possible to

[Appendix C5]
The operation time of the movable accessory member (36) in the first game state (mode A, mode C) is such that the game ball detected by the detection means (318) is in the second winning hole (315). ) is the time to allow the ball to be entered and to limit the game ball detected by the other detection means (318) from entering the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to appendix C3 or appendix C4.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix C5, it is possible to appropriately restrict entry of a game ball into the second winning hole when hitting to the right in the first game state in which hitting to the left is encouraged. Therefore, if the player hits right in a situation where left-handed hitting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. becomes possible.

[Appendix C6]
The operation time of the movable accessory member (36) in the case of the second game state (mode E) is such that the game ball detected by the other detection means (319) The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C3 to C5, characterized in that it is a time when a ball is allowed to be landed at .

According to the gaming machine according to appendix C6, it is possible to make the game ball enter the second winning hole by hitting right in the second game state. Therefore, by hitting to the right in the second game state, it is possible to proceed with the game in a state where the number of game balls hardly increases or decreases.

[Appendix C7]
A gap through which a game ball can pass is formed between the game ball and the second winning hole (315), and the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) is directed toward the second winning hole (315). a guiding part (31M') to be moved;
further comprising
The movable accessory members (36T to 36X) are
At the first position (standby position), the second winning hole (315) is closed, and the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is launched into the right area of the game board (31). Limiting the entry of game balls into the second winning port (315),
At the second position (operating position), the second winning port (315) is opened and a path for game balls is formed between the guiding portion (31M') and the second winning port (315). Supplementary note C1 to Supplementary note characterized in that the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) and the game ball that has been hit to the right side area are allowed to enter the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine described in C6.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C7, when the movable accessory member is at the second position, the second path of the sorting device is formed by forming the path for the game balls between the guide portion and the second winning opening. Not only the passing game ball but also the game ball hit to the right side area of the game board can be entered into the second winning hole by the movable accessory member. Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning hole from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine with new playability.

[Appendix C8]
The movable accessory member (36T) is slidable between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position),
The first position (standby position) is a position that closes the second winning port (315) and opens the gap,
The gaming machine according to appendix C7, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position in which the second winning port (315) is opened and the gap is closed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C8, by a simple configuration in which the movable accessory member is slid between the first position for closing the second winning opening and the second position for closing the gap between the guiding portion and the second winning opening, , it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second winning hole from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member.

[Appendix C9]
The movable accessory members (36U, 36V) are operable between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) by rotation,
The first position (standby position) is a position that closes the second winning port (315) and opens the gap,
The gaming machine according to appendix C7, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position in which the second winning port (315) is opened and the gap is closed.

[Appendix C10]
The game machine according to appendix C9, wherein the movable accessory member (36U) is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in a direction along the game board (31).

[Appendix C11]
The game machine according to appendix C9, wherein the movable accessory member (36V) is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the game board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendices C9 to C11, the movable accessory member is vertically moved between the first position for closing the second winning opening and the second position for closing the gap between the guiding portion and the second winning opening. With the simple structure of rotating around the rotation axis, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning hole from a plurality of paths using one movable accessory member.

[Appendix C12]
The gaming machine according to appendix C11, wherein the rotating body (36V) can be stopped in an upright state at a third position (standby position) that opens the second starting port (315) and the gap.

In the game machine according to appendix C12, the game balls in the right area of the sorting device are movable in the game state (mode A to mode C) in which the movable accessory member is opened for a short time without providing a retraction guidance part. It is possible to prevent the user from being guided to the second starting port by the accessory member.

[Appendix C13]
The movable accessory member (36W) is rotatable, and includes a closing portion (364W) capable of closing the second starting port (315) and the gap, and opening the second starting port (315) and the gap. with a possible penetration (363W),
The first position (standby position) is a position in which the closing portion (364W) closes the second winning opening (315) and the through hole (363W) opens the gap,
The second position (operating position) is a position in which the through hole (363W) opens the second winning port (315) and the closing portion (364W) closes the gap. The gaming machine according to appendix C7.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C13, a game ball is entered from a plurality of paths into the second winning hole by a single movable accessory member by a simple configuration in which the movable accessory member having the closing portion and the penetrating portion is rotated. becomes possible.

[Appendix C14]
The movable accessory member (36X) rotates around a rotation axis extending in a direction inclined with respect to the horizontal direction between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) in the gap. is a possible rotating body,
The rotating body (36X) is
A first penetration portion (361X) through which a game ball can pass through along a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis (36X), and a penetration in a direction intersecting the first penetration portion (361X) as viewed in the direction of the rotation axis and has a second through portion (362X) through which the game ball can pass,
The first position (standby position) is a position where the game ball is dropped in the gap by the second through portion (362X),
The gaming machine according to appendix C7, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position where the first through portion (361X) communicates with the second winning port (315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C14, with a simple configuration in which the rotating body is rotated between the third winning hole and the guiding part, a game ball can enter the third winning hole from a plurality of paths using one movable accessory member. It becomes possible to make a ball.

[Appendix C15]
A game ball that moves the movable accessory members (36T to 36X) toward the third winning port (315) when the movable accessory members (36T to 36X) are at the second position (operating position) The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C7 to C14, further comprising a guard section (31B) that prevents the winning amount from exceeding the third prize winning opening (315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C15, by providing the guard portion, when the movable accessory member is at the second position, the game ball moving the movable accessory member toward the second winning opening is reliably won the second prize. You can put the ball in your mouth.

[Appendix C16]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) is
Operated from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position) with the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection means (318) or the other detection means (319),
When it is in the second position, any of the game balls passing through the second passage (352) and the game balls passing through the specific area are allowed to enter the third winning port (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C15, characterized in that

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix C16, not only game balls passing through the second path of the sorting device, but also game balls launched to the right side area of the game board enter the second winning slot by the movable accessory member. can be made Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning hole from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine with new playability.

[Appendix C17]
A supplementary note characterized by further comprising a retraction guiding part (393, 394) provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member (36) and guiding the game ball in a direction away from the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C16.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C17, a retraction guide section that guides the game ball in a direction away from the second prize winning opening is provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to appendix C17, for example, in a gaming state in which the operation time of the movable role member is short and the gaming machine is encouraged to be launched in the left area of the game board, the second winning hole in the movable role member Since the game ball can be received at a position away from the game ball, it is possible to secure a long time until the game ball reaches the second winning hole. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second winning hole in a short period of time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the standby position, which is not recommended. When performing, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix C18]
The retraction guide part (393, 394) includes the plurality of nails,
The plurality of nails are characterized in that they are arranged in an inclined manner such that the nails farther from the second prize winning port (315) are positioned lower than the nails on the side closer to the second prize winning port (315). The gaming machine according to appendix C17.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix C18, a game ball can be guided to the upstream side in the moving direction of the game ball by a simple configuration in which a plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner. Also, in a game machine, since a large number of nails are generally driven into the game board, it is possible to provide a retraction guide section when driving these nails. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and the increase in manufacturing cost due to the provision of the retraction guide part, and to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member when the movable accessory member operates for a short time.

[Appendix C19]
The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball toward the second winning port (315) at the second position, and moves the game ball at the movable accessory member (36). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C18, characterized by having a delay unit (364) for delaying.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C19, the delay part is provided in the movable accessory member that guides the game ball to the second winning hole. Therefore, for example, even if the game ball is received by the movable role member by hitting the right side in a game state where the movable role member is activated for a short time and the left side is encouraged, the game ball is received by the delay unit. It is possible to secure a long time until the ball reaches the second winning hole. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the movable role member from reaching the second winning hole in a short period of time from the start of operation of the movable role member until it returns to the first position. It is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessary member when doing so.

[Appendix C20]
The gaming machine according to appendix C19, wherein the delay section (364, 364A-364C) moves the game ball along a meandering path in the movable accessory member (36, 36A-36C).

[Appendix C21]
The delay part (364D-364H) includes one or more linear projections (364D-364G) or linear recesses ( 364H), the gaming machine according to appendix C19 or appendix C20.

[Appendix C22]
Any one of Appendix C19 to Appendix C21, wherein the delay portions (364I to 364P) are a plurality of protrusions (364I to 364N) or a plurality of recesses (364O, 364P) arranged discretely. The game machine described.

[Appendix C23]
The gaming machine according to appendix C22, wherein the plurality of projections (364I to 364N) or the plurality of recesses (364O, 364P) are arranged in a grid pattern.

According to the gaming machine according to appendices C20 to C23, it is possible to delay the movement of the game ball on the movable accessory member by means of the delay section with a simple configuration. For example, when the movable accessory member is formed by resin molding, the delay section can be integrally built into the movable accessory member by resin molding. As a result, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay portion.

[Appendix C24]
From appendix C19, wherein the delay part (364Q) is one or more rollers (364Q) having a rotating shaft extending in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball on the movable accessory member (36Q) The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix C23.

[Appendix C25]
The game machine according to appendix C24, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) are rotationally driven in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the game ball.

[Appendix C26]
The gaming machine according to appendix C24 or appendix C25, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) apply magnetic force or electromagnetic force to the game ball.

According to the gaming machine according to appendices C24 to C26, since the movable accessory members are provided with rollers, not only is the design of the gaming machine improved, but also the behavior of the game ball moving the movable accessory members is improved. Since it becomes easy to draw attention to , interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix C27]
further comprising game state transition means (41) for transitioning a game state when a predetermined state is established between a plurality of game states;
The game state transition means (41) provides a third game state (mode A), a fourth game state (mode C, mode C') and a The gaming machine according to appendix C1, characterized by including a fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E').

The gaming machine according to appendix C27 has three game states, ie, third to fifth game states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio for the second winning hole is different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to appendix C27, it is possible to create new game features with improved game features based on three game states with different expected values of the ball entry ratio to the second winning hole. become.

[Appendix C28]
The third game state is
The game ball launched to the left side area is likely to enter the first winning port (314), but is difficult to enter the second winning port (315),
The game ball launched into the right area is difficult to enter the first winning hole (314) and the second winning hole (315),
The fourth game state is
The game ball hit to the left side area is more likely to enter the first winning hole (314) and the second winning hole (315) than the game ball hit to the right side area,
The fifth game state is
A game ball hit to the right side area is difficult to enter the first winning hole (314), and more likely to enter the second winning hole (315) than a game ball hit to the left side area. The gaming machine according to appendix C27, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix C28, in each of the third to fifth game states, the ease with which the ball enters the first winning hole and the second winning hole differs depending on the launching area of the game ball with respect to the game board. As a result, three game states, ie, the third to fifth game states, in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different, can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix C29]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) moves from the first position to the second position when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the specific area by the other detection means (319). ,
In the third game state and the fourth game state, it is better to launch a game ball into the left area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318). is advantageous to the player compared to the case of hitting the game ball in the right area so that the passage of the is detected,
In the fifth game state, the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318) when the game ball is launched into the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319). The gaming machine according to appendix C28, which is advantageous to the player compared to the case where the game ball is hit to the left side area.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C29, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means or other detection means, the movable accessory member is activated to allow the game ball to enter the second winning hole. to Each of the third to fifth game states has a launch area that is advantageous to the player by using whether or not the movable accessory member is activated. That is, by a simple method using a movable accessory member, it is possible to realize three game states, the third to fifth game states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio to the second winning hole is different.

[Appendix C30]
The first winning port (314R) is a first special determination whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering a game ball. Give an opportunity to do (jackpot lottery),
The second winning port (315) is a second special determination whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering a game ball. Give an opportunity to do (jackpot lottery),
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix C29, wherein the second special determination has a higher degree of expectation than the first special determination for obtaining a determination result for shifting to the second special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C30, the degree of expectation (function) of shifting to the second special game advantageous to the player by entering the game machine ball into the first start hole and entering the game ball into the second start hole is different. Therefore, by making the expected value of the ball-in ratio between the first winning hole and the second starting hole different, it is possible to realize three game states with different degrees of expectation for shifting to the second special game. As a result, the playability is enhanced, and the amusement of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix C31]
The third game state is
The game ball that is launched into the left region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning port (314L), and the second starting port (3145 ) is difficult to enter,
The game ball that is launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning port (314), and the second winning port ( 315) is difficult to enter,
The fourth game state is
The game ball that is launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning port (314), and the second winning port ( 315) is difficult to enter,
The game ball that is launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) is difficult to enter the first winning port (314), and the detection means (318) By detecting that the game ball passes through the second passage (352), it is easy for the ball to enter the third winning port (315),
The fifth game state is
The game ball hit to the right side area is difficult to enter the first winning hole (314), and the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball passes through the specific area. The gaming machine according to appendix C30, characterized in that a ball is likely to be entered into the second winning hole (315).

[Appendix C32]
The third game state and the fourth game state are characterized in that the game balls launched into the right side area are difficult to enter the first winning hole (314) and the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to appendix C31.

[Appendix C33]
The fifth game state is
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) enter the first winning port (314) and the second winning port (315). hard to be
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) are unlikely to enter the first winning port (314), and the detection means (318) The gaming machine according to appendix C31 or appendix C32, characterized in that the game ball is likely to enter the second winning port (315) triggered by detection of the game ball passing through the second passage (352). .

In the gaming machine according to appendices C31 to C33, by adopting the sorting device together with the movable accessory member, three game states with different expected values of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole are realized. be. Therefore, there are a third game state and a fourth game state in which game balls are launched in the left area and the game is progressed using the sorting device, and a game ball is launched in the right area and the game is played without using the sorting device. A progressing fifth game state can be realized. As a result, the game can be given a wide range, and at the same time, the playability is enhanced, and the interest of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix C34]
Said 4th game state (mode C, mode C') and said 5th game state (mode E, mode E') are compared with said 3rd game state (mode A), said 1st special determination and said 1st 2. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C30 to C33, characterized in that, in the special judgment, there is a high probability of being judged to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state).

[Appendix C35]
A first special symbol display unit ( 371) and
A second special symbol display unit ( 372) and
further comprising
The game state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special game state, after the end of the first special symbol game based on the first special determination or the second special determination Move to a special game state,
On the condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole (314) is to shift to the special game state, the special in the special game state After the game is completed, the game state is shifted to the fourth game state (mode C, mode C'),
On the condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole (315) is to shift to the special game state, the special in the special game state The gaming machine according to appendix C34, wherein the gaming machine is shifted to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the game is finished.

According to the gaming machines according to appendices C34 and C35, for example, there are game characteristics with barriers before transitioning to a special game state in which a large amount of game value is awarded, and game characteristics with multiple substantially variable probability continuation rates. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with a variety of playability.

[Appendix C36]
As a result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment,
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first determination result (probability variable jackpot) to be shifted to the fifth game state (mode E, mode E');
A second determination result (normal jackpot) that is shifted to a game state other than the fifth game state (mode E, mode E') after the special game in the special game state is completed;
The gaming machine according to appendix C35, comprising:

[Appendix C37]
The game state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, after the end of the special game triggered by the first special determination or the second special determination, the fourth game Compared with the state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth game state (mode E, mode E'), it is determined to shift to the special game state in the first special determination or the second special determination. Shift to the sixth game state (mode B, mode D) with a low probability,
When the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number in the sixth game state (mode B, mode D), to shift to the first game state (mode A) The gaming machine according to appendix C36, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendices C36 and C37, as a result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment, the first judgment result of shifting to the fifth game state after the end of the special game, and the fifth state after the end of the special game It includes a second determination result that is shifted to a game state other than the game state. Also, the fourth game state and the fifth game state have a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state in the first special determination or the second special determination than the third game state. There are three game states from third to fifth game states in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole is different, and the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole is triggered. On the condition that the result of the first special determination is to shift to the special game state, the game state is shifted to the fourth game state after the special game is finished, and the game ball enters the second winning hole as a trigger. On the condition that the result of the second special determination is to shift to the special game state, the state is shifted to the fifth game state after the special game is finished. That is, the game machine having three game states from the first to the third game state can be applied to the probability variable machine including the so-called loop probability variable machine. Then, according to the gaming machine according to appendices C36 and C37, the fifth game state, which is most advantageous to the player, is entered step by step through the fourth game state. That is, in order to shift to the fifth game state that is most advantageous to the player, first shift to the fourth game state, and in the fourth game state, enter the game ball into the second winning hole in the special game determination, The result of the second special judgment must be the first judgment result. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a game property that allows the player to shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player in stages.

[Appendix C38]
Said game state transition means (41), when the result of said first special judgment or said second special judgment is said second judgment result, said The gaming machine according to appendix C37, wherein the gaming machine is shifted to the first gaming state (mode A) after the special game is finished.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C38, when the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, the state shifts to the third game state after the end of the special game, so the fourth game state and the fifth game Status stay rate is lower. On the other hand, in the fourth game state and the fifth game state, it is possible not only to expect the game ball to enter the second winning hole by the support by the movable accessory member, but also to be in the special game state in the first special judgment or the second special judgment. This is a mode with a high probability of being determined to shift to . Therefore, the rate of staying in the fourth game state and the fifth game state is low, so that while the game property is easy to fall to the third game state, there is a sharpness in the transition of the game state, and the game value obtained by the player. It is possible to provide a game machine with sharpness in terms of.

[Appendix C39]
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the third game state (mode A) is to shift to the special game state, the first special determination or the second special determination a transition count setting means for setting an upper limit number of transitions to be transitioned to the special game state with the transition to the special game state based on the first time;
The game state transition means (41) shifts to the third game state (mode A) after the end of the special game state of the transition upper limit number set by the transition number setting means (41). The gaming machine according to appendix C35.

The gaming machine according to appendix C39 has three game states, that is, the third to fifth game states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole is different. The transition from to the special game state continues. That is, a gaming machine having three game states from the third to fifth game states can be applied to a so-called limit machine. Then, on the condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole is to shift to the special game state, the state is shifted to the fourth game state after the special game is completed. , On the condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole is to shift to the special game state, the state is shifted to the fifth game state after the special game is completed. . That is, the transition destination of the game state after the special game differs depending on whether the trigger is the entry of the ball into the first winning hole or the entry of the ball into the second winning hole. Therefore, in the remaining opportunities to transition to the special game state after the first hit, the game property is determined by how many transition opportunities to the special game state are left to shift to the fifth game state that is most advantageous to the player. It is possible to provide a game machine with

[Appendix C40]
The game state transition means (41), the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game in the fourth game state (mode C') or the fifth game state (mode E') is the upper limit number The game machine according to appendix C35, wherein the game machine is shifted to the third game state (mode A) when the game reaches .

[Appendix C41]
Further comprising a special variable ball entry device (82) having a special ball entry section (824) that is opened in the special game,
The game state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the third game state (mode A) is to shift to the special game state, the special in the special game in the special game state On the condition that the game ball enters the ball entering portion, after the special game is completed, the game state is shifted to the fourth game state (mode C'),
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the fourth game state (mode C') is to shift to the special game state, in the special game in the special game state The gaming machine according to appendix C40, characterized in that, on the condition that a game ball enters the special ball entry section (824), the game machine is shifted to the fifth game state (mode E') after the end of the special game. .

In the gaming machine according to appendix C40 and appendix C41, when the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number in the fourth game state or the fifth game state, it is shifted to the first game state. be. That is, a game machine having three game states of the third to fifth game states can be applied to ST machines including so-called V-ST machines. In addition, in the gaming machines according to appendices C40 and C41, it is necessary to go through the fourth game state in order to shift to the fifth game state, which is most advantageous to the player. That is, in order to shift to the fifth game state, after first shifting to the fourth game state, the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number In the second special symbol game It is necessary that the result of the special determination is to shift to the special game state. Therefore, after the transition from the third game state to the fourth game state, how quickly to acquire the determination result of shifting to the special game state in the second special symbol game, and shift to the fifth game state most advantageous to the player. Determination of how many special game states are shifted until the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number after shifting to the fifth game state. It is possible to provide a game machine having a game feature of whether or not a result is obtained.

[Appendix C42]
A first special symbol display unit ( 371) and
A second special symbol display unit ( 372) and
When the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole (315) is a specific result (small hit) different from the one to shift to the special game state A game ball can be entered by being activated, and a special entry in which the game state transition means (41) is granted the right to shift to the special game state (2 types of jackpots) by the game ball's entry. a feather accessory device (83) having a ball (833);
further comprising
The game state transition means (41)
Triggered by the fact that the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is to shift to the special game state (one type of jackpot), the state is shifted to the special game state,
On the condition that the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special game state, the fourth game state (mode C) after the end of the special game in the special game state. to
After the operation of the feather accessory device (83) is completed, based on the right to transition to the special game state (2 types of jackpots) granted by the game ball entering the special ball entry section (833) Move to the special game state,
Characterized by shifting to the fifth game state (mode E) after the end of the special game in the special game state that is shifted with the entry of the game ball into the special ball entry section (833). The gaming machine according to appendix C31.

[Appendix C43]
Said game state transition means (41), in said fourth game state or said fifth game state, when the total number of games of said first special symbol game and said second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number, said The gaming machine according to appendix C42, characterized in that the gaming machine is shifted to a third gaming state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C42 and appendix C43, the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is to shift to a special game state (1st kind jackpot), or the game ball enters the special ball entering section By doing so, the right to shift to the special game state is granted (2 types of jackpots), and the state shifts to the special game state. In other words, a game machine having three game states of the third to fifth game states can also be applied to a so-called one-kind-two-kind mixed machine.

[Appendix C44]
It is detected that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352) by the detection means (318), or that the game ball has passed through the specific area is detected by the other detection means (319). Triggered by this, normal determination means (41 ),
The fourth game state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth game state (mode E, mode E') are compared with the third game state (mode A) by the normal determination means (41). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C27 to C43, characterized in that the normal judgment has a high probability that the movable accessory member (36) is to be operated.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C44, the fourth game state, the fifth game state, and the third game state have different probabilities of being determined to operate the movable accessory member in the normal determination by the normal determining means. As a result, three game states, ie, the third to fifth game states, in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different, can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix C45]
In the fourth game state (mode C, mode C'), it is detected by the detection means (318) that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352) compared to the third game state (mode A). A game machine according to appendices C27 to C44, characterized in that the time from detection to start of operation of the movable accessory member (36) is short.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C45, in the fourth game state, compared to the third game state, the movable accessory member starts to operate after the detecting means detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage. short time to As a result, three game states, that is, the third to fifth game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different, can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix C46]
In the fifth game state (mode E, mode E'), compared to the third game state (mode A) and the fourth game state (mode C, mode C'), the movable accessory member (36) The game machine according to any one of appendices C27 to C45, characterized in that the operating time of is long.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C46, the operating time of the movable accessory member is longer in the fifth game state than in the second game state and the third game state. As a result, three game states, ie, the third to fifth game states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio is different between the first winning hole and the third winning hole, can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix C47]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C46, wherein the distribution unit (38) is fixed at a position where game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) interfere.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C47, the sorting portion of the sorting device is fixed at a position where game balls introduced from the inlet interfere with each other. Therefore, the player can read the tendency (individual difference between game machines) of sorting between the first passage and the second passage by the sorting section. As a result, the player can adjust the launch position of the game ball through trial and error to find the launch position of the game ball that allows the game ball to be easily distributed to the second passage. The enjoyment of searching for the launching position of the game ball where the game ball is easily distributed, or when a plurality of game machines of the same type are installed in the island facility of the game hall, the game ball is thrown from those game machines to the second passage. It is possible to obtain the enjoyment of searching for an easy-to-understand game machine.

[Appendix C48]
The game machine according to appendix C47, wherein the allocating section (38D, 38F) has an immobile and non-rotatable fixing section (381D, 389F).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C48, it is determined by accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball against the fixed portion. Therefore, the game balls are randomly distributed to the first path and the second path by an accidental factor, thereby reducing the monotony of the game and improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix C49]
The gaming machine according to appendix C48, wherein one end of the fixed portion (381D, 389F) is fixed, and at least a part of the portion other than the one end is plastically deformable.

[Appendix C50]
The gaming machine according to appendix C49, wherein the fixed portion (381D, 389F) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix C51]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C48 to C50, wherein the fixing parts (381D, 389F) are nails.

In the game machines according to appendices C49 to C51, since at least a part of the fixed portion of the distribution portion is plastically changeable, when the position of the fixed portion deviates from the initial set value, the fixed portion is returned to the initial position. it is possible to return. As a result, it is possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion.

[Appendix C52]
The distribution part (38F) has a plurality of nails,
C48 to C51, wherein the plurality of nails are arranged bilaterally symmetrically with one nail as the top and a vertical line passing through the one nail as an axis of symmetry in a front view. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C52, by adjusting the peg on the top, it is possible to improve the deviation of the allocation ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed part.

[Appendix C53]
The distribution section (38E) has a rotating body (382D) rotatably fixed by the fixing section (381D),
The rotating body (382D) is a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and a direction opposite to the first direction, and is directed toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C48 to C52, wherein the gaming machine is rotatable in the second direction for moving the ball.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C53, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it is possible to select and design the distribution pattern of the game balls to the first path and the second path from various patterns. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix C54]
The gaming machine according to appendix C53, wherein the rotating body (382D) is freely rotatable in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix C55]
Said distribution part (38C) is a first direction to move the game ball toward said first passage (351), and a direction opposite to said first direction, toward said second passage (352) The game machine according to appendix C54, wherein the roller is fixed so as to be freely rotatable in the second direction for moving the game ball.

In the game machines according to appendices C54 and C55, rotating bodies such as freely rotatable rollers are adopted as the distribution part, and even with these rotating bodies, accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball against the rotating bodies determined by Therefore, the game balls are randomly distributed to the first path and the second path by an accidental factor, thereby reducing the monotony of the game and improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix D1]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352) and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are distributed to the distribution section (38). A sorting device (35) that sorts to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by
A first winning port (314) into which game balls distributed to the first passage (351) can enter;
A second winning port (313′) into which the game balls distributed to the second passage (352) can enter, and which has a function different from that of the first winning port (314);
A game ball distributed to the second passage (352) can be entered, and a third winning port (315) having a different function from the first winning port (314) and the second winning port (313') When,
A detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352);
Triggered by the detection of the game ball passing through the second passage (352) by the detection means (318), the second winning port (313) of the game ball that passed through the second passage (352) ') and the third winning opening (315), from a first position where entry of a ball into one of the winning openings is restricted and entry of a ball into the other winning opening is allowed, the second passage (352 ) is allowed to enter one of the winning openings (313′) and is restricted from entering the other winning opening (315). a member (36);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, the game balls are distributed to the first path and the second path by the distribution device, and when the game balls are distributed to the second path by the distribution device, the movable accessory member Entry of a game ball into the third winning hole is permitted or restricted depending on whether or not it is operated. Specifically, the game balls distributed to the second path are restricted from entering the third prize winning opening when the movable accessory member is in the first position where the movable accessory member is not in operation. When the movable accessory member is in the second position to operate, the entry of the game ball into the third winning hole is permitted. In this way, by the cooperation of the sorting device and the movable accessory member, it is possible to vary the ratio of balls entering the third winning hole. As a result, in a game machine in which a game ball distributed by the distribution device can be entered into one of three winning holes with different functions, the monotony of the game can be reduced, and the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member can be reduced. It is possible to realize a new game property and improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix D2]
The movable accessory member (36) has a longer operating time when satisfying a second condition different from the first condition than the operating time when satisfying the first condition. The gaming machine described in D1.

[Appendix D3]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
It is better to hit the game ball in the left area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318), or to the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319). A first game state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case of hitting a ball, and the detecting means (319) to hit the game ball in the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detecting means (319). 318), the game state is shifted between a plurality of game states including a second game state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the game ball is hit to the left area so that the passage of the game ball is detected. further comprising game state transition means (41),
The first condition is the first game state (mode A, mode C),
The gaming machine according to appendix D2, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

According to the gaming machines according to appendices D2 and D3, the ease with which the game ball enters the third winning hole by the movable accessory member in the case where the first condition is satisfied and the case where the second condition is satisfied are considered different. For example, the operation time of the movable accessory member is changed according to the game state (advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied, if the movable accessory member is operated, it is difficult for the game ball launched to the right side area to enter the third winning hole. It is possible to set the ease of throwing a game ball into the third winning hole. As a result, if the player hits right in a situation where left-handed hitting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player is in a disadvantageous situation, so left-handed hitting is encouraged in situations where left-handed hitting is encouraged. it becomes possible to

[Appendix D4]
The third winning port (315) detects the time required for the game ball detected by the other detection means (319) to enter the third winning port (315) by the detection means (318). The gaming machine according to appendix D3, characterized in that it is arranged at a position longer than the time required for the game ball to be detected to enter the third winning hole (315).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D4, the time required for the game ball detected by the detecting means to enter the third winning hole, and the game ball detected by the other detecting means to enter the third winning hole It differs from the time it takes to hit the ball. Therefore, for example, a game ball hit in the left area of the game board can enter the third winning hole, while a game ball hit in the right area is made difficult to enter the third winning hole. becomes possible. As a result, if the player hits right in a situation where left-handed hitting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player is in a disadvantageous situation, so left-handed hitting is encouraged in situations where left-handed hitting is encouraged. it becomes possible to

[Appendix D5]
The operation time of the movable accessory member (36) in the first game state (mode A, mode C) is such that the game ball detected by the detection means (318) is in the third winning hole (315). ) is allowed to be entered, and the time for restricting the game ball detected by the other detection means (319) from entering the third winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to appendix D3 or appendix D4.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D5, it is possible to appropriately restrict entry of a game ball into the third winning hole when hitting to the right in the first game state in which hitting to the left is encouraged. Therefore, if the player hits right in a situation where left-handed hitting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. becomes possible.

[Appendix D6]
The operation time of the movable accessory member (36) in the case of the second game state (mode E) is such that the game ball detected by the other detection means (319) The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D3 to D5, characterized in that it is a time when a ball is allowed to be landed at .

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D6, it is possible to make the game ball enter the third winning hole by hitting right in the second game state. Therefore, by hitting to the right in the second game state, it is possible to proceed with the game in a state where the number of game balls hardly increases or decreases.

[Appendix D8]
The movable accessory member (36) is
An opening/closing unit that brings the second winning opening (313') into the open state at the first position (standby position) and closes the second winning opening (313') at the second position (operating position). (362) and
Continuing to the opening and closing part (362), in the first position (standby position), the game ball on the right side of the second winning opening (313') is restricted from moving toward the opening and closing part (362), A guide portion (363) that allows movement of the game ball on the right side of the second winning opening (313′) toward the opening/closing portion (362) at the second position (operating position);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D7, characterized by having

[Appendix D9]
The opening/closing part (362)
At the first position (standby position), the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is allowed to enter the second winning port (313'), and the third winning port (315) restrict entry,
In the second position (operating position), the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is restricted from entering the second winning port (313'), and the third winning port (315) allow entry,
The guide part is
At the first position (standby position), restricting the movement of the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) toward the opening/closing portion (362),
The game machine according to appendix D8, characterized in that, in the second position (operating position), a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) is allowed to move toward the opening/closing portion (362). .

According to the gaming machine according to notes D8 and D9, the movable accessory member has an opening/closing part capable of opening and closing the second winning hole and a guide part for moving the game ball on the right side of the second winning hole toward the opening/closing part. With the simple configuration of providing the, it is possible to win the game ball from a plurality of paths to the second winning port by one movable accessory member. As a result, in a game machine employing a sorting device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting game machine with new game features according to the control mode of the movement of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix D10]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) is
Operated from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position) with the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection means (318) or the other detection means (319),
When it is in the second position, any of the game balls passing through the second passage (352) and the game balls passing through the specific area are allowed to enter the third winning port (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D9, characterized in that

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D10, not only the game balls passing through the second path of the sorting device, but also the game balls hit to the right side area of the game board enter the third winning slot by the movable accessory member. can be made Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the third winning hole from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine with new playability.

[Appendix D11]
A supplementary note characterized by further comprising a retraction guiding part (393, 394) provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member (36) and guiding the game ball in a direction away from the third winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to any one of D1 to D10.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D11, a retraction guide section that guides the game ball in a direction away from the third prize winning opening is provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member. Therefore, according to the game machine according to appendix D11, for example, in a game state in which the operation time of the movable role member is short and the game machine is encouraged to be launched in the left area of the game board, the third winning hole in the movable role member Since the game ball can be received at a position away from the game ball, it is possible to secure a long time until the game ball reaches the third winning hole. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the third winning hole in a short period of time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the standby position, which is not recommended. When performing, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix D12]
The retraction guide part (393, 394) includes the plurality of nails,
The plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner such that the nails farther from the third prize winning port (315) are positioned lower than the nails closer to the third prize winning port (315). The gaming machine according to appendix D11.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D12, the game ball can be guided to the upstream side in the moving direction of the game ball by a simple configuration in which a plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner. Also, in a game machine, since a large number of nails are generally driven into the game board, it is possible to provide a retraction guide section when driving these nails. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and the increase in manufacturing cost due to the provision of the retraction guide part, and to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member when the movable accessory member operates for a short time.

[Appendix D13]
The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball toward the third winning port (315) at the second position, and moves the game ball at the movable accessory member (36). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D12, characterized by having a delay unit (364) for delaying.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D13, the delay part is provided in the movable accessory member that guides the game ball to the third winning hole. Therefore, for example, even if the game ball is received by the movable role member by hitting the right side in a game state where the movable role member is activated for a short time and the left side is encouraged, the game ball is received by the delay unit. It is possible to secure a long time until the ball reaches the third winning hole. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the third winning hole in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the first position. It is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessary member when doing so.

[Appendix D14]
The gaming machine according to appendix D13, wherein the delay section (364, 364A-364C) moves the game ball along a meandering path in the movable accessory member (36, 36A-36C).

[Appendix D15]
The delay part (364D-364H) includes one or more linear projections (364D-364G) or linear recesses ( 364H).

[Appendix D16]
Any one of Appendix D13 to Appendix D15, wherein the delay portions (364I to 364P) are a plurality of protrusions (364I to 364N) or a plurality of recesses (364O, 364P) arranged discretely. The game machine described.

[Appendix D17]
The gaming machine according to appendix D16, wherein the plurality of projections (364I to 364N) or the plurality of recesses (364O, 364P) are arranged in a grid pattern.

According to the gaming machine according to appendices D14 to D17, it is possible to delay the movement of the game ball on the movable accessory member by means of the delay section with a simple configuration. For example, when the movable accessory member is formed by resin molding, the delay section can be integrally built into the movable accessory member by resin molding. As a result, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay portion.

[Appendix D18]
From appendix D13, wherein the delay part (364Q) is one or more rollers (364Q) having a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball on the movable accessory member (36Q) The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix D17.

[Appendix D19]
The game machine according to appendix D18, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) are rotationally driven in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the game ball.

[Appendix D20]
The gaming machine according to appendix D18 or appendix D19, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) apply magnetic force or electromagnetic force to the game ball.

According to the gaming machine according to appendices D18 to D20, since the movable accessory members are provided with rollers, not only is the design of the gaming machine improved, but also the behavior of the game ball moving the movable accessory members is improved. Since it becomes easy to draw attention to , interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix D21]
further comprising game state transition means (41) for transitioning a game state when a predetermined state is established between a plurality of game states;
The game state transition means (41) provides a third game state (mode A), a fourth game state (mode C, mode C') and a The gaming machine according to appendix D1, characterized by including a fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E').

The gaming machine according to appendix D21 has three game states, ie, third to fifth game states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio for the third winning hole is different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to appendix D21, it is possible to create new game features with improved game features based on three game states with different expected values of the ball entry ratio to the third winning hole. become.

[Appendix D22]
The third game state is
The game ball launched into the left area is easy to enter the first winning hole (314) and the second winning hole (313'), and difficult to enter the third winning hole (315),
The game ball launched into the right area is difficult to enter any of the first winning port (314), the second winning port (313') and the third winning port (315),
The fourth game state is
The game ball hit to the left side area is compared with the game ball hit to the right side area of the first winning opening (314), the second winning opening (313') and the third winning opening (315). It is easy to be entered in either,
The fifth game state is
The game ball hit to the right side region is difficult to enter the first winning port (314) and the second winning port (313'), and compared to the game ball hit to the left side region, the third The gaming machine according to appendix D21, characterized in that it is easy for a ball to enter the winning hole (315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D22, in each of the third to fifth gaming states, the ease with which the ball enters the first, second, and third winning ports depends on the launching area of the game ball with respect to the game board. different. As a result, three game states, ie, the third to fifth game states in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first and second winning holes and the third winning hole is different, can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix D23]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) moves from the first position to the second position when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the specific area by the other detection means (319). ,
In the third game state and the fourth game state, it is better to launch a game ball into the left area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318). is advantageous to the player compared to the case of hitting the game ball in the right area so that the passage of the is detected,
In the fifth game state, the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318) when the game ball is launched into the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319). The gaming machine according to appendix D22, which is advantageous to the player compared to the case where the game ball is hit to the left side area.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D23, the game ball can enter the third winning hole by activating the movable accessory member when the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means or other detection means. to Each of the third to fifth game states has a launch area that is advantageous to the player by using whether or not the movable accessory member is activated. That is, by a simple method using a movable accessory member, it is possible to realize three game states, the third to fifth game states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio to the third winning hole is different.

[Appendix D24]
The first winning port (314L) and the second starting port (314R) transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by the entry of a game ball. Giving the opportunity to make the first special judgment (jackpot lottery) whether or not to let,
The third winning port (315) is a second special determination whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by the entry of a game ball. Give an opportunity to do (jackpot lottery),
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix D23, wherein the second special determination has a higher degree of expectation than the first special determination for obtaining a determination result for shifting to the second special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D24, the degree of expectation (function) of shifting to the second special game advantageous to the player by entering the game machine ball into the first start hole and entering the game ball into the third start hole is different. Therefore, by making the expected value of the ball-in ratio between the first winning hole and the third starting hole different, it is possible to realize three game states with different degrees of expectation for shifting to the second special game. As a result, the playability is enhanced, and the amusement of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix D25]
The gaming machine according to appendix D24, wherein the second starting port (313') is a general winning port.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D25, since the second starting port is the general winning port, the frequency at which special determinations (first special determination and second special determination) can be received in the third to fifth gaming states is increased. different. As a result, the special determination can be received at a frequency corresponding to the game state, so that the variety of games is enhanced, and the amusement of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix D26]
The third game state is
The game ball that is launched into the left region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning port (314), and the second starting port (313 ') and difficult to enter the third winning hole (315),
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) enter the first winning port (314) and the third winning port (315). hard to be played, easy to enter the second winning hole (313'),
The fourth game state is
The game ball that is launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning port (314), and the second winning port ( 313′) and the third winning hole (315) are difficult to enter,
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) enter the first winning port (314) and the second winning port (313'). It is difficult to be balled, and it is easy to enter the third winning hole (315) with the detection of the passage of the game ball through the second passage (352) by the detection means (318),
The fifth game state is
The game ball launched into the right area is difficult to enter the first winning hole (314) and the second winning hole (313'), and the game ball enters the specific area by the other detection means (319). The gaming machine according to appendix D25, characterized in that a ball is likely to enter the third winning hole (315) when the passage is detected.

[Appendix D27]
In the third game state and the fourth game state, the game ball launched into the right area is the first winning hole (314), the second winning hole (313') and the third winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to appendix D26, characterized in that it is difficult for a ball to enter any of the above.

[Appendix D28]
The fifth game state is
The game ball that is launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning port (314), and the second winning port ( 313′) and the third winning hole (315) are difficult to enter,
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) win the first winning port (314) and the second winning port (313'). It is characterized in that the ball is easily entered into the third winning port (315) triggered by the detection of the passing of the game ball through the second passage (352) by the detecting means (318). The gaming machine according to appendix D26 or appendix D27.

In the game machines according to notes D26 to D28, three game states with different expected values of the ball entry ratio with the third winning hole are realized by adopting the sorting device together with the movable accessory member. Therefore, there are a third game state and a fourth game state in which game balls are launched in the left area and the game is progressed using the sorting device, and a game ball is launched in the right area and the game is played without using the sorting device. A progressing fifth game state can be realized. As a result, the game can be given a wide range, and at the same time, the playability is enhanced, and the interest of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix D29]
Said 4th game state (mode C, mode C') and said 5th game state (mode E, mode E') are compared with said 3rd game state (mode A), said 1st special determination and said 1st 2. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D24 to D28, characterized in that, in the special judgment, there is a high probability of being judged to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state).

[Appendix D30]
1st special symbol game for displaying the result of the 1st special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the 1st winning port (314) and the 2nd starting port (313') with the 1st special symbol A first special symbol display unit (371) that executes
A second special symbol display unit ( 372) and
further comprising
The game state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special game state, after the end of the first special symbol game based on the first special determination or the second special determination Move to a special game state,
The condition is that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole (314) and the second winning hole (313') is to shift to the special game state. , after the special game in the special game state is completed, the game state is shifted to the fourth game state (mode C, mode C');
On the condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the third winning hole (315) is to shift to the special game state, the special in the special game state The gaming machine according to appendix D29, wherein the gaming machine is shifted to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the game is finished.

According to the gaming machines according to appendices D29 and D30, for example, there are game characteristics with obstacles before transitioning to a special game state in which a large amount of game value is awarded, and game characteristics with multiple substantially variable probability continuation rates. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with a variety of playability.

[Appendix D31]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D30, wherein the distribution unit (38) is fixed at a position where game balls introduced from the inlet (350) interfere with each other.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D31, the sorting unit of the sorting device is fixed at a position where game balls introduced from the inlet interfere with each other. Therefore, the player can read the tendency (individual difference between game machines) of sorting between the first passage and the second passage by the sorting section. As a result, the player can adjust the launch position of the game ball through trial and error to find the launch position of the game ball that allows the game ball to be easily distributed to the second passage. The enjoyment of searching for the launching position of the game ball where the game ball is easily distributed, or when a plurality of game machines of the same type are installed in the island facility of the game hall, the game ball is thrown from those game machines to the second passage. It is possible to obtain the enjoyment of searching for an easy-to-understand game machine.

[Appendix D32]
The game machine according to appendix D31, wherein the allocating parts (38D, 38F) have fixed parts (381D, 389F) that are immovable and non-rotatable.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D32, it is determined by accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball against the fixed portion. Therefore, the game balls are randomly distributed to the first path and the second path by an accidental factor, thereby reducing the monotony of the game and improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix D33]
The gaming machine according to appendix D32, wherein one end of the fixed portion (381D, 389F) is fixed, and at least a part of the portion other than the one end is plastically deformable.

[Appendix D34]
The game machine according to appendix D33, wherein the fixed portion (381D, 389F) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix D35]
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments D32 to D34, wherein the fixing parts (381D, 389F) are nails.

In the game machines according to appendices D33 to D35, since at least a part of the fixed portion of the distribution portion is plastically changeable, the fixed portion is returned to the initial position when the position of the fixed portion deviates from the initial set value. it is possible to return. As a result, it is possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion.

[Appendix D36]
The distribution part (38F) has a plurality of nails,
Appendices D32 to D35, wherein the plurality of nails are arranged bilaterally symmetrically with one nail as the top portion and a vertical line passing through the one nail as an axis of symmetry when viewed from the front. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D36, by adjusting the peg on the top, it is possible to improve the deviation of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed part.

[Appendix D37]
The distribution section (38E) has a rotating body (382D) rotatably fixed by the fixing section (381D),
The rotating body (382D) is a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and a direction opposite to the first direction, and is directed toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to any one of attachments D32 to D36, wherein the gaming machine is rotatable in the second direction for moving the ball.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D37, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it is possible to select and design the distribution pattern of the game balls to the first path and the second path from various patterns. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix D38]
The gaming machine according to appendix D37, wherein the rotating body (382D) is freely rotatable in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix D39]
Said distribution part (38C) is a first direction to move the game ball toward said first passage (351), and a direction opposite to said first direction, toward said second passage (352) A game machine according to appendix D38, characterized in that the roller is fixed so as to be freely rotatable in the second direction for moving the game ball.

In the game machines according to appendices D38 and D39, rotating bodies such as freely rotatable rollers are employed as the distribution section. determined by Therefore, the game balls are randomly distributed to the first path and the second path by an accidental factor, thereby reducing the monotony of the game and improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix E1]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352) and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are distributed to the distribution section (38). A sorting device (35) that sorts to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by
a plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different in function from the first winning opening (314);
a discharge port (317) for discharging game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning ports;
A detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352);
Triggered by the fact that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352) by the detection means (318), entry of the game ball into the second winning port (315) is restricted. A movable accessory member (36) operable from a first position (standby position) to a second position (operating position) where entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (314) is permitted;
with
The first winning port (314) can enter the game ball distributed to the first passage (351),
The game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is
When the movable accessory member (36) is in the first position (standby position), the ball entering the second winning port (315) is restricted and discharged from the discharge port (317),
A gaming machine characterized in that when the movable accessory member (36) is in the second position (operating position), a ball is allowed to enter the second winning hole (315).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, the game balls are distributed to the first path and the second path by the distribution device, and when the game balls are distributed to the second path by the distribution device, the movable accessory member Entry of the game ball into the second winning hole is permitted or restricted depending on the presence or absence of operation. Specifically, the game ball distributed to the second path is restricted from entering the second winning hole when the movable accessory member is in the first position where the movable accessory member is not operated. When the movable accessory member is in the second position where it operates, the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole is permitted. In this way, by the cooperation of the sorting device and the movable accessory member, it is possible to vary the ratio of balls entering the second winning hole. As a result, in a gaming machine in which the game balls distributed to the second path can be discharged to the discharge port, the monotony of the game is reduced, and a new playability is realized according to the control mode of the movement of the movable accessory member. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix E2]
The movable accessory member (36) has a longer operating time when satisfying a second condition different from the first condition than the operating time when satisfying the first condition. The gaming machine described in E1.

[Appendix E3]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
It is better to hit the game ball in the left area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318), or to the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319). A first game state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case of hitting a ball, and the detecting means (319) to hit the game ball in the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detecting means (319). 318), the game state is shifted between a plurality of game states including a second game state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the game ball is hit to the left area so that the passage of the game ball is detected. further comprising game state transition means (41),
The first condition is the first game state (mode A, mode C),
The gaming machine according to appendix E2, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

According to the gaming machines according to appendices E2 and E3, the ease with which the game ball enters the third winning hole by the movable accessory member in the case where the first condition is satisfied and the case where the second condition is satisfied are considered different. For example, the operation time of the movable accessory member is changed according to the game state (advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied, if the movable accessory member is operated, it is difficult for the game ball launched to the right side area to enter the third winning hole. It is possible to set the ease of throwing a game ball into the third winning hole. As a result, if the player hits right in a situation where left-handed hitting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player is in a disadvantageous situation, so left-handed hitting is encouraged in situations where left-handed hitting is encouraged. it becomes possible to

[Appendix E4]
Said second winning port (315), the time required for the game ball detected by said other detecting means (319) to enter said second winning port (315) is determined by said detecting means (318) The gaming machine according to appendix E3, characterized in that it is arranged at a position longer than the time required for the game ball to be detected to enter the second winning hole (315).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix E4, the time required for the game ball detected by the detecting means to enter the second winning hole, and the game ball detected by the other detecting means to enter the second winning hole It differs from the time it takes to hit the ball. Therefore, for example, a game ball hit in the left area of the game board can enter the second winning hole, while a game ball hit in the right area is made difficult to enter the second winning hole. becomes possible. As a result, if the player hits right in a situation where left-handed hitting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player is in a disadvantageous situation, so left-handed hitting is encouraged in situations where left-handed hitting is encouraged. it becomes possible to

[Appendix E5]
The operation time of the movable accessory member (36) in the first game state (mode A, mode C) is such that the game ball detected by the detection means (318) is in the second winning hole (315). ) is allowed to be entered, and the time for restricting the game ball detected by the other detection means (319) from entering the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to appendix E3 or appendix E4.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix E5, it is possible to appropriately restrict entry of a game ball into the second winning hole when hitting to the right in the first game state in which hitting to the left is encouraged. Therefore, if the player hits right in a situation where left-handed hitting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. becomes possible.

[Appendix E6]
The operation time of the movable accessory member (36) in the case of the second game state (mode E) is such that the game ball detected by the other detection means (319) The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E3 to E5, characterized in that it is a time that allows a ball to be landed at .

According to the gaming machine according to appendix E6, it is possible to make the game ball enter the second winning hole by hitting right in the second game state. Therefore, by hitting to the right in the second game state, it is possible to proceed with the game in a state where the number of game balls hardly increases or decreases.

[Appendix E7]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) is
Operated from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position) with the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection means (318) or the other detection means (319),
When it is in the second position, any of the game balls passing through the second passage (352) and the game balls passing through the specific area are allowed to enter the third winning port (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E6, characterized in that

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix E7, not only the game balls passing through the second path of the distribution device, but also the game balls launched to the right side area of the game board enter the third winning slot by the movable accessory member. can be made Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the third winning hole from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine with new playability.

[Appendix E8]
A supplementary note characterized by further comprising a retraction guiding part (393, 394) provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member (36) and guiding the game ball in a direction away from the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to Appendix E7.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E8, a retraction guide section that guides the game ball in a direction away from the second prize winning opening is provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to appendix E8, for example, in a game state in which the operation time of the movable role member is short and the gaming machine is encouraged to be launched in the left area of the game board, the second winning hole in the movable role member Since the game ball can be received at a position away from the game ball, it is possible to secure a long time until the game ball reaches the second winning hole. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second winning hole in a short period of time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the standby position, which is not recommended. When performing, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix E9]
The retraction guide part (393, 394) includes the plurality of nails,
The plurality of nails are characterized in that they are arranged in an inclined manner such that the nails farther from the second prize winning port (315) are positioned lower than the nails on the side closer to the second prize winning port (315). The gaming machine according to appendix E8.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix E9, it is possible to guide the game ball to the upstream side in the moving direction of the game ball by a simple configuration in which a plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner. Also, in a game machine, since a large number of nails are generally driven into the game board, it is possible to provide a retraction guide section when driving these nails. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and the increase in manufacturing cost due to the provision of the retraction guide part, and to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member when the movable accessory member operates for a short time.

[Appendix E10]
The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball toward the second winning port (315) at the second position, and moves the game ball at the movable accessory member (36). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E9, characterized by having a delay unit (364) for delaying.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E10, the delay part is provided in the movable accessory member that guides the game ball to the second winning hole. Therefore, for example, even if the game ball is received by the movable role member by hitting the right side in a game state where the movable role member is activated for a short time and the left side is encouraged, the game ball is received by the delay unit. It is possible to secure a long time until the ball reaches the second winning hole. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the movable role member from reaching the second winning hole in a short period of time from the start of operation of the movable role member until it returns to the first position. It is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessary member when doing so.

[Appendix E11]
The gaming machine according to appendix E10, wherein the delay section (364, 364A-364C) moves the game ball along a meandering path in the movable accessory member (36, 36A-36C).

[Appendix E12]
The delay part (364D-364H) includes one or more linear projections (364D-364G) or linear recesses ( 364H).

[Appendix E13]
Any one of Appendix E10 to Appendix E12, wherein the delay portions (364I to 364P) are a plurality of protrusions (364I to 364N) or a plurality of recesses (364O, 364P) discretely arranged. The game machine described.

[Appendix E14]
The gaming machine according to appendix E13, wherein the plurality of projections (364I to 364N) or the plurality of recesses (364O, 364P) are arranged in a grid pattern.

According to the gaming machine according to appendices E11 to E14, it is possible to delay the movement of the game ball on the movable accessory member by means of the delay section with a simple configuration. For example, when the movable accessory member is formed by resin molding, the delay section can be integrally built into the movable accessory member by resin molding. As a result, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay section.

[Appendix E15]
From appendix E10, wherein the delay part (364Q) is one or more rollers (364Q) having a rotating shaft extending in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball on the movable accessory member (36Q) A gaming machine according to any one of Appendix E14.

[Appendix E16]
The gaming machine according to appendix E15, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) are rotationally driven in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the game ball.

[Appendix E17]
The gaming machine according to appendix E15 or appendix E16, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) apply magnetic force or electromagnetic force to the game ball.

According to the game machine according to appendices E15 to E17, since the movable accessory members are provided with rollers, not only is the design of the game machine improved, but also the behavior of the game ball moving the movable accessory members is improved. Since it becomes easy to draw attention to , interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix E18]
further comprising game state transition means (41) for transitioning a game state when a predetermined state is established between a plurality of game states;
The game state transition means (41) provides a third game state (mode A), a fourth game state (mode C, mode C') and a The gaming machine according to appendix E1, characterized by including a fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E').

The gaming machine according to appendix E18 has three game states, ie, third to fifth game states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio for the second winning hole is different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to appendix E18, it is possible to create new game features with improved game features based on three game states with different expected values of the ball entry ratio to the second winning hole. become.

[Appendix E19]
The third game state is
The game ball launched to the left side area is easy to enter the first winning port (314) and difficult to enter the second winning port (315),
It is difficult for the game ball launched into the right area to enter either the first winning hole (314) or the second winning hole (315),
The fourth game state is
The game ball hit to the left side area is more likely to enter both the first winning hole (314) and the second winning hole (315) than the game ball hit to the right side area,
The fifth game state is
A game ball hit to the right side area is difficult to enter the first winning hole (314), and more likely to enter the second winning hole (315) than a game ball hit to the left side area. The gaming machine according to appendix E18, characterized in that:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E19, in each of the third to fifth game states, the easiness of the ball entering the first winning hole and the second winning hole differs depending on the hitting area of the game ball with respect to the game board. As a result, three game states, ie, the third to fifth game states, in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different, can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix E20]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) moves from the first position to the second position when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the specific area by the other detection means (319). ,
In the third game state and the fourth game state, it is better to launch a game ball into the left area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318). is advantageous to the player compared to the case of hitting the game ball in the right area so that the passage of the is detected,
In the fifth game state, the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318) when the game ball is launched into the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319). The gaming machine according to appendix E19, which is more advantageous to the player than hitting the game ball to the left side area.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E20, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means or other detection means, the movable accessory member is activated to allow the game ball to enter the second winning hole. to Each of the third to fifth game states has a launch area that is advantageous to the player by using whether or not the movable accessory member is activated. That is, by a simple method using a movable accessory member, it is possible to realize three game states, the third to fifth game states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio to the second winning hole is different.

[Appendix E21]
The first winning port (314) is a first special determination whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by the entry of a game ball. Give an opportunity to do (jackpot lottery),
The second winning port (315) is a second special determination whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering a game ball. Give an opportunity to do (jackpot lottery),
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix E20, wherein the second special determination has a higher degree of expectation for obtaining a determination result for shifting to the second special game than the first special determination.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E21, the degree of expectation (function) of shifting to the second special game advantageous to the player by entering the game machine ball into the first start hole and entering the game ball into the second start hole is different. Therefore, by making the expected value of the ball-in ratio between the first winning hole and the second starting hole different, it is possible to realize three game states with different degrees of expectation for shifting to the second special game. As a result, the playability is enhanced, and the amusement of the game ball is improved. In addition, in the gaming machine according to appendix E21, since game balls that have not won any of the plurality of winning holes are discharged from the discharge port, in the third to fifth gaming states, special determination (first special determination and 2nd special judgment) is different. As a result, the special determination can be received at a frequency corresponding to the game state, so that the variety of games is enhanced, and the amusement of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix E22]
The third game state is
The game ball that is launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning port (314), and the second winning port ( 315) is difficult to enter,
The game ball launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) is difficult to enter the first winning port (314), and the second winning port ( 315),
The fourth game state is
The game ball that is launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning port (314), and the second winning port ( 315) is difficult to enter,
The game ball that is launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) is difficult to enter the first winning port (314), and the detection means (318) By detecting that the game ball passes through the second passage (352), it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning port (315),
The fifth game state is
The game ball hit to the right side area is difficult to enter the first winning hole (314), and the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball passes through the specific area. The gaming machine according to appendix E21, characterized in that the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole (315) as a.

[Appendix E23]
In the third game state and the fourth game state, the game ball launched into the right area is unlikely to enter either the first winning port (314) or the second winning port (315). The gaming machine according to appendix E22, characterized in that:

[Appendix E24]
The fifth game state is
The game ball that is launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning port (314), and the second winning port ( 315) is difficult to enter,
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) are unlikely to enter the first winning port (314), and the detection means (318) The gaming machine according to appendix E22 or appendix E23, characterized in that the game ball is likely to enter the second winning port (315) triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball through the second passage (352). .

In the gaming machine according to appendices E22 to E24, by adopting a sorting device together with a movable accessory member, three game states in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different are realized. be. Therefore, there are a third game state and a fourth game state in which game balls are launched in the left area and the game is progressed using the sorting device, and a game ball is launched in the right area and the game is played without using the sorting device. A progressing fifth game state can be realized. As a result, the game can be given a wide range, and at the same time, the playability is enhanced, and the interest of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix E25]
Said 4th game state (mode C, mode C') and said 5th game state (mode E, mode E') are compared with said 3rd game state (mode A), said 1st special determination and said 1st 2. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E20 to E24, characterized in that, in the special judgment, there is a high probability of being judged to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state).

[Appendix E26]
A first special symbol display unit ( 371) and
A second special symbol display unit ( 372) and
further comprising
The game state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special game state, after the end of the first special symbol game based on the first special determination or the second special determination Move to a special game state,
On the condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole (314) is to shift to the special game state, the special in the special game state After the game is completed, the game state is shifted to the fourth game state (mode C, mode C'),
On the condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole (315) is to shift to the special game state, the special in the special game state The gaming machine according to appendix E25, wherein the gaming machine is shifted to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the game is finished.

According to the gaming machines according to appendices E25 and E26, for example, there are game characteristics with barriers before transitioning to a special game state in which a large amount of game value is awarded, and game characteristics with multiple probability variable continuation rates. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with a variety of playability.

[Appendix E27]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E26, wherein the distribution unit (38) is fixed at a position where game balls introduced from the inlet (350) interfere with each other.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E27, the sorting portion of the sorting device is fixed at a position where game balls introduced from the inlet interfere with each other. Therefore, the player can read the tendency (individual difference between game machines) of sorting between the first passage and the second passage by the sorting section. As a result, the player can adjust the launch position of the game ball through trial and error to find the launch position of the game ball that allows the game ball to be easily distributed to the second passage. The enjoyment of searching for the launching position of the game ball where the game ball is easily distributed, or when a plurality of game machines of the same type are installed in the island facility of the game hall, the game ball is thrown from those game machines to the second passage. It is possible to obtain the enjoyment of searching for an easy-to-understand game machine.

[Appendix E28]
The game machine according to appendix E27, wherein the allocating parts (38D, 38F) have fixed parts (381D, 389F) that are immovable and non-rotatable.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E28, it is determined by accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball against the fixed portion. Therefore, the game balls are randomly distributed to the first path and the second path by an accidental factor, thereby reducing the monotony of the game and improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix E29]
The gaming machine according to appendix E28, wherein the fixed portions (381D, 389F) are fixed at one end, and at least a part of the portion other than the one end is plastically deformable.

[Appendix E30]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E29, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix E31]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E28 to E30, wherein the fixing parts (381D, 389F) are nails.

In the gaming machine according to notes E29 to E31, at least a part of the fixed part of the distribution part is plastically changeable, so that when the position of the fixed part deviates from the initial set value, the fixed part is returned to the initial position. it is possible to return. As a result, it is possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion.

[Appendix E32]
The distribution part (38F) has a plurality of nails,
E29 to E31, wherein the plurality of nails are arranged bilaterally symmetrically with one nail as the top portion and a vertical line passing through the one nail as an axis of symmetry when viewed from the front. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E32, by adjusting the peg on the top, it is possible to improve the deviation of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed part.

[Appendix E33]
The distribution section (38E) has a rotating body (382D) rotatably fixed by the fixing section (381D),
The rotating body (382D) moves a game ball toward the first passage (351) in a first direction and a direction opposite to the first direction, and moves the game ball toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E28 to E32, wherein the gaming machine is rotatable in a second direction to move the .

In the gaming machine according to appendix E33, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it is possible to select and design the distribution pattern of the game balls to the first path and the second path from various patterns. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix E34]
The gaming machine according to appendix E33, wherein the rotating body (382D) is freely rotatable in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix E35]
Said distribution part (38C) is a first direction to move the game ball toward said first passage (351), and a direction opposite to said first direction, toward said second passage (352) A gaming machine according to appendix E34, characterized in that the roller is fixed so as to be freely rotatable in the second direction for moving the game ball.

In the gaming machines pertaining to appendices E34 and E35, rotating bodies such as freely rotatable rollers are employed as the distribution section, and even with these rotating bodies, accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball against the rotating bodies determined by Therefore, the game balls are randomly distributed to the first path and the second path by an accidental factor, thereby reducing the monotony of the game and improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix F1]
A first winning port (314) into which game balls can enter;
A second prize winning port (315) that allows a game ball to enter and has a function different from that of the first prize winning port (314);
game state transition means (41) for transitioning a game state when a predetermined state is established among a plurality of game states;
with
The game state transition means (41) includes a first game state (mode A), a second game state (mode C, mode C') and a third game state (mode E, mode E'),
The first game state (mode A), the second game state (mode C, mode C') and the third game state (mode E, mode E') are mutually the first winning port (314) and the A gaming machine characterized in that the expected value of the ball entry ratio is different from that of a second winning hole (315).

The gaming machine according to appendix F1 has three game states, ie, first to third game states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole is different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to appendix F1, based on three game states in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole is different, a new game property with improved game property is realized. It becomes possible to create

[Appendix F2]
The first gaming state is
The game ball launched to the left side area is likely to enter the first winning port (314), but is difficult to enter the second winning port (315),
It is difficult for the game ball launched into the right area to enter either the first winning hole (314) or the second winning hole (315),
The second game state is
The game ball hit to the left side area is more likely to enter the first winning hole (351) and the second winning hole (315) than the game ball hit to the right side area,
The third game state is
While the game ball hit to the right side region is difficult to enter the first winning port (314), compared to the game ball hit to the left side region, it enters the second winning port (315). The game machine according to appendix F1, characterized in that it is easy to be played.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F2, in each of the first to third game states, the ease with which the ball enters the first winning hole and the second winning hole differs depending on the launching area of the game ball with respect to the game board. As a result, three game states, ie, the first to third game states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole is different, can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix F3]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352) and a distribution part (38), and is launched in the left area of the game board (31) and introduced from the introduction port (350). a sorting device (35) that sorts the game balls that have been thrown into either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by the sorting part (38);
A first detection means (318) for detecting that a game ball has passed through the second passage (352);
A second detection means (319) for detecting that a game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31);
It is detected that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352) by the first detection means (318), or that the game ball has passed through the specific area by the second detection means (319). Triggered by the detection, a game ball enters the second winning port (315) from the first position (standby position) where the entering of the game ball to the second winning port (315) is restricted. a movable accessory member (36) operable to a second position (operating position) where the ball is allowed;
further comprising
In the first game state and the second game state, the second detection means (319) detects the passage of the game ball by the first detection means (318). It is advantageous to the player compared to the case where the game ball is hit to the right side area so that the passage of the game ball is detected,
In the third game state, the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detection means (318) when the game ball is hit to the right side area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the second detection means (319). The gaming machine according to appendix F2, wherein the gaming machine is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball is hit to the left side area so as to be shot.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F3, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detection means or the second detection means, the movable accessory member is activated to allow the game ball to enter the second winning hole. enable Each of the first to third game states has a launch area that is advantageous to the player by using whether or not the movable accessory member is operated. That is, by a simple method using a movable accessory member, it is possible to realize three game states, ie, first to third game states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio is different between the first winning hole and the second winning hole.

[Appendix F4]
The first winning port (314) is a first special determination whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by the entry of a game ball. Give an opportunity to do (jackpot lottery),
The second winning port (315) is a second special determination whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering a game ball. Give an opportunity to do (jackpot lottery),
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix F3, wherein the second special determination has a higher degree of expectation than the first special determination for obtaining a determination result for shifting to the second special game.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F4, the degree of expectation (function) of shifting to the second special game advantageous to the player by entering the game machine ball into the first starting hole and entering the game ball into the second starting hole is different. Therefore, by making the expected value of the ball-in ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole different, it is possible to realize three game states with different degrees of expectation for shifting to the second special game. As a result, the playability is enhanced, and the amusement of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix F5]
The first gaming state is
The game ball that is launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is likely to enter the first winning hole (314), while the second winning hole (315) is difficult to enter,
The game balls launched into the left side area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) go to either the first winning port (314) or the second winning port (315) is also difficult to enter,
The second game state is
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) are likely to enter the first winning port (351), while the second winning port (352) difficult to enter,
The game ball that is launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) is difficult to enter the first winning hole (351), while the first detection When the means (318) detects that the game ball passes through the second passage (352), the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole (315),
The third game state is
While the game ball launched into the right side area is unlikely to enter the first winning hole (314), the second detection means (319) detects that the game ball passes through the right side specific area. The gaming machine according to appendix F4, characterized in that the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole (315) with this as a trigger.

[Appendix F6]
In the first game state and the second game state, the game ball launched into the right area is unlikely to enter either the first winning hole (314) or the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to appendix F5, characterized by:

[Appendix F7]
The third game state is
The game ball that is launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is likely to enter the first winning hole (314), while the second winning hole (315) is difficult to enter,
While the game ball that is launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) is unlikely to enter the first winning port (314), the first detection means (318) detects that the game ball passes through the second passage (352), and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole (352). The game machine described.

In the gaming machines according to notes F5 to F7, by adopting the sorting device together with the movable accessory member, three game states are realized in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole is different. be. Therefore, there are a first game state and a second game state in which game balls are launched in the left area and the game is progressed using the sorting device, and a game ball is launched in the right area and the game is played without using the sorting device. A progressing third game state can be realized. As a result, the game can be given a wide range, and at the same time, the playability is enhanced, and the interest of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix F8]
The second game state (mode C, mode C') and the third game state (mode E, mode E') are compared to the first game state (mode A), the first special determination and the first 2. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F4 to F7, characterized in that, in the special judgment, there is a high probability of being judged to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state).

[Appendix F9]
A first special symbol display unit ( 371) and
A second special symbol display unit ( 372) and
further comprising
The game state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special game state, after the end of the first special symbol game based on the first special determination or the second special determination Move to a special game state,
On the condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole (314L, 314R) is to shift to the special game state, the special game state After the end of the special game, shift to the second game state (mode C, mode C'),
On the condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole (315) is to shift to the special game state, the special in the special game state The game machine according to appendix F8, wherein the game machine is shifted to the third game state (mode E, mode E') after the game is finished.

According to the gaming machines according to appendices F8 and F9, for example, there are game characteristics with obstacles before transitioning to a special game state in which a large amount of game value is awarded, and game characteristics with multiple substantially variable continuation rates. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with a variety of playability.

[Appendix F10]
As a result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment,
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first determination result (probability variable jackpot) to be shifted to the third game state (mode E, mode E');
A second determination result (normal jackpot) that is shifted to a game state other than the third game state (mode E, mode E') after the special game in the special game state is completed;
The gaming machine according to Appendix F9, characterized by comprising:

[Appendix F11]
The game state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, after the end of the special game triggered by the first special determination or the second special determination, the second game Compared to the state (mode C, mode C') and the third game state (mode E, mode E'), it is determined to shift to the special game state in the first special determination or the second special determination. Shift to the fourth game state (mode B, mode D) with a low probability,
When the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number in the fourth game state (mode B, mode D), to shift to the first game state (mode A) The gaming machine according to appendix F10, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to notes F10 and F11, as a result of the first special determination or the second special determination, the first determination result of shifting to the third game state after the end of the special game, and the third state after the end of the special game It includes a second determination result that is shifted to a game state other than the game state. Also, the second game state and the third game state have a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state in the first special determination or the second special determination, compared to the first game state. There are three game states from first to third game states in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole is different, and the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole is triggered. On the condition that the result of the first special judgment is to shift to the special game state, the game state is shifted to the second game state after the special game is finished, and the game ball enters the second winning hole as a trigger. On the condition that the result of the second special determination is to shift to the special game state, the state is shifted to the third game state after the special game is finished. That is, the game machine having three game states from the first to the third game state can be applied to the probability variable machine including the so-called loop probability variable machine. Then, according to the gaming machine according to appendices F10 and F11, the game state is shifted stepwise to the third game state, which is most advantageous to the player, via the second game state. That is, in order to shift to the third game state that is most advantageous to the player, first, the state is shifted to the second game state, and in the second game state, the game ball is entered into the second winning hole in the special game determination, and the second game state is entered. The result of the second special judgment must be the first judgment result. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a game property that allows the player to shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player in stages.

[Appendix F12]
Said game state transition means (41), when the result of said first special judgment or said second special judgment is said second judgment result, said The game machine according to appendix F9, wherein the game machine is shifted to the first game state (mode A) after the special game is finished.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F12, when the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, the second game state and the third game state are shifted to the first game state after the special game ends. Status stay rate is lower. On the other hand, in the second game state and the third game state, it is possible not only to expect the game ball to enter the second winning hole by the support by the movable accessory member, but also to be in the special game state in the first special judgment or the second special judgment. This is a mode with a high probability of being determined to shift to . Therefore, the rate of staying in the second game state and the third game state is low, so that the game has a game property that easily falls to the first game state, but on the other hand, there is a sharpness in the transition of the game state, and the game value that the player can obtain. It is possible to provide a game machine with sharpness in terms of.

[Appendix F13]
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the first game state (mode A) is to shift to the special game state, the first special determination or the second special determination a transition count setting means for setting an upper limit number of transitions to be transitioned to the special game state with the transition to the special game state based on the first time;
The game state transition means (41) shifts to the first game state (mode A) after the end of the special game state of the transition upper limit number set by the transition count setting means (41). The game machine according to appendix F9.

The gaming machine according to appendix F13 has three game states, ie, first to third game states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole is different, and up to the transition upper limit number, the first winning The transition from to the special game state continues. That is, a game machine having three game states, ie, first to third game states, can be applied to a so-called limit machine. Then, on the condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole is to shift to the special game state, the state is shifted to the second game state after the special game is completed. , On the condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole is to shift to the special game state, the state is shifted to the third game state after the special game is completed. . That is, the transition destination of the game state after the special game differs depending on whether the trigger is the entry of the ball into the first winning hole or the entry of the ball into the second winning hole. Therefore, in the remaining chances of transitioning to the special game state after the first hit, the game property is determined by how many chances of transitioning to the special game state are left to shift to the third game state that is most advantageous to the player. It is possible to provide a game machine with

[Appendix F14]
The game state transition means (41), the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game in the second game state (mode C') or the third game state (mode E') is the upper limit number The game machine according to appendix F9, wherein the game machine is shifted to the first game state (mode A) when the game machine reaches .

[Appendix F15]
Further comprising a special variable ball entry device (82) having a special ball entry section (824) that is opened in the special game,
The game state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the first game state (mode A) is to shift to the special game state, the special in the special game in the special game state On the condition that the game ball enters the ball entering portion, after the special game is completed, the second game state (mode C') is entered,
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the second game state (mode C') is to shift to the special game state, in the special game in the special game state The gaming machine according to appendix F14, wherein the gaming machine is shifted to the third gaming state (mode E') after the special game is completed on condition that the game ball enters the special ball entering section (824). .

In the gaming machine according to notes F14 and F15, when the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number in the second game state or the third game state, the game state is shifted to the first game state. be. That is, a game machine having three game states of the first to third game states can be applied to ST machines including so-called V-ST machines. Further, in the gaming machines according to notes F14 and F15, it is necessary to go through the second game state in order to shift to the third game state that is most advantageous to the player. That is, in order to shift to the third game state, after first shifting to the second game state, the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number In the second special symbol game It is necessary that the result of the special determination is to shift to the special game state. Therefore, after the transition from the first game state to the second game state, how quickly to acquire the determination result of shifting to the special game state in the second special symbol game, and shift to the third game state most advantageous to the player. Determination of how many special game states are shifted until the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number after shifting to the third game state. It is possible to provide a game machine having a game feature of whether or not a result is obtained.

[Appendix F16]
A first special symbol display for executing a first special symbol game for displaying the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening (314L, 314R) by the first special symbol a part (371);
A second special symbol display unit ( 372) and
When the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole (315) is a specific result (small hit) different from the one to shift to the special game state A game ball can be entered by being activated, and a special entry in which the game state transition means (41) is granted the right to shift to the special game state (2 types of jackpots) by the game ball's entry. a feather accessory device (83) having a ball (833);
further comprising
The game state transition means (41)
Triggered by the fact that the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is to shift to the special game state (one type of jackpot), the state is shifted to the special game state,
On the condition that the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special game state, the second game state (mode C) after the end of the special game in the special game state to
After the operation of the feather accessory device (83) is completed, based on the right to transition to the special game state (2 types of jackpots) granted by the game ball entering the special ball entry section (833) Move to the special game state,
It is characterized by shifting to the third game state (mode E) after the special game in the special game state that is shifted when the game ball enters the special ball entry section (833). The gaming machine according to appendix F8.

[Appendix F17]
Said game state transition means (41), in said second game state or said third game state, when the total number of games of said first special symbol game and said second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number, said The gaming machine according to appendix F16, characterized in that the gaming machine is shifted to the first gaming state.

In the gaming machine according to notes F16 and F17, the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special game state (1st kind jackpot), or the game ball enters the special ball entering section By doing so, the right to shift to the special game state is granted (2 types of jackpots), and the state shifts to the special game state. In other words, a game machine having three game states of the first to third game states can also be applied to a so-called one-kind-two-kind machine.

[Appendix F18]
It is detected that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352) by the first detection means (318), or that the game ball has passed through the specific area by the second detection means (319). Triggered by the detection, normal determination means for determining whether or not the movable accessory member (36) should be moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position). (41) further comprising
The second game state (mode C, mode C') and the third game state (mode E, mode E') are compared with the first game state (mode A) by the normal determination means (41). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F3 to F17, characterized in that the normal judgment has a high probability that the movable accessory member (36) is to be operated.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F18, the second game state, the third game state, and the first game state have different probabilities of being determined to operate the movable accessory member in the normal determination by the normal determining means. As a result, three game states, ie, the first to third game states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole is different, can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix F19]
In the second game state (mode C, mode C'), the game ball passed through the second passage (352) by the first detection means (318) compared to the first game state (mode A). The game machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F18, characterized in that the time from the detection of this to the start of the operation of the movable accessory member (36) is short.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F19, in the second game state, compared to the first game state, the movable accessory member is activated after the first detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the second path. Short time to start. As a result, three game states, ie, the first to third game states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole is different, can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix F20]
In the third game state (mode E, mode E'), compared to the first game state (mode A) and the second game state (mode C, mode C'), the movable accessory member (36) The game machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F19, characterized in that the operation time of the is long.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F20, the operating time of the movable accessory member is longer in the third game state than in the first game state and the second game state. As a result, three game states, ie, the first to third game states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole is different, can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix G1]
a plurality of prize-winning ports into which game balls can enter;
A first position where entry of a game ball into a specific winning hole (315) out of a plurality of winning holes is restricted, and a second position where entry of a game ball into the specific winning hole (315) is permitted. a movable accessory member (36) operable between two positions;
A retraction guide section (393, 394) provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member (36) and guiding the game ball in a direction away from the specific winning opening (315);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix G1, a retraction guiding portion that guides the game ball in a direction away from the second prize winning opening is provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to appendix G1, for example, in a game state in which the operation time of the movable role member is short and the gaming machine is encouraged to be launched in the left area of the game board, a specific winning hole in the movable role member Since the game ball can be received at a position away from the game ball, it is possible to secure a long time until the game ball reaches a specific winning hole. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the specific prize winning opening in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the standby position, which is not recommended. When performing, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix G2]
The retraction guide part (393, 394) includes the plurality of nails,
The plurality of nails are characterized in that they are arranged in an inclined manner such that the nails farther from the specific prize winning opening (315) are positioned lower than the nails closer to the specific winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to appendix G1.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix G2, the game ball can be guided to the upstream side in the movement direction of the game ball by a simple configuration in which a plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner. Also, in a game machine, since a large number of nails are generally driven into the game board, it is possible to provide a retraction guide section when driving these nails. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and the increase in manufacturing cost due to the provision of the retraction guide part, and to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member when the movable accessory member operates for a short time.

[Appendix G3]
The plurality of winning openings further include a predetermined winning opening (314R) having a different function from the specific winning opening (315),
The movable accessory member (36) permits the game ball to enter the specific winning hole (315) and restricts the entering of the game ball to the predetermined winning hole (314R). A position (standby position) and a second position (operation position), and the gaming machine according to appendix G1 or appendix G2.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G3, entry of a game ball into a specific winning hole and a predetermined winning hole is permitted or restricted depending on whether or not the movable accessory member is operated. Specifically, when the movable accessory member is in the first position where the movable accessory member is not operated, entry of a game ball into a specific winning hole is allowed, while entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning hole is permitted. When the movable accessory member is at the second position where the movable accessory member is actuated, entry of a game ball into a specific winning hole is restricted, while entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning hole is permitted. Thus, in the gaming machine according to Appendix G3, the movable accessory member not only permits or restricts entry of a game ball into a specific winning hole, but also allows entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning hole. Permit or restrict at the same time. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game, and to provide a highly interesting game machine with new game features according to the control mode of the motion of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix G4]
The movable accessory member (36) is
At the first position (standby position), the predetermined winning openings (314R, 314) are opened to allow a game ball to enter the predetermined winning openings (314R, 314),
By covering the predetermined winning opening (314R) at the second position (operating position), the predetermined winning opening (314R) is closed and entry of game balls into the predetermined winning opening (314R) is restricted. The game machine according to appendix G3, characterized in that

According to the gaming machine according to appendix G4, with a simple configuration in which the movable accessory member is provided at a position capable of opening and closing a predetermined prize winning opening, the movable accessory member allows a game ball to enter a specific winning opening. Or, in addition to restricting, it is possible to allow or restrict entry of game balls into a predetermined winning hole.

[Appendix G5]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352) and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are distributed to the distribution section (38). further comprising a sorting device (35) that sorts to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by
The predetermined winning openings (314R, 314) are provided at positions where game balls that have passed through the second passage (352) can enter,
The movable accessory member (36) is
At the first position (standby position), the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is allowed to enter the predetermined winning opening (314R, 314), while allowing the game ball to enter the specific winning opening (315). restrict the entry of
At the second position (operating position), the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is restricted from entering the predetermined winning opening (314R, 314), while entering the specific winning opening (315) The gaming machine according to appendix G4, characterized in that it allows the entry of .

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G5, the game balls are distributed to the first path and the second path by the distribution device, and when the game balls are distributed to the second path by the distribution device, the movable accessory member Entry of a game ball into a specific winning hole and a predetermined winning hole is permitted or restricted depending on the presence or absence of operation. Specifically, the game ball distributed to the second path is allowed to enter a predetermined winning hole when the movable accessory member is in the first position where the movable accessory member is not operated, while the game ball is specified. entry of a game ball into a winning opening is restricted, and entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning opening is restricted when the movable accessory member is in the second position where it operates, while entering a specific winning opening of game balls are allowed. Thus, in the gaming machine according to Appendix G5, the movable accessory member not only permits or restricts the entry of game balls into a specific winning hole, At the same time, permission or restriction of entry of game balls into a winning hole is performed. The gaming machine according to Appendix G5 can vary the ratio of winning balls between a specific winning hole and a predetermined winning hole through cooperation between the sorting device and the movable accessory member. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game, and to provide a highly interesting game machine with new game features according to the control mode of the motion of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix G6]
The movable accessory member (36) is positioned between the second passage (352) and the predetermined winning opening (314R) for the game ball passing through the second passage (352). ), the predetermined winning opening (314R) is opened at the first position (standby position), and the predetermined winning opening (314R) is opened at the second position (operating position). 314R) in the closed state.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix G6, a game ball passing through the second passage between the second passage and the predetermined prize winning port is moved toward the predetermined prize winning port by using a part of the movable accessory member as the opening/closing portion. In the middle of the path, for example, a movable accessory member is provided at a position where a predetermined prize winning opening can be opened and closed. , permitting or restricting entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning hole.

[Appendix G7]
The movable accessory member (36) is connected to the opening/closing part (362), and is a guide part (363) for moving the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) toward the opening/closing part (362). ), the gaming machine according to appendix G6.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix G7, a part of the movable accessory member is provided as a guide part continuous to the opening/closing part at a position for moving the game ball launched in the right side area toward the opening/closing part. , allowing or restricting the entry of a game ball into a specific winning hole by the movable accessory member, and allowing or restricting the entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning hole at the same time.

[Appendix G8]
The movable accessory member (36R) includes a first portion (361R) that allows a game ball to enter the second winning port (315) from the left side of the second winning port (315), and the second winning port. The gaming machine according to appendix G3, further comprising a second part (362R) for allowing a game ball to enter the second winning hole (315) from the right side of (315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G8, the movable accessory member includes a first portion for entering a game ball into the second winning port from the left side of the second winning port, and a first portion for entering the game ball from the right side of the second winning port. 2 and a second part for entering a ball into a winning hole. As a result, with a simple configuration in which the movable accessory member is provided with the first part and the second part, the movable accessory member allows or restricts the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole and the second winning hole. At the same time, it is possible to allow or restrict the entry of game balls into the ball.

[Appendix G9]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352) and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are distributed to the distribution section (38). further comprising a sorting device (35) that sorts to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by
The movable accessory member (36R) is
At the first position (standby position), the game ball passing through the second passage is allowed to enter the first start port (314),
In the second position (operating position), the first portion (361R) allows the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) to enter the second winning port (352), and the second The gaming machine according to appendix G8, wherein the portion (362R) allows a game ball hit to the right side area of the game board (31) to enter the second winning hole (352).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G9, the first portion of the movable accessory member allows the game ball in the second path of the sorting device to enter the second winning hole. As a result, in a game machine employing a sorting device, a game ball can be entered into the first winning hole by the movable accessory member by a simple configuration in which the movable accessory member is provided with the first portion and the second portion. and permission or restriction of entry of the game ball into the second winning hole can be performed at the same time.

[Appendix G10]
The movable accessory member (36R) is provided between the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R), and allows game balls to enter the specific winning opening (315). further having a penetrating portion (363R),
The game according to Appendix G8 or Appendix G9, wherein the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R) are inclined so as to become lower toward the through portion (363R). machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G10, both the game ball in the second path and the game ball in the right area can be It can be moved to the penetrating part and entered into a specific winning hole.

[Appendix G11]
The movable accessory member (36R) is
In the first portion (361R), the entry of game balls passing through the second passage (352) into the specific winning opening (351) is restricted at the first position (operating position), and the allow in a second position (actuated position),
In the second portion (362R), entry of game balls launched into the right region of the game board (31) into the specific winning opening (351) is restricted at the first position (operating position), The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G8 to G10, wherein the gaming machine is permitted at the second position (operating position).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G11, both the game ball in the second path and the game ball in the right area can be It can be moved to the penetrating part and entered into a specific winning hole.

[Appendix G12]
The movable accessory member (36S) includes a rotatable first movable accessory member (3681S) and a second movable accessory member (3682S),
The tip portions of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) are close to each other at the first position (standby position), and at the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to appendix G3, wherein the tips of the are separated from each other.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G12, the movable accessory member is configured as a so-called electric tulip. Therefore, with a simple configuration, it is possible to allow or restrict entry of a game ball into a specific winning opening by the movable accessory member, as well as allow or restrict entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning opening.

[Appendix G13]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352) and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are distributed to the distribution section (38). further comprising a sorting device (35) that sorts to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by
One of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) is provided below the second passage (352), and at the first position (standby position) the The game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) interferes to move the game ball toward the predetermined winning port (314), and the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) at the operating position The gaming machine according to appendix G12, characterized in that the interference causes the game ball to move toward the specific winning hole (315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G13, the game balls are distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device, and when the game balls are distributed to the second passage by the distribution device, the movable accessory member Depending on whether or not the first movable accessory member and the second movable accessory member are operated, entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning opening and a specific winning opening is permitted or restricted. Specifically, the game ball distributed to the second path is a game ball to a predetermined winning hole when the first movable accessory member and the second movable accessory member as movable accessory members are in the standby position. are allowed to enter, but entry of game balls into a specific winning hole is restricted, and when the first movable accessory member and the second movable accessory member are in the operating position, the ball entering the predetermined winning hole is restricted. While entry of game balls is restricted, entry of game balls into specific winning holes is allowed. Thus, in the gaming machine according to Appendix G13, the first movable accessory member and the second movable accessory member not only allow or restrict entry of a game ball into a specific winning hole, Entry of game balls into a predetermined winning hole of the game balls sorted to 2 is allowed or restricted at the same time. The game machine according to Appendix G13 can vary the ratio of winning balls between a predetermined winning hole and a specific winning hole through cooperation between the sorting device and the movable accessory member. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game, and to provide a highly interesting game machine with new game features according to the control mode of the motion of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix G14]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352) and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are distributed to the distribution section (38). A sorting device (35) that sorts to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by
A gap through which a game ball can pass is formed between the specific winning hole (315) and the game ball hit to the right side area of the game board (31) is directed toward the specific winning hole (315). a guiding part (31M') to be moved;
further comprising
The movable accessory members (36S to 36X) are
At the first position (standby position), the specific winning hole (315) is closed, and the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) and the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) are launched into the right area of the game board (31). Limiting the entry of game balls into the specific winning hole (315),
At the second position (operating position), the specific winning hole (315) is opened and a path for game balls is formed between the guiding part (31M') and the specific winning hole (315). Supplementary note G1 or Supplementary note characterized in that it allows the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) and the game ball that has been hit to the right side area to enter the specific winning hole (315) A gaming machine described in G2.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G14, when the movable accessory member is at the second position, the second path of the sorting device is formed by forming a path for game balls between the guide portion and the specific winning opening. Not only the passing game ball but also the game ball hit to the right side area of the game board can be entered into a specific winning hole by the movable accessory member. Therefore, it is possible to enter a game ball into a specific winning hole from a plurality of paths by using one movable accessory member. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine with new playability.

[Appendix G15]
The movable accessory member (36T) is slidable between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position),
The first position (standby position) is a position that closes the specific winning opening (315) and opens the gap,
The gaming machine according to appendix G14, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position in which the specific winning port (315) is opened and the gap is closed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G15, by a simple configuration in which the movable accessory member is slid between the first position that closes the specific prize winning opening and the second position that closes the gap between the guiding portion and the specific prize winning opening, , it becomes possible to enter a game ball into a specific winning hole from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member.

[Appendix G16]
The movable accessory members (36U, 36W) are operable between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) by rotation,
The first position (standby position) is a position that closes the specific winning opening (315) and opens the gap,
The gaming machine according to appendix G14, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position in which the specific winning port (315) is opened and the gap is closed.

[Appendix G17]
The game machine according to appendix G16, wherein the movable accessory member (36U) is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in a direction along the game board (31).

[Appendix G18]
The game machine according to appendix G16, wherein the movable accessory member (36V) is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the game board (31).

In the gaming machine according to notes G16 to G18, the movable accessory member is horizontally rotated between a first position for closing a specific prize-winning opening and a second position for closing a gap between the guiding portion and the specific prize-winning opening. With the simple configuration of allowing the game ball to enter a specific prize winning hole from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member, it becomes possible.

[Appendix G19]
The game machine according to appendix G18, wherein the rotating body (36V) can be stopped in an upright state at a third position (standby position) that opens the second starting port (315) and the gap.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G19, the game balls in the right area of the sorting device are movable in the game state (mode A to mode C) in which the movable accessory member is released for a short period of time without providing a retraction guiding part. It is possible to prevent the user from being guided to the second starting port by the accessory member.

[Appendix G20]
The movable accessory member (36W) is rotatable, and includes a closing portion (364W) capable of closing the second starting port (315) and the gap, and opening the second starting port (315) and the gap. with a possible penetration (363W),
The first position (standby position) is a position in which the closing portion (364W) closes the second winning opening (315) and the through hole (363W) opens the gap,
The second position (operating position) is a position in which the through hole (363W) opens the second winning port (315) and the closing portion (364W) closes the gap. The game machine described in appendix G14.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G20, a single movable role product member having a closing part and a penetrating part is rotated to allow a game ball to enter the second winning hole from a plurality of paths. becomes possible.

[Appendix G21]
The movable accessory member (36X) rotates around a rotation axis extending in a direction inclined with respect to the horizontal direction between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) in the gap. is a possible rotating body,
The rotating body (36X) is
A first penetration portion (361X) through which a game ball can pass through along a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis, and a direction that intersects the first penetration portion (361X) when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis. a second through portion (362X) through which the ball can pass;
The first position (standby position) is a position where the game ball is dropped in the gap by the second through portion (362X),
The gaming machine according to appendix G14, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position where the first through portion (361X) communicates with the specific winning port (315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G21, a game ball can be entered from a plurality of paths into a specific winning hole by means of a single movable accessory member by a simple configuration in which the rotating body is rotated between the specific winning hole and the guiding part. It becomes possible to make a ball.

[Appendix G22]
A game ball that moves the movable accessory members (36T to 36X) toward the specific winning port (315) when the movable accessory members (36T to 36X) are at the second position (operating position) The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G14 to G21, further comprising a guard section (31B) that prevents the winning amount from exceeding the specific winning hole (315).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G22, by providing the guard portion, when the movable accessory member is at the second position, the game ball moving the movable accessory member toward the specific winning opening can be reliably selected to win a specific prize. You can put the ball in your mouth.

[Appendix G23]
A detection means (318) for detecting that a game ball has passed through the second passage (352);
When the detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), the movable accessory member (36) is moved to the first position (standby position) and the first position. Normal judgment means (41) for making a normal judgment as to whether or not to operate between two positions (operating positions);
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix G5 to Appendix G7 to Appendix G11 and Appendix G13 to Appendix G22, further comprising:

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix G23, a game ball detection means is provided in the second path that allows the game ball to enter a specific winning hole by the operation of the movable accessory member, and the game ball is detected by this detection means. Triggered by the operation, the normal determination means performs normal determination as to whether or not to operate the movable accessory member. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix G23, although the game balls are distributed to the first path and the second path, whether or not the movable accessory member is operated, that is, whether the movable accessory member moves to a specific winning hole is determined. Whether or not the game ball is allowed to enter is determined according to the result of the normal determination. Therefore, whether or not the game ball in the second path enters the specific winning hole depends on the result of the normal determination, so the game is less likely to become monotonous and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Appendix G24]
The specific winning port (315) is a special determination (jackpot The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G23, wherein the gaming machine provides an opportunity to conduct a lottery.

[Appendix G25]
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments G1 to G24, wherein the specific winning opening (313') is a general winning opening.

[Appendix H1]
a plurality of winning holes (314, 315) into which game balls can enter;
A first position (waiting position) where entry of a game ball into a specific winning hole (315) of the plurality of winning holes (314, 315) is restricted and a game to the specific winning hole (315) A movable accessory member ( 36) and
with
A gaming machine, wherein the movable accessory member (36) has a delay section (364) for delaying the movement of the game ball on the movable accessory member (36).

In the gaming machine according to appendix H1, the delay part is provided in the movable accessory member that guides the game ball to a specific winning hole. Therefore, for example, even if the game ball is received by the movable role member by hitting the right side in a game state where the movable role member is activated for a short time and the left side is encouraged, the game ball is received by the delay unit. It is possible to secure a long time until the reaches a specific winning opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the specific prize winning opening in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the standby position, which is not recommended. When performing, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix H2]
The gaming machine according to appendix H1, wherein the delay section (364, 364A-364C) moves the game ball along a meandering path in the movable accessory member (36, 36A-36C).

[Appendix H3]
The delay part (364D-364H) includes one or more linear projections (364D-364G) or linear recesses ( 364H), the gaming machine according to appendix H1 or appendix H2.

[Appendix H4]
Any one of Appendix H1 to Appendix H3, wherein the delay portions (364I to 364P) are a plurality of protrusions (364I to 364N) or a plurality of recesses (364O, 364P) that are discretely arranged. The game machine described.

[Appendix H5]
The gaming machine according to appendix H4, wherein the plurality of projections (364I to 364N) or the plurality of recesses (364O, 364P) are arranged in a grid pattern.

According to the gaming machine according to appendices H2 to H5, it is possible to delay the movement of the game ball on the movable accessory member by means of the delay section with a simple configuration. For example, when the movable accessory member is formed by resin molding, the delay section can be integrally built into the movable accessory member by resin molding. As a result, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay section.

[Appendix H6]
From appendix H1, wherein the delay part (364Q) is one or more rollers (364Q) having a rotating shaft extending in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball on the movable accessory member (36Q) The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix H5.

[Appendix H7]
The game machine according to appendix H6, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) are rotationally driven in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the game ball.

[Appendix H8]
The game machine according to appendix H6 or appendix H7, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) apply magnetic force or electromagnetic force to the game ball.

According to the game machine according to notes H6 to H8, since the movable accessory members are provided with rollers, not only is the design of the game machine improved, but also the behavior of the game ball that moves the movable accessory members. Since it becomes easy to draw attention to , interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix H9]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352) and a distribution section (38), and is launched into the left area of the game board (31) and introduced from the introduction port (350). a sorting device (35) for sorting the game balls into either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by the sorting part (38);
A first detection means (318) for detecting that a game ball has passed through the second passage (352);
A second detection means (319) for detecting that a game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31);
further comprising
The movable accessory member (36) is
Said first detection means (318) or said second detection means (319) detects the passage of the game ball, and is operated from said first position (standby position) to said second position (operating position). ,
When in the second position, either the game ball passing through the second passage (352) or the game ball passing through the specific area is permitted to enter the specific winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H8, characterized in that

According to the gaming machine according to appendix H9, not only the game balls passing through the second path of the distribution device, but also the game balls hit to the right side area of the game board enter the specific winning opening by the movable accessory member. can be made Therefore, it is possible to enter a game ball into a specific winning hole from a plurality of paths by using one movable accessory member. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine with new playability.

[Appendix H10]
The movable accessory member (36) has a longer operating time when satisfying a second condition different from the first condition than the operating time when satisfying the first condition. The gaming machine described in H9.

[Appendix H11]
It is better to hit the game ball in the left area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detection means (318), and the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the second detection means (319). A first game state that is advantageous to the player compared to the case where the game ball is launched in the second direction, and the second state where the game ball is launched in the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the second detection means (319). A second game state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the game ball is hit to the left area so that the passing of the game ball is detected by the detecting means (318); Further comprising a game state transition means (41) for transitioning the state,
The first condition is the first game state (mode A, mode C),
The gaming machine according to appendix H10, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

According to the gaming machines according to appendices H10 and H11, the ease with which a game ball enters a specific winning hole by means of a movable accessory member when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied are considered different. For example, the operation time of the movable accessory member is changed according to the game state (advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied, if the movable accessory member is operated, it is difficult for the game ball launched to the right side area to enter the specific winning hole, and the movement path of the game ball It is possible to set the ease of throwing a game ball into a specific winning hole. As a result, if the player hits right in a situation where left-handed hitting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player is in a disadvantageous situation, so left-handed hitting is encouraged in situations where left-handed hitting is encouraged. it becomes possible to

[Appendix H12]
The specific winning hole (315) is determined by the time required for the game ball detected by the second detection means (319) to enter the specific winning hole (315). ) is arranged at a position longer than the time required for the game ball to enter the specific winning hole (315).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix H12, the time required for the game ball detected by the first detection means to enter the specific winning hole, and the time required for the game ball detected by the second detecting means to enter the specific winning hole It is different from the time required to enter the ball. Therefore, for example, a game ball launched in the left area of the game board can enter a specific winning hole, while a game ball launched in the right area is made difficult to enter into a specific winning hole. becomes possible. As a result, if the player hits right in a situation where left-handed hitting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player is in a disadvantageous situation, so left-handed hitting is encouraged in situations where left-handed hitting is encouraged. it becomes possible to

[Appendix H13]
The operation time of the movable accessory member (36) in the first game state (mode A, mode C) is such that the game ball detected by the first detection means (318) is in the specific winning hole. (315) It is time to allow the entry of a ball and limit the entry of the game ball detected by the second detection means (319) into the specific winning hole (315). A game machine according to appendix H11 or appendix H12.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix H13, it is possible to appropriately restrict entry of a game ball into a specific winning hole when hitting to the right in the first game state in which hitting to the left is encouraged. Therefore, if the player hits right in a situation where left-handed hitting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. becomes possible.

[Appendix H14]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the second game state (mode E) is such that the game ball detected by the second detection means (319) is in the specific winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H11 to H13, characterized in that it is a time when a ball is allowed to be landed at .

According to the gaming machine according to appendix H14, it is possible to enter a game ball into a specific winning hole by hitting right in the second game state. Therefore, by hitting to the right in the second game state, it is possible to proceed with the game in a state where the number of game balls hardly increases or decreases.

[Appendix H15]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352) and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are distributed to the distribution section (38). further comprising a sorting device (35) that sorts to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by
The predetermined winning openings (314R, 314) are provided at positions where game balls that have passed through the second passage (352) can enter,
The movable accessory member (36) is
At the first position (standby position), the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is allowed to enter the predetermined winning opening (314R, 314), while allowing the game ball to enter the specific winning opening (315). restrict the entry of
At the second position (operating position), the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is restricted from entering the predetermined winning opening (314R, 314), while entering the specific winning opening (315) The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H14, characterized in that the entry of a ball is permitted.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H15, the game balls are distributed to the first path and the second path by the distribution device, and when the game balls are distributed to the second path by the distribution device, the movable accessory member Entry of a game ball into a specific winning hole and a predetermined winning hole is permitted or restricted depending on the presence or absence of operation. Specifically, the game ball distributed to the second path is allowed to enter a predetermined winning hole when the movable accessory member is in the first position where the movable accessory member is not operated, while the game ball is specified. entry of a game ball into a winning opening is restricted, and entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning opening is restricted when the movable accessory member is in the second position where it operates, while entering a specific winning opening of game balls are allowed. Thus, in the gaming machine according to appendix H15, the movable accessory member not only permits or restricts entry of game balls into a specific winning hole, At the same time, permission or restriction of entry of game balls into a winning hole is performed. Then, the gaming machine according to appendix H15 can vary the ratio of winning balls between a specific winning hole and a predetermined winning hole through cooperation between the sorting device and the movable accessory member. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game, and to provide a highly interesting game machine with new game features according to the control mode of the motion of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix H16]
The movable accessory member (36) is positioned between the second passage (352) and the predetermined winning opening (314R) for the game ball passing through the second passage (352). ), the predetermined winning opening (314R) is opened at the first position (standby position), and the predetermined winning opening (314R) is opened at the second position (operating position). 314R) in the closed state.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix H16, movement of a game ball that has passed through the second passage between the second passage and the predetermined prize winning port with a part of the movable accessory member as the opening/closing portion toward the predetermined prize winning port In the middle of the path, for example, a movable accessory member is provided at a position where a predetermined prize winning opening can be opened and closed. At the same time, it is possible to allow or restrict the entry of game balls into a predetermined winning hole.

[Appendix H17]
The movable accessory member (36) is connected to the opening/closing part (362), and is a guide part (363) for moving the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) toward the opening/closing part (362). ), the gaming machine according to appendix H16.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix H17, a part of the movable accessory member is provided as a guide part continuous to the opening/closing part at a position for moving the game ball launched in the right side area toward the opening/closing part. , allowing or restricting the entry of a game ball into a specific winning hole by the movable accessory member, and allowing or restricting the entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning hole at the same time.

[Appendix H18]
The movable accessory member (36R) includes a first portion (361R) that allows game balls to enter the specific winning opening (315) from the left side of the specific winning opening (315), and the specific winning opening. A gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H17, characterized in that it has a second part (362R) that allows a game ball to enter the specific winning hole (315) from the right side of (315). .

In the gaming machine according to appendix H18, the movable accessory member includes a first portion that causes a game ball to enter the specific winning hole from the left side of the specific winning hole, and a game ball that specifies the game ball from the right side of the specific winning hole. and a second part for entering a ball into a winning hole of. As a result, with a simple configuration in which the movable accessory member is provided with the first portion and the second portion, the movable accessory member allows or restricts the entry of the game ball into the predetermined winning opening, and controls the entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening. At the same time, it is possible to allow or restrict the entry of game balls into the ball.

[Appendix H19]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352) and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are distributed to the distribution section (38). further comprising a sorting device (35) that sorts to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by
The movable accessory member (36R) is
At the first position (standby position), the game ball passing through the second passage is allowed to enter the other specific start port (314),
In the second position (operating position), the first part (361R) allows the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) to enter the specific winning hole (315), and the second The gaming machine according to appendix H18, wherein the portion (362R) allows a game ball hit to the right side area of the game board (31) to enter the specific winning hole (315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix H19, the first portion of the movable accessory member allows the game ball of the second path of the sorting device to enter a specific winning hole. As a result, in a game machine employing a sorting device, a game ball can be entered into a predetermined winning hole by means of a simple structure in which the movable accessory member is provided with the first portion and the second portion. can be permitted or restricted and the entry of game balls into a specific winning hole can be permitted or restricted at the same time.

[Appendix H20]
The movable accessory member (36R) is provided between the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R), and allows game balls to enter the specific winning opening (315). further having a penetrating portion (363R),
The game according to appendix H18 or appendix H19, wherein the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R) are inclined so as to become lower toward the through portion (363R). machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H20, by a simple configuration in which a through portion is provided between the first portion and the second portion having different inclination states, both the game ball in the second path and the game ball in the right area It can be moved to the penetrating part and entered into a specific winning hole.

[Appendix H21]
The movable accessory member (36R) is
In the first portion (361R), the entry of game balls passing through the second passage (352) into the specific winning opening (315) is restricted at the first position (operating position), and the allow in a second position (actuated position),
In the second portion (362R), the entry of the game ball launched into the right side area of the game board (31) into the specific winning hole (315) is restricted at the first position (operating position), The gaming machine according to appendix H19 or appendix H20, wherein the gaming machine is permitted at the second position (operating position).

In the gaming machine according to appendix H21, both the game ball in the second path and the game ball in the right area can be It can be moved to the penetrating part and entered into a specific winning hole.

[Appendix H22]
The specific winning port (315) is a special determination (jackpot The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H121, wherein the gaming machine provides an opportunity to conduct a lottery.

[Appendix H23]
The plurality of winning openings are the first special determination (jackpot lottery) of whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering a game ball. ), and whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering a game ball. Including a second winning port (315) that gives an opportunity to make a second special judgment (jackpot lottery),
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The second special determination has a higher degree of expectation than the first special determination for obtaining a determination result to shift to the second special game,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H22, wherein the specific prize winning port (315) is the second prize winning port.

[Appendix I1]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352) and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are distributed to the distribution section (38). A sorting device (35) that sorts to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by
A game machine characterized in that the distribution part (38) is fixed at a position where game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) interfere with each other.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I1, the sorting portion of the sorting device is fixed at a position where the game balls introduced from the inlet interfere with each other. Therefore, the player can read the tendency (individual difference between game machines) of sorting between the first passage and the second passage by the sorting section. As a result, the player can adjust the launch position of the game ball through trial and error to find the launch position of the game ball that allows the game ball to be easily distributed to the second passage. The enjoyment of searching for the launching position of the game ball where the game ball is easily distributed, or when a plurality of game machines of the same type are installed in the island facility of the game hall, the game ball is thrown from those game machines to the second passage. It is possible to obtain the enjoyment of searching for an easy-to-understand game machine.

[Appendix I2]
The game machine according to appendix I1, wherein the allocating parts (38D, 38F) have fixed parts (381D, 389F) that are immovable and non-rotatable.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I2, it is determined by accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball against the fixed part. Therefore, the game balls are randomly distributed to the first path and the second path by an accidental factor, thereby reducing the monotony of the game and improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix I3]
The gaming machine according to appendix I2, wherein the fixed portions (381D, 389F) are fixed at one end, and at least a part of the portion other than the one end is plastically deformable.

[Appendix I4]
The game machine according to Appendix I3, wherein the fixed portion (381D, 389F) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix I5]
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments I2 to I4, wherein the fixing parts (381D, 389F) are nails.

In the game machines according to appendices I3 to I5, since at least a part of the fixed portion of the distribution portion is plastically changeable, the fixed portion is returned to the initial position when the position of the fixed portion deviates from the initial set value. it is possible to return. This makes it possible to improve the bias in distribution ratio over time.

[Appendix I6]
The distribution part (38F) has a plurality of nails,
The plurality of nails are arranged bilaterally symmetrically with one nail as the top and a vertical line passing through the one nail as an axis of symmetry in a front view. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I6, by adjusting the peg at the top, it is possible to improve the deviation of the apportionment ratio over time.

[Appendix I7]
The distribution section (38E) has a rotating body (382D) rotatably fixed by the fixing section (381D),
The rotating body (382D) is a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and a direction opposite to the first direction, and is directed toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to any one of attachments I2 to I5, wherein the gaming machine is rotatable in the second direction for moving the ball.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I7, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it is possible to select from various patterns and design the distribution pattern of the game balls to the first path and the second path. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix I8]
The gaming machine according to appendix I7, wherein the rotating body (382D) is freely rotatable in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix I9]
Said distribution part (38C) is a first direction to move the game ball toward said first passage (351), and a direction opposite to said first direction, toward said second passage (352) The game machine according to appendix I1, wherein the roller is fixed so as to be freely rotatable in the second direction for moving the game ball.

In the game machines according to attachments I8 and I9, rotating bodies such as freely rotatable rollers are employed as the sorting section, and even with these rotating bodies, accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball against the rotating body determined by Therefore, the game balls are randomly distributed to the first path and the second path by an accidental factor, thereby reducing the monotony of the game and improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix J1]
A first winning port (314, 314R, 313′) into which a game ball can enter;
A second winning hole (315) that allows entry of a game ball and has a function different from that of the first winning holes (314, 314R, 313');
Restrict entry of game balls into one of the first winning opening (314, 314R, 313') and the second winning opening (314, 314R, 313'), and A first position (standby position) that allows the game ball to enter the other winning opening (315) different from the one winning opening (314, 314R), and the one winning opening (314, 314R, 313' ), and a second position (operating position) that restricts the entry of game balls into the other winning opening (315). 36, 36R, 36S) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J1, a game ball is allowed to enter one of the first winning opening and the second winning opening depending on whether or not the movable accessory member is operated. a state in which entry of a game ball into the other winning opening is restricted, and entry of a game ball into one of the winning openings is restricted, whereas entry of a game ball into the other winning opening is restricted; Any of the allowed states is realized. Thus, in the gaming machine according to appendix J1, the movable accessory member not only allows or restricts entry of a game ball into one of the winning openings, but also allows entry of a game ball into the other winning opening. Permit or restrict at the same time. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game, and to provide a highly interesting game machine with new game features according to the control mode of the motion of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix J2]
The movable accessory member (36) is
The first winning opening (314R, 313') is in the open state at the first position (waiting position), and the first winning opening (314R, 313') is in the closed state at the second position (operating position). and an opening/closing part (362) with
Continuing to the opening and closing part (362), restricting the movement of the game ball on the right side of the first winning hole toward the opening and closing part (362) at the first position (standby position), the second position ( a guide portion (363) that allows the game ball on the right side of the first winning hole to move toward the opening/closing portion (362) in the operating position);
The gaming machine according to appendix J1, characterized by having

According to the gaming machine according to appendix J2, a movable accessory member having an opening/closing part capable of opening and closing the first winning hole and a guide part for moving the game ball on the right side of the first winning hole toward the opening/closing part is provided. With a simple configuration, the movable accessory member allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the first prize winning opening and permits or limits the entry of game balls into the second prize winning opening at the same time.

[Appendix J3]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352) and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are distributed to the distribution section (38). further comprising a sorting device (35) that sorts to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by
The opening/closing part (362)
In the first position (standby position), the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is allowed to enter the first winning port (314R, 313'), whereas the second winning Restrict the ball entering the mouth (315),
In the second position (operating position), the second winning opening for restricting the entry of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) into the second winning opening (314R, 313') allow the ball to enter the mouth (315),
The guide part is
At the first position (standby position), movement of a game ball launched into the right side area of the game board (31) is restricted toward the opening/closing part (362), and at the second position (operating position), the game board The game machine according to appendix J2, characterized in that it allows a game ball hit to the right side area of (31) to move toward the opening/closing part (362).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J3, the game balls are distributed to the first path and the second path by the distribution device, and the game balls are distributed to the second path by the distribution device, and the game balls are operated by the movable accessory member. Entry of game balls into the first winning hole and the second winning hole is permitted or restricted depending on the presence or absence of. In the gaming machine according to appendix J3, the sorting device cooperates with the movable accessory member so that the game ball sorted to the second passage is directed to the first winning hole by the movable accessory member. , and permitting or restricting the entry of game balls into the second winning hole are simultaneously performed. As a result, in a game machine employing a sorting device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting game machine with new game features according to the control mode of the movement of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix J4]
The movable accessory member (36R) includes a first portion (361R) that allows a game ball to enter the second winning port (315) from the left side of the second winning port (315), and the second winning port. The gaming machine according to appendix J1, further comprising a second part (362R) for allowing a game ball to enter the second winning hole (315) from the right side of (315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix J4, the movable accessory member includes a first portion for entering the game ball into the second winning port from the left side of the second winning port, and a first portion for entering the game ball from the right side of the second winning port. 2 and a second part for entering a ball into a winning hole. As a result, with a simple configuration in which the movable accessory member is provided with the first part and the second part, the movable accessory member allows or restricts the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole and the second winning hole. At the same time, it is possible to allow or restrict the entry of game balls into the ball.

[Appendix J5]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352) and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are distributed to the distribution section (38). further comprising a sorting device (35) that sorts to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by
The movable accessory member (36R) is
At the first position (standby position), the game ball passing through the second passage is allowed to enter the first start port (314),
In the second position (operating position), the first portion (361R) allows the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) to enter the second winning port (352), and the second The gaming machine according to appendix J4, wherein the portion (362R) allows a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) to enter the second winning hole (352).

In the gaming machine according to appendix J5, the first portion of the movable accessory member allows the game ball in the second path of the sorting device to enter the second winning hole. As a result, in a game machine employing a sorting device, a game ball can be entered into the first winning hole by the movable accessory member by a simple configuration in which the movable accessory member is provided with the first portion and the second portion. and permission or restriction of entry of the game ball into the second winning hole can be performed at the same time.

[Appendix J6]
The movable accessory member (36R) is provided between the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R), and allows game balls to enter the specific winning opening (315). further having a penetrating portion (363R),
The game according to appendix J4 or appendix J5, wherein the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R) are inclined so as to become lower toward the through portion (363R). machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F6, by a simple configuration in which a through portion is provided between the first portion and the second portion having different inclination states, both the game ball in the second passage and the game ball in the right region It can be moved to the penetrating part and entered into a specific winning hole.

[Appendix J7]
The movable accessory member (36S) includes a rotatable first movable accessory member (3681S) and a second movable accessory member (3682S),
The tip portions of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) are close to each other at the first position (standby position), and at the second position (operating position). The game machine according to appendix J1, wherein the tips of the are spaced apart.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J7, the movable accessory member is configured as a so-called electric tulip. Therefore, with a simple configuration, the movable accessory member allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the first winning opening and allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the second winning opening at the same time.

[Appendix J8]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352) and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are distributed to the distribution section (38). further comprising a sorting device (35) that sorts to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by
One of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) is provided below the second passage (352), and at the first position (standby position) the The game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) interferes to move the game ball toward the first winning port (314), and the second passage (352) is moved at the second position (operating position). The game machine according to appendix J7, characterized in that the game balls that have passed through interfere with each other to move the game balls toward the second winning opening (315).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J8, game balls are distributed to the first path and the second path by the distribution device, and the game balls are distributed to the second path by the distribution device as the first movable accessory as the movable accessory member. Entry of a game ball into the first winning hole and the second winning hole is permitted or restricted depending on whether or not the member and the second movable accessory member are operated. In the gaming machine according to appendix J8, the sorting device cooperates with the movable accessory member so that the game ball sorted to the second passage is directed to the first winning hole by the movable accessory member. , and permitting or restricting the entry of game balls into the second winning hole are simultaneously performed. As a result, in a game machine employing a sorting device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting game machine with new game features according to the control mode of the movement of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix J9]
Further comprising a first detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a first specific area (352) through which the game ball launched to the left area of the game board can pass,
The movable accessory member (36) moves from the first position (waiting position) to the second position (operating position) when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detection means (318). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1 to I8, which is operated.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J9, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detection means, the movable accessory member allows the game ball to enter the second winning hole. Thereby, the movable accessory member can cause the game ball launched to the left side area of the game board to enter the second winning hole.

[Appendix J10]
Further comprising a second detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a second specific area through which the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board can pass;
The movable accessory member (36) moves from the first position (waiting position) to the second position (operating position) when the passage of the game ball is detected by the second detection means (319). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1 to I9, which is operated.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J10, the movable accessary member allows the game ball to enter the second winning hole when the passage of the game ball is detected by the second detecting means. As a result, the movable accessory member can cause the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board to enter the second winning hole.

[Appendix J11]
The first winning port (314R, 314) is the first whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by the entry of the game ball. It gives an opportunity to make a special judgment (jackpot lottery),
The second winning port (315) is a second special determination whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering a game ball. It gives an opportunity to perform (jackpot lottery),
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1 to J10, wherein the second special judgment has a high degree of expectation for obtaining a judgment result for shifting to the second special game, compared to the first special judgment. .

[Appendix J12]
The first winning port (313') is a general winning port, and the second winning port (315) is a special game state in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering a game ball. It gives an opportunity to make a special judgment (jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to shift to (jackpot gaming state),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1 to J10, characterized in that:

[Appendix K1]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352) and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are distributed to the distribution section (38). A sorting device (35) that sorts to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by
A first prize-winning port through which game balls can be entered;
A first prize winning port (314) that allows entry of game balls that have passed through the first passage (351) or the second passage (352);
A second winning hole that allows entry of a game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) and has a function different from that of the first winning hole;
A first position (standby position) that restricts entry of game balls to the second winning port (315), and a second position (operating position) that allows entry of gaming balls to the second winning port (315) position) and movable accessory members (36S to 36X) operable between
A gap through which a game ball can pass is formed between the game ball and the second winning hole (315), and the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) is directed toward the second winning hole (315). a guiding part (31M') to be moved;
with
The movable accessory members (36S to 36X) are
At the first position (standby position), the second winning hole (315) is closed, and the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is launched into the right area of the game board (31). Limiting the entry of game balls into the second winning port (315),
At the second position (operating position), the second winning port (315) is opened and a path for game balls is formed between the guiding portion (31M') and the second winning port (315). and allowing a game ball hit to the right side area to enter the second winning hole (315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix K1, when the movable accessory member is at the second position, the second path of the sorting device is formed by forming a path for game balls between the guide portion and the second winning opening. Not only the passing game ball but also the game ball hit to the right side area of the game board can be entered into the second winning hole by the movable accessory member. Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning hole from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine with new playability.

[Appendix K2]
The movable accessory member (36S) includes a rotatable first movable accessory member (3681S) and a second movable accessory member (3682S),
The tip portions of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) are close to each other at the first position (standby position), and at the second position (operating position). The game machine according to appendix K1, characterized in that the tips of the are spaced apart.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K2, the movable accessory member is configured as a so-called electric tulip. Therefore, with a simple configuration, the movable accessory member allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the first winning opening and allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the second winning opening at the same time.

[Appendix K3]
One of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) is provided below the second passage (352), and at the first position (standby position) the The game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) interferes to move the game ball toward the first winning port (314), and the second passage (352) is moved at the second position (operating position). The game machine according to appendix K2, characterized in that the game balls that have passed through interfere with each other to move the game balls toward the second winning port (315).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K3, the game balls are distributed to the first path and the second path by the distribution device, and the game balls are distributed to the second path by the distribution device as the first movable accessory as the movable accessory member. Entry of a game ball into the first winning hole and the second winning hole is permitted or restricted depending on whether or not the member and the second movable accessory member are operated. Then, in the gaming machine according to appendix K3, the sorting device and the movable accessory member work together, so that the game ball sorted to the second passage is directed to the first winning hole by the movable accessory member. , and permitting or restricting the entry of game balls into the second winning hole are simultaneously performed. As a result, in a game machine employing a sorting device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting game machine with new game features according to the control mode of the movement of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix K4]
The movable accessory member (36T) is slidable between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position),
The first position (standby position) is a position that closes the second winning port (315) and opens the gap,
The gaming machine according to appendix K1, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position in which the second winning port (315) is opened and the gap is closed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K4, by a simple configuration in which the movable accessory member is slid between the first position for closing the second winning opening and the second position for closing the gap between the guiding portion and the second winning opening, , it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second winning hole from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member.

[Appendix K5]
The movable accessory members (36U, 36V) are operable between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) by rotation,
The first position (standby position) is a position that closes the second winning port (315) and opens the gap,
The gaming machine according to appendix K1, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position in which the second winning port (315) is opened and the gap is closed.

[Appendix K6]
The game machine according to appendix K5, wherein the movable accessory member (36U) is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in a direction along the game board (31).

[Appendix K7]
The game machine according to appendix K5, wherein the movable accessory member (36V) is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the game board (31).

In the gaming machine according to notes K5 to K7, the movable accessory member is moved horizontally between the first position for closing the second winning hole and the second position for closing the gap between the guiding part and the second winning hole. With the simple structure of rotating the movable part, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning hole from a plurality of paths by using one movable accessory member.

[Appendix K8]
The game machine according to appendix K7, wherein the rotating body (36V) can be stopped in an upright state at a third position (standby position) that opens the second starting port (315) and the gap.

In the game machine according to appendix K8, the game balls in the right area of the sorting device are movable in the game state (mode A to mode C) in which the movable accessory member is opened for a short period of time without providing a retraction guidance part. It is possible to prevent the user from being guided to the second starting port by the accessory member.

[Appendix K9]
The movable accessory member (36W) is rotatable, and includes a closing portion (364W) capable of closing the second starting port (315) and the gap, and opening the second starting port (315) and the gap. with a possible penetration (363W),
The first position (standby position) is a position in which the closing portion (364W) closes the second winning opening (315) and the through hole (363W) opens the gap,
The second position (operating position) is a position in which the through hole (363W) opens the second winning port (315) and the closing portion (364W) closes the gap. The game machine described in appendix K1.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K9, a single movable accessory member is used to enter a game ball from a plurality of paths into the second winning hole by a simple configuration in which the movable accessory member having the closing portion and the penetrating portion is rotated. becomes possible.

[Appendix K10]
The movable accessory member (36X) rotates around a rotation axis extending in a direction inclined with respect to the horizontal direction between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) in the gap. is a possible rotating body,
The rotating body (36X) is
A first penetration portion (361X) through which a game ball can pass through along a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis, and a direction that intersects the first penetration portion (361X) when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis. a second through portion (362X) through which the ball can pass;
The first position (standby position) is a position where the game ball is dropped in the gap by the second through portion (362X),
The gaming machine according to appendix K1, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position where the first through portion (361X) communicates with the second starting port (315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix K10, a game ball can enter the second winning hole from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member by a simple configuration in which the rotating body is rotated between the second winning hole and the guiding part. It becomes possible to make a ball.

[Appendix K11]
A game ball that moves the movable accessory members (36T to 36X) toward the second winning port (315) when the movable accessory members (36T to 36X) are at the second position (operating position) The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K4 to K10, further comprising a guard portion (31B) for preventing the second prize winning opening (315) from exceeding the second prize winning opening (315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix K11, by providing the guard portion, when the movable accessory member is at the second position, the game ball moving the movable accessory member toward the second start port is reliably won the second prize. You can put the ball in your mouth.

[Appendix L1]
a plurality of winning holes (314, 315) into which game balls can enter;
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352) and a distribution section (38), and is launched into the left area of the game board (31) and introduced from the introduction port (350). a sorting device (35) for sorting the game balls into either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by the sorting part (38);
A first position (standby position) that restricts the entry of game balls to the second winning opening (315), and a second position that allows entry of gaming balls to the second winning opening (314R) (operation a movable accessory member (36) operable between
A first detection means (318) for detecting that a game ball has passed through the second passage (352);
A second detection means (319) for detecting that a game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31);
further comprising
The movable accessory member (36) is
Said first detection means (318) or said second detection means (319) detects the passage of the game ball, and is operated from said first position (standby position) to said second position (operating position). ,
When in the second position, either the game ball passing through the second passage (352) or the game ball passing through the specific area is permitted to enter the specific winning hole (315). A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine pertaining to Supplementary Note L1, not only the game balls passing through the second path of the sorting device, but also the game balls launched to the right side area of the game board enter a specific winning slot by the movable accessory member. can be made Therefore, it is possible to enter a game ball into a specific winning hole from a plurality of paths by using one movable accessory member. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine with new playability.

[Appendix L2]
The movable accessory member (36) has a longer operating time when satisfying a second condition different from the first condition than the operating time when satisfying the first condition. The gaming machine described in L1.

[Appendix L3]
It is better to hit the game ball in the left area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detection means (318), and the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the second detection means (319). A first game state that is advantageous to the player compared to the case where the game ball is launched in the second direction, and the second state where the game ball is launched in the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the second detection means (319). A second game state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the game ball is hit to the left area so that the passing of the game ball is detected by the detecting means (318); Further comprising a game state transition means (41) for transitioning the state,
The first condition is the first game state (mode A, mode C),
The gaming machine according to appendix L2, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

According to the gaming machine according to appendices L2 and L3, the ease with which a game ball enters a specific winning hole by the movable accessory member in the case where the first condition is satisfied and the case where the second condition is satisfied are considered different. For example, the operation time of the movable accessory member is changed according to the game state (advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied, if the movable accessory member is operated, it is difficult for the game ball launched to the right side area to enter the specific winning hole, and the movement path of the game ball It is possible to set the ease of throwing a game ball into a specific winning hole. As a result, if the player hits right in a situation where left-handed hitting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player is in a disadvantageous situation, so left-handed hitting is encouraged in situations where left-handed hitting is encouraged. it becomes possible to

[Appendix L4]
The specific winning hole (315) is determined by the time required for the game ball detected by the second detection means (319) to enter the specific winning hole (315). ) is arranged at a position longer than the time required for the game ball to enter the specific winning hole (315).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix L4, the time required for the game ball detected by the first detection means to enter the specific winning hole, and the time required for the game ball detected by the second detecting means to enter the specific winning hole It is different from the time required to enter the ball. Therefore, for example, a game ball launched in the left area of the game board can enter a specific winning hole, while a game ball launched in the right area is made difficult to enter into a specific winning hole. becomes possible. As a result, if the player hits right in a situation where left-handed hitting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player is in a disadvantageous situation, so left-handed hitting is encouraged in situations where left-handed hitting is encouraged. it becomes possible to

[Appendix L5]
The operation time of the movable accessory member (36) in the first game state (mode A, mode C) is such that the game ball detected by the first detection means (318) is in the specific winning hole. (315) It is time to allow the entry of a ball and limit the entry of the game ball detected by the second detection means (319) into the specific winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to the feature L3 or L4.

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix L5, it is possible to appropriately restrict entry of a game ball into a specific winning hole when hitting to the right in the first game state in which hitting to the left is encouraged. Therefore, if the player hits right in a situation where left-handed hitting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. becomes possible.

[Appendix L6]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the second game state (mode E) is such that the game ball detected by the second detection means (319) is in the specific winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L3 to L5, characterized in that it is a time when a ball is allowed to be landed at .

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix L6, it is possible to enter a game ball into a specific winning hole by hitting right in the second game state. Therefore, by hitting to the right in the second game state, it is possible to proceed with the game in a state where the number of game balls hardly increases or decreases.

[Appendix L7]
The movable accessory member (36) is
The first winning opening (314R, 313') is in the open state at the first position (waiting position), and the first winning opening (314R, 313') is in the closed state at the second position (operating position). and an opening/closing part (362) with
Continuing to the opening and closing part (362), restricting the movement of the game ball on the right side of the first winning hole toward the opening and closing part (362) at the first position (standby position), the second position ( a guide portion (363) that allows the game ball on the right side of the first winning hole to move toward the opening/closing portion (362) in the operating position);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1 to L6, characterized by having

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix L7, a movable accessory member having an opening/closing part capable of opening and closing the first winning hole and a guide part for moving the game ball on the right side of the first winning hole toward the opening/closing part is provided. With a simple configuration, the movable accessory member allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the first prize winning opening and permits or limits the entry of game balls into the second prize winning opening at the same time.

[Appendix L8]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352) and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are distributed to the distribution section (38). further comprising a sorting device (35) that sorts to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by
The opening/closing part (362)
In the first position (standby position), the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is allowed to enter the first winning port (314R, 313'), whereas the second winning Restrict the ball entering the mouth (315),
In the second position (operating position), the second winning opening for restricting the entry of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) into the second winning opening (314R, 313') allow the ball to enter the mouth (315),
The guide part is
At the first position (standby position), movement of a game ball launched into the right side area of the game board (31) is restricted toward the opening/closing part (362), and at the second position (operating position), the game board The game machine according to appendix L7, characterized in that movement of a game ball hit to the right side area of (31) toward the opening/closing part (362) is permitted.

In the gaming machine pertaining to Supplementary Note L8, the game balls are distributed to the first path and the second path by the distribution device, the game balls are distributed to the second path by the distribution device, and the game balls are activated by the movable accessory member. Entry of game balls into the first winning hole and the second winning hole is permitted or restricted depending on the presence or absence of. In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L8, the sorting device cooperates with the movable accessory member so that the game ball sorted to the second passage is directed to the first winning hole by the movable accessory member. , and permitting or restricting the entry of game balls into the second winning hole are simultaneously performed. As a result, in a game machine employing a sorting device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting game machine with new game features according to the control mode of the movement of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix L9]
The movable accessory member (36R) includes a first portion (361R) that allows a game ball to enter the second winning port (315) from the left side of the second winning port (315), and the second winning port. A gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1 to L6, characterized by having a second portion (362R) that allows a game ball to enter the second winning hole (315) from the right side of (315). .

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L9, the movable accessory member includes a first portion for entering the game ball into the second winning port from the left side of the second winning port, and a first portion for entering the game ball from the right side of the second winning port. 2 and a second part for entering a ball into a winning hole. As a result, with a simple configuration in which the movable accessory member is provided with the first part and the second part, the movable accessory member allows or restricts the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole and the second winning hole. At the same time, it is possible to allow or restrict the entry of game balls into the ball.

[Appendix L10]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352) and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are distributed to the distribution section (38). further comprising a sorting device (35) that sorts to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by
The movable accessory member (36R) is
At the first position (standby position), the game ball passing through the second passage is allowed to enter the first start port (314),
In the second position (operating position), the first portion (361R) allows the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) to enter the second winning port (352), and the second The gaming machine according to appendix L9, wherein the portion (362R) allows a game ball hit to the right side area of the game board (31) to enter the second winning hole (352).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L10, the first portion of the movable accessory member allows a game ball in the second path of the sorting device to enter the second winning hole. As a result, in a game machine employing a sorting device, a game ball can be entered into the first winning hole by the movable accessory member by a simple configuration in which the movable accessory member is provided with the first portion and the second portion. and permission or restriction of entry of the game ball into the second winning hole can be performed at the same time.

[Appendix L11]
The movable accessory member (36R) is provided between the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R), and allows game balls to enter the specific winning opening (315). further having a penetrating portion (363R),
The game according to appendix L9 or appendix L10, wherein the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R) are inclined so as to become lower toward the through portion (363R). machine.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L11, both the game ball in the second path and the game ball in the right area can be It can be moved to the penetrating part and entered into a specific winning hole.

[Appendix L12]
The movable accessory member (36S) includes a rotatable first movable accessory member (3681S) and a second movable accessory member (3682S),
The tip portions of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) are close to each other at the first position (standby position), and at the second position (operating position). The game machine according to any one of appendices L1 to L6, characterized in that the tip portions of the are spaced apart.

In the game machine according to appendix L12, the movable accessory member is configured as a so-called electric tulip. Therefore, with a simple configuration, the movable accessory member allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the first winning opening and allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the second winning opening at the same time.

[Appendix L13]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352) and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are distributed to the distribution section (38). further comprising a sorting device (35) that sorts to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by
One of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) is provided below the second passage (352), and at the first position (standby position) the The game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) interferes to move the game ball toward the first winning port (314), and the second passage (352) is moved at the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to appendix L12, characterized in that the game balls that have passed through interfere with each other to move the game balls toward the second winning port (315).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L13, the game balls are distributed to the first path and the second path by the distribution device, and the game balls are distributed to the second path by the distribution device as the first movable accessory as the movable accessory member. Entry of a game ball into the first winning hole and the second winning hole is permitted or restricted depending on whether or not the member and the second movable accessory member are operated. Then, in the gaming machine according to appendix L13, the sorting device and the movable accessory member work together, so that the game ball sorted to the second path by the movable accessory member is directed to the first winning hole. , and permitting or restricting the entry of game balls into the second winning hole are simultaneously performed. As a result, in a game machine employing a sorting device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting game machine with new game features according to the control mode of the movement of the movable accessory member.

10: Game machine 31: Game board 31B: Guard nail 314: First starting port 314L: Left first starting port 314R: Right first starting port 315: Second starting port 316: Variable winning device 316b: Variable winning port 318: First through gate 319: Second through gates 35, 35A, 35B, 35C, 35D, 35E, 35F: Sorting device 351: First passage 352: Second passages 36, 36A to 36R, 36T to 36X: Electric support member 36S: Electric tulip accessory device 3681S: Left wing member 3682S: Right wing member 361X: First through part 362X: Second through part 361X', 362X': Through hole 362: Opening/closing part 363; Guide part 363W: Through hole 363W ': through portion 364W: closing portions 364, 364A, 364B: delay guide 364C: meandering grooves 364D to 364G: linear convex portion 364H: linear concave portion 364OI to 364N: convex portion 364O, 364P: concave portion 364Q: roller 371: third 1 special symbol indicator 372: second special symbol indicator 373: normal symbol indicator 374: reserved number indicator 38, 38A, 38B: distribution member 38C: roller 38D: windmill 381D: nail 382D: rotating body 38E: mountain Shaped fixing part 38F: Triangular nail 389F: Vertex nails 393, 394: Retreat guide nail 41: MPU
82: Special Variable Winning Device 824: V Winning Port 824
83: Wing accessory device 833: V winning mouth 99: Game ball

Claims (1)

A first prize-winning port through which game balls can be entered;
a second prize winning port into which a game ball can enter and having a function different from that of the first prize winning port;
Restrict entry of a game ball into one of the first winning opening and the second winning opening, and restrict entry of a game ball into the other winning opening different from the one winning opening Movable operable between a first position that permits entry and a second position that permits entry of a game ball into one of the winning openings and restricts entry of a game ball into the other winning opening. Accessory parts and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images